JP6519244B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko machines have been known which perform lottery in accordance with winning of a game ball to a starting opening, and display on a liquid crystal screen variation effects and jackpot effects according to the lottery results. In such an effect, an effect for causing the player to have a sense of expectation by performing an effect or the like for variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols, an effect for enhancing the player's willingness to participate in the game, etc. Various patterns of effects are executed to improve the interest of the game.

  In such a pachinko machine, for example, after a symbol row is scroll-displayed for a predetermined period and then stopped and displayed, an effect that causes the player to expect whether a specific symbol in the symbol row is stopped and displayed. It has been proposed that what will be done.

Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2010-075741

  In this type of pachinko machine, there is a problem that the player has a monotonous impression on the game and the player gets bored early in the game.

  The present invention has been made to solve the problems and the like exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a player from getting bored with a game early.

Gaming machine of the present invention in order to achieve the object, a judging means for performing the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and display means identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination unit is displayed, the in the case where the dynamic display means capable of identification information Ru is dynamically displayed on the display unit, the determination result by the determining means is displayed by said identification information to indicate that it is the specific determination result, has a privilege providing means capable of imparting favorable privilege the player, wherein the identification information is composed of a plurality of symbol columns, that appear in a particular combination of symbols, the determination It is configured to indicate that the determination result by the means is the specific determination result, and among the plurality of symbol rows, in the symbol rows other than one symbol row, a sub symbol different from the symbol is displayed. Configured to be able to display The dynamic display means can display other than the one symbol row in a reach display mode that can be a combination for indicating the specific determination result, and the game machine can be operated by the player Are displayed in the reach display mode in which the sub symbol is displayed in addition to the symbol row of 1 by the dynamic operation means and the dynamic display means, and the symbol row of 1 is a combination other than the combination of the specific symbol When the symbol is stopped and displayed, it has a symbol variable means capable of variably displaying the display mode of the sub symbol being stopped and displayed, and the variable sub symbol is changed The symbol displayed in the symbol row of 1 is displayed in such a manner as to make it impossible to visually recognize the symbol, and based on the operation of the operation means, the symbols of the symbol row of the 1 not visible can be Specific figure It is varied in design as a combination of visibly displayed be those that are configured to enable.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention , the determination means for performing the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, the display means for displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the display of the identification information A benefit advantageous to the player when displayed by the dynamic display means capable of being dynamically displayed on the means and the identification information for indicating that the judgment result by the judgment means is a specific judgment result And the identification information is constituted by a plurality of symbol rows and displayed by a combination of specific symbols, whereby the determination result by the determination means is the identification. It is configured to indicate that it is the determination result of the symbol pattern, and among the plurality of symbol rows, it is possible to display a sub-symbol different from the symbol in the symbol rows other than one symbol row. And the dynamic display hand Can be displayed in a reach display mode that can be a combination for indicating the specific determination result except for the symbol row of 1 above, and the gaming machine can be operated by an operation means that can be operated by a player It is displayed in the reach display mode in which the sub symbol is displayed other than the symbol row of 1 by the dynamic display means, and symbols which are combinations other than the combination of the specific symbol are stopped and displayed in the symbol row of 1 And the symbol changing means capable of variably displaying the display mode of the sub symbol being stopped and displayed, and the variable sub symbol stopped in the symbol row of 1 It is displayed in a mode that makes it impossible to visually recognize the displayed symbols, and based on the operation of the operation means, the symbols of the 1 symbol row that can not be visually recognized are combined with the combination of the specific symbols The Ru der those configured to be capable to vary to visibly displayed on the symbol.

I I, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player get bored in the game at an early stage.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a unit storage member. It is a front view of a unit storage member. It is a front perspective view of a projection operation unit in the state where a base side displacement member and a relative displacement member were arranged at a retreat position. (A) is a disassembled front perspective view of a protrusion operation unit, (b) is a rear perspective view of a connection rod. It is a front schematic diagram which illustrated the transmission means in front view typically. It is a front schematic diagram which illustrated the transmission means in front view typically. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a base side displacement member and a relative displacement member. It is a rear perspective view of a base side displacement member and a relative displacement member. It is a front view of a protrusion operation unit. It is a front view of a protrusion operation unit. It is a front view of a protrusion operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a protrusion operation unit. (A) is a side view of the protrusion operation unit in the arrow XVIIa direction view of FIG. 16, (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the protrusion operation unit in the portion XVIIb of FIG. 17 (a). It is a front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a compound operation unit. (A) is a front view of a to-be-driven member and a following member, (b) is a side view of a to-be-driven member and a following member in the arrow XXIIb direction view of Fig.22 (a). (A) is a front view of a to-be-driven member, (b) is a back surface part of a to-be-driven member. It is a side view of the driven member in the arrow XXIV direction view of Drawing 23 (a). (A) is a front view of a driven member, (b) is a back part of a driven member. It is a side view of the driven member in the arrow XXVI direction view of Drawing 25 (a). (A) is a front schematic view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a front schematic view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove FIG. (A) is a front schematic view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a front schematic view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove FIG. (A) is a front schematic view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a front schematic view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove FIG. (A) is a front schematic view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a front schematic view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove FIG. (A) is a front schematic view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a front schematic view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove FIG. (A) is a front schematic view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a front schematic view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove FIG. It is a front perspective view of a rotational operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a rotational operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a rotational operation unit. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a rotational operation unit. (A) is a rear view of a main-body part, (b) is a partial enlarged rear view of a main-body part which expands and shows the XXXVII part of Fig.37 (a). It is a front view of a rotational operation unit. FIG. 38 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the rotary operation unit along line XXXIXa-XXXIXa in FIG. 38 (a), and FIG. 38 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotary operation unit 600 along line XXXIXb-XXXIXb in FIG. 38 (b). . (A) is a figure which showed typically area | region division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode of a reservation effect normally. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display aspect of eight effects. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode in the fluctuation pattern of a synthetic | combination display mode. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode in the fluctuation pattern of a synthetic | combination display mode. It is the timing chart which showed the period setting from the power activation of the pachinko machine. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode in a time production period. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing a display mode in a time effect period, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing a display mode in a time effect extension period. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode at the time of completion | finish of a time production period. It is the model which showed the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing a part of the contents of ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing a part of the contents of RAM in the main control device is there. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing a special hit random number table, (b) is a schematic view schematically showing a special hit type selection table, and (c) is a normal hit random number table It is the schematic diagram which showed typically. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing a part of the contents of ROM of the audio lamp control device, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing a part of the contents of RAM of the audio lamp control device FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is the model which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the model which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the time setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the notice selection processing executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the winning a prize command reception processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation display setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the button presentation selection process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the synchronous production management processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the extension production setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding number display update process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and presentation process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flow chart which showed the button production execution processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the background image setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing fluctuation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the notice command processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the production | presentation command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning picture setting processing which is run by MPU inside the display control. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is the figure which compared the size of the pixel of a main liquid crystal and a sub liquid crystal. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment, (b) shows the display size comparison with the main liquid crystal and sub liquid crystal of pachinko machine 10 in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control control equipment of the pachinko machine in 3rd execution form. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 4th embodiment. (A)-(b) is the figure which showed the internal structure of the distribution unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a time chart for explaining production control about suspension design effect in a 4th embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically area division setting and effective line setting of a display screen in a 4th embodiment, and (b) is a figure which illustrated an actual display screen in a 4th embodiment. is there. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode of the normal holding effect in 4th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display aspect of eight production in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing a display mode of eight effects in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing a display mode of additional winning effects in the fourth embodiment FIG. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode of the special continuation presentation in 4th Embodiment. It is a time chart for explaining the flow about the synthetic display production in a 4th embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode of the synthetic | combination display effect in 4th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode of the synthetic | combination display effect in 4th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode of the synthetic | combination display effect in 4th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the display mode of the synthetic | combination display effect in 4th Embodiment. It is a time chart for explaining the flow about the time production in a 4th embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display aspect of the time presentation in 4th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display aspect of the time presentation in 4th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display aspect of the time presentation in 4th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a block showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main control device in the fourth embodiment FIG. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment, (b) shows the electrical configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment It is a block diagram shown. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the presentation time selection table in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment, (b) is the presentation selected by the presentation time selection table in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed the time table of time typically. It is the flow chart which showed special symbol variation processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 4th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation execution decision processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control unit in 4th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing which is executed by the MPU inside the main control unit in 4th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing which is executed by the MPU inside the main control device in 4th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the starting winning a prize process 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in a 4th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the time setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and presentation process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the identification number input process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed eight piece reservation production processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment in 4th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the button production process which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment in 4th execution form. It is the flow chart which showed notice selection processing 2 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 4th embodiment. It is the flow chart which shows winning a prize command reception processing 2 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 4th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation display setting processing 2 which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in 4th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed fluctuation pattern selective processing 2 which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment in 4th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the button presentation selection processing 2 which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the setting processing during 8 productions which are executed by MPU in the sound lamp control device in a 4th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the synchronous production | presentation management process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the production time setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment in 4th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the extension production setting processing 2 which is executed by MPU in the sound lamp control control equipment in 4th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed pending | holding command processing 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the production | presentation command processing 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 5th embodiment. (A)-(b) is the figure which showed the internal structure of the distribution unit in 5th Embodiment. It is a time chart explaining the flow about the special symbol change production performed using the main screen and sub screen in a 5th embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display aspect of the special symbol variation production in 5th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display aspect of the special symbol variation production in 5th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the prior pseudo fluctuation setting processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in a 5th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 5th Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 39, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination thereof guides the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the effect of super reach. Ru.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side of the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. 2) is made visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball emission unit 112a, an emission stop switch 51b for stopping emission of the ball during the pressing operation, and rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) or the like for detecting the amount of movement operation (rotational position) by a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of the turning operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (ballistic strength), whereby the ball is struck to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the emission stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "seven box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, and rails 61 and 62. The first opening 63, the second opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the back surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1) Attached to the side. The base plate 60 is made of a light transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed by tapping screw etc. from the front side.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a prize opening and the like are provided and launched). Area where the ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed on the lower left side of the game area (the lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B perform display according to each control performed by the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 4), and display of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly performed. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, and when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a steady change, a time-short or a normal, by means of LEDs, or indicate whether it is in fluctuation by means of an on-light condition. The stop symbol indicates whether the symbol corresponds to the probability variation big hit or the symbol corresponding to the normal big hit or not by the lighted state, or indicates the number of holding balls by the lighted state, and by the 7-segment display device, the round of the big hit Display numbers and errors. In addition, a plurality of LEDs may be configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 having a winning. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the jackpot is successful (jump lottery), and when it is determined that the jackpot is made, the jackpot type is also determined. As jackpot types determined here, 15R probability variation jackpots, 4R probability variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. Not only is it shown whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as the stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown .

  Here, "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 round jackpots, and "4R probability variation jackpot" is a maximum number of round jackpots with 4 rounds It is a probability change jackpot to shift to a high probability state after. Also, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a low probability state after jackpots of 15 rounds and for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuation numbers) becomes a short time state. is there.

  Also, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (during a definite change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special gaming state The state of The high probability state (during a definite change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 640 by increasing the hitting probability of the second symbol described later. The term "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of change is not positive, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that of probability change. Moreover, with the time saving state (time saving) of the "low probability state", the jackpot probability is a normal state, and only the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased with the jackpot probability unchanged, and the second winning opening 640 To say the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is normally medium is the state of the game which is neither a definite change nor a time reduction (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is increased).

  The probability change of the second symbol not only increases during a definite change or time, but also the time when the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is changed, and a longer time than normal It is set. When the motorized part 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball reaches the second winning opening 640 compared to when the motorized part 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy condition. Therefore, the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 640 during a definite change or during a time cut, and it is possible to increase the number of times a jackpot lottery is performed.

  In addition, in addition to changing the opening time of the motorized role thing 640a attached to the second winning a prize opening 640 during a definite change or during a short time, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric operation per hit A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640 a is released more than in the normal mode. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol does not change during definite changes or during a short time, and the electric symbol 640a is opened at a time and once when the electric symbol 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened. At least one of the numbers may be changed. In addition, the time during which the electric winning combination 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is open or the number of times the electric combination 640a is opened per hit does not occur during a certain change or during a short time, and the second symbol is hit Only the probability may be changed to be up relative to normal.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winnings (start winnings) to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, while being synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol A third symbol display device 81 configured of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a ball of through gate 67 A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided.

  Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible from an opening opened at the center of the center frame 86. In addition, when the projecting operation unit 400 or the combined operation unit 500 described later is operated, at least a portion of the relative displacement member 450 or the driven member 560 projects into the opening of the center frame 86 and can be viewed through the opening. It is assumed. For example, when the projecting operation unit 400 is disposed at the rotational position by the first operation (see FIG. 14A), the tip portion of the relative displacement member 450 is visible through the opening of the center frame 86, When disposed at the overhanging position by the second operation (see FIG. 15B), substantially the entire relative displacement member 450 is visible through the opening of the center frame 86.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling these third symbols for each symbol row It is supposed to be. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment is the first symbol display device 37A, 37B in which the display of the gaming state accompanied by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed, but the first A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “o” and the symbol “x” as display symbols (the second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through gate 67 It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If it is a result of the winning lottery, if it is a hit, the symbol of "o" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the second symbol in the second symbol display device. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the third symbol in the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "o"), the motorized role 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 has a predetermined time It is configured to be activated (opened) only.

  The time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the definite change and during the short time, it is possible to perform the winning lottery more frequently than in the middle. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning combination 640 a of the second winning opening 640 to be in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the time saving.

  In addition, the second winning opening 640 during the definite change or time reduction by other methods, such as increasing the open probability and increasing the opening time and opening number of the motorized combination 640a per hit, which increases the hit probability during definite change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state in which it is easy to win, the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter during the definite change or during the short time than during the normal time, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, and a single hit The opening time and the number of times of opening of the motorized role product 640a with respect to may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the ball flowing down the right of the game board can pass Is configured. When the ball passes through gate 67, a lottery for winning the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, the symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out For example, the symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball passes through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol hold lamp (not shown) Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of holding balls for the passage of the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol holding lamp may not perform the lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, there is disposed a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can be won. When the ball is won in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control unit 110 is turned on due to the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A lottery for a big hit is made at (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the right side in a front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball is won in the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control unit 110 is turned on due to the second winning opening switch being turned on. A lottery for a big hit is made at (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

  Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is winning in the second winning opening 640 are configured the same. The number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball has won the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the second winning opening 640 has the ball, for example, to the first winning opening 64 The number of winning balls to be paid out when the player wins a prize may be three, and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the second prize winning hole 640 has won may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by a motorized role 640 a. The electric role object 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally, the electric role object 640a is in a closed state (shrinkage state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second prize opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol of "o" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the fluctuation display of the second symbol performed triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the motorized role piece 640a is in the open state (enlarged State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As mentioned above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal condition, and the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is short as compared to the normal, and therefore, in the variable display of the second symbol The symbol of “” becomes easy to be displayed, and the number of times that the motorized role piece 640 a is in the open state (enlarged state) is increased. Furthermore, during definite period of time and short time, the time when the motorized accessory 640a is opened is also longer than usual. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win to the second winning opening 640 compared to the normal time during definite variation and during time saving.

  Here, the probability of being a big hit is the same in either the low probability state or the high probability state in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case in which the ball has won in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected when jackpot is higher is higher in the case where the ball has won in the second winning opening 640 than in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have a motorized part like the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always in a state where it is possible to win.

  Therefore, during the normal operation, there are many cases in which the motorized prize associated with the second winning opening 640 is in the closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640, and therefore, it is directed to the first prize opening 64 without the electric jack. Launch the ball so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and the winning of the first winning opening 64 gives a lot of opportunities for a big hit lottery and becomes a big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim at things.

  On the other hand, the electric gate 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in the open state by passing the ball through the through gate 67 during definite variation or time, and it is easy to win the second winning opening 640. The ball is fired so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display 80 toward the second winning hole 640 (so-called "right-handed"), and the motor gate is opened by passing through the through gate 67. It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning in the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment emits a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the process of being changed, time is short, or is normal). You can change the way of “right-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because it can change the way of hitting the ball.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the upper right side of the first winning opening 64, and a substantially long rectangular shaped special winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed, the stop symbol of the big hit and The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area, which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time The game state that the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period of time for a predetermined number of times during the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a It may be formed as a state. In addition, the specific winning combination opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the upper right side of the first winning combination opening 64, For example, the left side of the variable display unit 80 may be used.

  In the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label or the like is provided, and a seal paper stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be viewed through 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball flowing down the game area, which has not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, is guided to the ball discharging passage (not shown) through the first out port 71. The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.

  A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 for dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device by the MPU 201 Run.

  Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The RAM 203 is a stack area in which various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc. are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specified winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side and a solenoid for driving a motorized part is connected to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115 described later. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. . The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. To the input / output port 225, a main control unit 110, a display control unit 114, an audio output unit 226, a lamp display unit 227, other units 228, a frame button 22 and the like are connected. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420, 530, 630.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81, or super reach It instructs the display control device 114 to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display effect variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226 by outputting the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by the display command. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the unit storage member 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. 5 and 6 are front views of the unit storage member 300. In FIG. 5, the state in which each operation unit 400 to 800 is disposed at the retracted position is shown, and in FIG. 6, the projection operation unit 400 and the combined operation unit 500 are stretched. The state of being placed at the exit position is illustrated respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 6, the unit storage member 300 is a front side from the bottom wall plate in a rectangular shape in a front view and an outer wall plate erected from the outer edge of four sides of the bottom wall portion (FIG. Side is formed in an open box shape. In the bottom plate of the unit storage member 300, an opening 301 having a rectangular shape in a front view is formed at a central portion thereof, whereby the unit storage member 300 is formed in a frame shape having a rectangular shape in a front view. The opening 301 is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (refer to FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be disposed).

  In the unit storage member 300, the projection operation unit 400, the combined operation unit 500, the rotation operation unit 600, the projection and retraction operation unit 700, and the projection operation unit 800 are respectively stored in the internal space thereof, whereby one operation unit 200 is provided. Configured as

  The protrusion operation unit 400 includes a base side displacement member 440 and a relative displacement member 450, and operates (displacement) between both displacement members 440 and 450 between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the overhang position shown in FIG. Let At the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the space required for the retracted position is reduced by forming the state in which the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are overlapped in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 5). On the other hand, at the overhang position shown in FIG. 6, the relative displacement member 450 is slide-displaced with respect to the base side displacement member 440 to enlarge the whole, thereby securing visibility and enhancing the rendering effect. The operation of the protrusion operation unit 400 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 7 to 17.

  The combined operation unit 500 includes a driven member 550 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) and a driven member 560, and these members 550 and 560 are between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the overhanging position shown in FIG. Operate (displace) with. In this case, the compound operation unit 500 causes the driven member 550 to perform only rotational movement centering on the predetermined position, while the driven member 560 connected to the driven member 550 performs linear motion and the like. By performing the motion combined with the rotational motion, a change is given to the trajectory of the driven member 560 to enhance the rendering effect. The operation of the combined operation unit 500 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 18 to 32.

  The rotary operation unit 600 includes a first rotary body 650 and a second rotary body 660 disposed concentrically, and by rotating both the rotary bodies 650 and 660, it is easy to associate the two rotations with the player. Thus, the effect of the effect of rotating the plurality of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) is exhibited. The operation of the rotational operation unit 600 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 33 to 39.

  In addition, the projecting and retracting operation unit 700 is provided with a projecting and retracting member 710 which is formed slidably, and the projecting operation unit 800 is provided with a projecting member 810 which is formed rotatably, and the projecting and retracting member 710 and the projecting member 810. Slide displacement or rotation between a retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and a projected position (not shown) in a state of projecting the front surface (front surface) of the opening 301 (the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2) To move (displace).

  Next, the projecting operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 17. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the projecting operation unit 400 in a state in which the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are disposed at the retracted position. FIG. 8A is an exploded front perspective view of the projecting operation unit 400, and FIG. 8B is a rear perspective view of the connecting rod 460. As shown in FIG.

  FIGS. 7 and 8 illustrate a state in which the projecting and retracting operation unit 700 sharing the projecting operation unit 400 and the case body 410 is juxtaposed to the projecting operation unit 400. In addition, the pair of projecting operation units 400 are formed symmetrically on the left and right sides of the projecting and retracting operation unit 700 below the opening 301 (see FIGS. 5 and 6). Since the structure is substantially the same, only one (provided on the right side in front view) will be described, and the description on the other (provided on the left side in front view) will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the protrusion operation unit 400 has a case body 410 having a framework on its back side, a drive motor 420 disposed on the front side of the case body 410, and its drive motor 420. A plurality of gears (pinion gear 431, intermediate gear 432 and crank gear 433) for transmitting rotational driving force, a base displacement member 440 rotatably supported by the case body 410, and a slide displacement to the base displacement member 440 Mainly comprising a relative displacement member 450 which is disposed, and a connecting rod 460 which connects between the relative displacement member 450 and the crank gear 433 and which is rotatably supported by the case body 410. Ru.

  The case body 410 is made of a resin material, and a storage recess 411 having an outer shape corresponding to a plurality of gears (each gear 431, 432, 433) is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the case body 410. The rod support shaft 412 is provided on the side of the housing recess 411 (right side in FIG. 8A), and the base support shaft 413 is provided below the housing recess 411 (lower side in FIG. 8A). The support shafts 412 and 413 are made of a brass material and are disposed in a posture parallel to the rotation axes of the gears 431 to 433.

  In the present embodiment, when the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are disposed at the retracted position, as described later, the displacement members 440 and 450, the connecting rod 460, and the gears 431, 432, and 433 The storage recess 411 is recessed in the front of the case body 410, and the gears 431, 432, and 433 are stored in the storage recess 411, respectively (see FIG. 13). Thus, the projection operation unit 400 can be miniaturized in the front-rear direction.

  A pinion gear 431 is attached to the drive shaft of the drive motor 420, and an intermediate gear 432 is engaged with the pinion gear 431, and a crank gear 433 is engaged with the intermediate gear 432. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the drive motor 420 is rotationally driven and the pinion gear 431 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the crank gear 433 via the intermediate gear 432, and the crank gear 433 is rotated.

  The intermediate gear 432 and the crank gear 433 are pivotally supported by the case body 410. Further, each of the gears 431 to 433 is formed as a spur gear whose teeth are engraved on the outer peripheral surface in parallel with the rotation axis. In this case, the crank gear 433 has a radial decoration formed on the front surface (axial end surface), and the diameter of the front portion (axial end surface) is greater than the tip circle of the teeth engraved on the outer peripheral surface. It is enlarged and formed so as to be able to shield the player from teeth in front view.

  On the front surface (axial end surface) of the crank gear 433, a crank pin 433 a is protrudingly provided at a position eccentric to the rotation shaft of the crank gear 433. The crank pin 433 a is a portion connected to the connecting rod 460 and is formed as a cylindrical body parallel to the rotation axis of the crank gear 433 and is slidably inserted into the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460. (Refer FIG.9 and FIG.10). Thus, when the crank gear 433 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the connecting rod 460 via the crank pin 433a.

  The base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are effect members for producing effects by being displaced from the retracted position to the overhang position (see FIGS. 5 and 6). A hole 442 is rotatably supported by the base side support shaft 413 of the case body 410, and a relative displacement member 450 is slidably disposed on the front side of the base side displacement member 440.

  Here, a decorative portion 454 is formed on the front side of the relative displacement member 450. The decoration part 454 is a part for decorating the front side of the relative displacement member 450, and from the base end side (the rotation center side when the base side displacement member 440 is rotated, the lower side of FIG. 7 and FIG. 8) The whole is formed in a front view tapered shape in which the width becomes narrower as it goes to the distal end side (the rotating distal end side when the proximal end displacement member 440 is rotated, the upper side in FIGS. 7 and 8) The first portion 454a, the second portion 454b, and the third portion 454c are aligned in the longitudinal direction.

  The first portion 454a, the second portion 454b and the third portion 454c of the decorative portion 454 are formed to have a size corresponding to the tapered shape of the entire decorative portion 454. That is, the third portion 454c, in which the second portion 454b positioned in the middle of the first portion 454a positioned on the distal end side is proximal to the second portion 454b positioned in the middle, has a large outer diameter. It is formed in a square shape.

  In this case, the first portion 454a, the second portion 454b, and the third portion 454c are arranged to have different positions in the front-rear direction (positions in the vertical direction in FIG. 5). Specifically, the third portion 454c, in which the second portion 454b positioned in the middle of the first portion 454a positioned on the distal end side is proximal to the second portion 454b positioned in the middle, is a front surface, respectively. It is disposed on the (front) side (the front side in FIG. 5).

  Thereby, the decorative portion 454 of the relative displacement member 450 (that is, the front surface of the relative displacement member 450) is moved from the base end side (the rotation center side of the base side displacement member 440, the lower side of FIG. 7 and FIG. As it goes to the rotating tip side of the proximal end displacement member 440 (upper side in FIG. 7 and FIG. 8), it is lowered and inclined in the form of steps (three steps in this embodiment) in the direction approaching the case body 410.

  Thereby, as described later, when rotating the base-side displacement member 440 (see FIGS. 13 and 14), the decorative member 480 is prevented from contacting the decorative member 480 (see FIGS. 16 and 17). In the rear face side, both displacement members 440 and 450 can pass through to improve the rendering effect, and when projecting the relative displacement member 450 (see FIG. 15), the decorative portion 454 can be fronted (forward ) To improve the force.

  The detailed configurations of the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 will be described later (see FIGS. 11 and 12).

  The connecting rod 460 is a long plate-like member for transmitting the rotation of the crank gear 433 to the relative displacement member 450, and has a shaft support hole 461 drilled as a circular hole at one end side in the longitudinal direction, and its shaft A connecting hole 462 is formed as an elongated hole extending along the longitudinal direction on the other end side opposite to the supporting hole 461, and a longitudinal direction between the axial supporting hole 461 and the connecting hole 462 And a rod groove 463 which is recessed on the back side as a recessed groove extending along the groove.

  The connecting rod 460 is attached to the case body 410 in a state where the rod support shaft 412 of the case body 410 is inserted into the shaft support hole 461 and the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 is inserted into the rod groove 463. Further, the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 is inserted into the connection hole 462 of the connection rod 460 (see FIGS. 11 and 12). Thus, as described later, the connecting rod 460 is rotated about the rod support shaft 412 as the rotation of the crank gear 433 (see FIGS. 9 and 10), and along with the rotation of the connecting rod 460, The base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are rotated (first operation) and slide displaced (second operation) (see FIG. 12), and operated (displaced) between the retracted position and the extended position.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, the drive motor 420, the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are respectively disposed on the front (one surface) side of the case body 410. Protruding motion compared to the case where the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are disposed on the front (one surface) side and the drive motor 420 is disposed on the back (other surface) side with the case body 410 interposed therebetween. The size of the unit 400 in the front-rear direction can be reduced.

  Furthermore, since the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are disposed at the retracted position with the drive motor 420 positioned on the extension of the longitudinal direction thereof (see FIG. 13A), these drive motor 420, the base side displacement member 440, and the relative displacement member 450 can be linearly arranged. Therefore, the space required as a retracted position on the front side of the case body 410 can be efficiently suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the transmission means for transmitting the rotational drive force of the drive motor 420 to the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 is cranked together with the plurality of gears (each gear 431 to 433) and the crank gear 433. A portion composed of a connection rod 460 forming a mechanism and connected to the connection rod 460 (connection hole 462 and rod groove 463) and the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 and the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 as described later. Of the transmission means (each of the gears 431 to 433 and the connecting rod 460) and each of the support shafts 411 and 412 so that they are disposed in the region between the rod support shaft 412 and the base support shaft 413 of the case body 410. Set the placement.

  Thus, in a state where the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are disposed at the retracted position, the transmission means is disposed in a region overlapping the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 in front view. can do. That is, the dead space formed on the back side of the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 disposed at the retracted position can be effectively used as the arrangement space of the transmission means. As a result, in addition to the effects of the positional relationship between the drive motor 420 and the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 described above, it is possible to synergistically achieve miniaturization of the outer shape in the front and rear direction of the projection operation unit 400 and front view. it can.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10, the operation of the transmission means (pinion gear 431, intermediate gear 432, crank gear 433 and connecting rod 460) will be described. 9 and 10 are front schematic views schematically showing the transmission means in a front view, and in FIG. 9A, the state where the crank gear 433 is disposed at the first rotational position is shown in FIG. 9B. Then, the state in which the crank gear 433 is disposed at the intermediate rotational position and the state in which the crank gear 433 is disposed at the second rotational position are illustrated in FIG.

  9 and 10, the shapes of the gears 431 to 433 and the connecting rod 460 are schematically illustrated in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate the understanding. 9 and 10, the position of the center line of the connecting rod 460 when the crank gear 433 is disposed at the first rotational position, the intermediate rotational position, and the second rotational position corresponds to two positions P1, Pm, and P2. It is schematically illustrated using a dotted line.

  Moreover, in description of FIG.9 and FIG.10, FIG. 13-FIG. 15 is referred suitably. 9 (a) corresponds to the states shown in FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b), and FIG. 9 (b) corresponds to the states shown in FIGS. 14 (a) and 14 (b), FIG. 10 corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 9A, when the crank gear 433 is disposed at the first rotational position and the connecting rod 460 is positioned at the position P1, the base side displacement member 440 is at the retracted position and the relative displacement member 450 is at the retracted position. It arrange | positions in a reference (standard) position, respectively (refer FIG. 12 (a) and FIG. 13). In this state, the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 is located at the upper end (the end on the rod support shaft 412 side) of the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460.

  Therefore, when the crank gear 433 is disposed at the first rotation position, the crank gear 433 rotates counterclockwise (that is, the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are stretched in FIG. 9A). The rotation in the direction of retracting from the out position to the retracted position can be restricted by bringing the crank pin 433 a into contact with the upper end of the rod groove 463. Therefore, when arranging the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 from the extended position to the retracted position, mechanical failure may occur even if the control failure of the drive motor 420 occurs due to an electrical factor, for example. Base side displacing member 440 and relative displacing member 450 are displaced beyond the retracted position by a mechanism (a stopper mechanism that restricts crank pin 433a by rod groove 463), and both displacing members 440 and 450 and connecting rod 460 It is possible to avoid colliding with the members in advance.

  When the crank gear 433 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 9 (a) from the state shown in FIG. 9 (a), the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 lowers the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460 (rod The connection rod 460 is slid toward the end opposite to the support shaft 412, and the connection rod 460 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. When the crank gear 433 is further rotated to reach the intermediate rotational position as shown in FIG. 9B, the connecting rod 460 is positioned at the position Pm. In this state, the base side displacement member 440 is disposed at the rotational position, and the relative displacement member 450 is disposed at the reference position (see FIGS. 12B and 14).

  When the crank gear 433 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 9 (a) from the state shown in FIG. 9 (b), the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 lowers the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460 (rod After sliding toward the end opposite to the support shaft 412, it is slid toward the upper end (end on the rod support shaft 412 side), and the connecting rod 460 rotates about the rod support shaft 412 as shown in FIG. a) It is rotated clockwise (clockwise). Thus, when the crank gear 433 reaches the second rotational position as shown in FIG. 10, the connecting rod 460 is positioned at the position P2. In this state, the base side displacement member 440 is disposed at the rotational position, and the relative displacement member 450 is disposed at the extended position (see FIGS. 12C and 15).

  Even when the crank gear 433 is disposed at the second rotational position, the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 is connected to the connecting rod as in the case where the crank gear 433 is disposed at the first rotational position shown in FIG. It is located at the upper end (the end on the rod support shaft 412 side) of the rod groove 463 of 460.

  Therefore, when the crank gear 433 is disposed at the second rotation position, the crank gear 433 rotates clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 10 (that is, the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are extended from the retracted position). The rotation in the direction of overhanging to the position can be restricted by bringing the crank pin 433 a into contact with the upper end of the rod groove 463. Therefore, when arranging the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 from the retracted position to the extended position, mechanical failure may occur even if the control failure of the drive motor 420 occurs due to an electrical factor, for example. Base side displacement member 440 and relative displacement member 450 are displaced beyond the overhanging position by a mechanism (a stopper mechanism that restricts the crank pin 433a by the rod groove 463), and both the displacement members 440 and 450 and the connecting rod 460 are displaced. Collision with other members can be avoided in advance.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11 and FIG. 12, the configuration and operation of the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 will be described. FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the base side displacement member 440 has a main body 441 formed in a long plate shape, an axial support hole 442 opened as a circular hole on the back of the main body 411, and a main body 441. The first slide hole 443 and the second slide hole 444, which are bored as long holes extending along the longitudinal direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 11), are mainly formed.

  The shaft support hole 442 is a hole through which the base side support shaft 413 of the case body 410 is inserted, and the base side displacement member 440 can be rotated to the case body 410 with the base side support shaft 413 as a rotation center. Supported by That is, as described later, the base side displacement member 440 is at the retracted position (see FIGS. 12A and 13) and the rotational position (see FIGS. 12B and 12C, and FIGS. 14 and 15). It is rotatably supported between.

  In this case, the shaft support hole 442 is formed at a position lower than the longitudinal center of the main body 441 and biased to one side (the overhanging position side) of the lateral center of the main body 441. As a result, since the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 project a predetermined amount (predetermined area) from the outer edge of the case body 410, the rotation angle required for the base side displacement member 440 can be reduced. The time required to rotate the displacement member 440 between the retracted position and the rotational position can be shortened, and as a result, the effect of the displacement of the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 can be enhanced.

  Relative displacement member 450 has a main body 451 formed in a long plate shape, a connection pin 452 protruding from the back of the main body, and a predetermined distance along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 11) of main body 451 , And a decorative portion 454 disposed on the front of the main body 451.

  The connection pin 452 and the slide pin 453 are cylindrical portions which are slidably inserted in the first slide hole 443 and the second slide hole 444 of the base side displacement member 440, respectively. Are slidably displaceable relative to the base displacement member 440 in the longitudinal direction. That is, as described later, the relative displacement member 450 is at the reference position (see FIGS. 12A, 12B, 13 and 14) and the overhanging position (see FIGS. 12C and 15). And the base side displacement member 440 so as to be slidably displaceable therebetween.

  In this case, the distal end side of the connection pin 452 protruding from the first slide hole 443 of the base side displacement member 440 is slidably inserted into the connection hole 462 of the connection rod 460, and the relative displacement member 450 It is connected to a crank gear 433 (see FIG. 8) via a connecting rod 460.

  Thus, as described later, by rotating the connecting rod 460 with the rod support shaft 412 as the rotation center by the rotation of the crank gear 433 (see FIG. 9), the base side relative to the base support shaft 413 as the rotation center The rotation (first operation) of the displacement member 450 can be performed, and the slide displacement (second operation) of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base side displacement member 440 can be performed (see FIG. 12).

  Here, the connection pin 452 and the slide pin 453 are disposed at different positions (spaced apart) along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 11) of the relative displacement member 450. Therefore, since the location where the relative displacement member 450 is connected to the base side displacement member 440 can be dispersed in the longitudinal direction, the front-rear direction of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base side displacement member 440 Slide displacement can be stabilized by suppressing the relative displacement of.

  Further, the connection pin 452 is disposed closer to the longitudinal direction distal end side (upper side in FIG. 11) of the relative displacement member 450 than the slide pin 453. Thereby, the location where the relative displacement member 450 is supported by the case body 410 via the connection rod 460 can be brought closer to the tip end side of the relative displacement member 450 in the longitudinal direction. In other words, the location at which the relative displacement member 450 is supported by the case body 410 via the connecting rod 460 can be moved away from the pivoting hole 442 of the base side displacement member 440 toward the distal end in the longitudinal direction (upper side in FIG. 11). As a result, it is possible to easily suppress that the tip side of the relative displacement member 450 swings in the front-rear direction (the direction in which it approaches and separates from the case body 410).

  That is, only the longitudinal side base side (axial support hole 442) of the base side displacement member 440 is supported by the base side support shaft 413 of the case body 410, and the relative displacement member 450 is disposed on the base side displacement member 440 Since it is a structure, the longitudinal direction front end side of both the displacement members 440 and 450 becomes a free end, and the front end side tends to shake in the front-back direction in the middle of 1st operation | movement. This shaking may cause the distal end to come in contact with the decorative member 480. Therefore, a structure in which the position supported by the case body 410 via the connecting rod 460 is on the tip side in the longitudinal direction is effective.

  A collar C is rotatably fitted on the connection pin 452 and the slide pin 453. A collar C is interposed between the outer peripheral surface of the connection pin 452 and the slide pin 453 and the inner peripheral surface of the first slide hole 443 and the second slide hole 444, so that each along the slide holes 443 and 444. The pins 452 and 453 can slide smoothly. Further, the collar C (specifically, the large-diameter flange portion of the collar C) is interposed between the main body 441 of the base side displacement member 440 and the main body 451 of the relative displacement member 450 and the connecting rod 460. The facing distance between the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 and the connecting rod 460 can be kept constant.

  The connection pin 452 is fixed to the end face on the tip end side by screwing the disc-like disc S with a screw so that the connection pin 460 is prevented from coming off, and the slide pin 453 is an end face on the tip end side The long flat slide guide 470 is fastened and fixed by a screw to prevent the base displacement member 440 from coming off.

  FIG. 12 is a rear perspective view of the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450. FIG. 12A corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 9A and 13 (ie, the state where the crank gear 433 is disposed at the first rotational position and the connecting rod 460 is disposed at the position P1). 12 (b) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 9 (b) and FIG. 14 (ie, the crank gear 433 in the intermediate rotational position and the connecting rod 460 in the position Pm). . 12C corresponds to the state illustrated in FIGS. 10 and 15 (ie, the state in which the crank gear 433 is disposed at the second rotational position and the connecting rod 460 is disposed at the position P2).

  As shown in FIG. 12 (a), when the connecting rod 460 is positioned at the position P1 (see FIGS. 9 (a) and 13), rotation with the base side support shaft 413 of the base side displacement member 440 as the rotation center The reference is a position at which the sliding position of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base side displacement member 440 is the position where the amount of protrusion from the base side displacement member 440 is minimum at the retracted position where the position is closest to the rod support shaft 412 It is arranged at each position. In this state, the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 is located at the upper end (the end on the rod support shaft 412 side) of the connection hole 462 of the connection rod 460.

  From the state shown in FIG. 12 (a), the connecting rod 460 is turned counterclockwise (counterclockwise) with the rod support shaft 412 as the rotation center by the rotation of the crank gear 433 (see FIG. 9 (a)). When rotated, the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 is slid toward the connection hole 462 of the connection rod 460 toward the lower end (the end opposite to the rod support shaft 412), and the base displacement member 440 and the relative The base displacement member 440 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 12A together with the relative displacement member 450 with the base support shaft 413 as a rotation center (first operation). When the connecting rod 460 is further rotated and reaches the intermediate position Pm (see FIGS. 9B and 14) as shown in FIG. 12B, the rotational position of the base side displacement member 440 is the rod support shaft 412. Are disposed at the rotational position which is the position farthest from.

  In this case, the slide position of the relative displacement member 450 relative to the base displacement member 440 can be maintained at the reference position. That is, in FIG. 12 (a) counterclockwise rotation around the rod support shaft 412 of the connecting rod 460, the connecting pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 and the connecting hole 462 of the connecting rod 460 are lower ends. Since the direction of this sliding is substantially along the direction of the slide displacement of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base side displacement member 440 when sliding toward the other side, the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base side displacement member 440 No force component is generated in the sliding displacement direction. Therefore, while maintaining the slide position of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base side displacement member 440 (while restricting the occurrence of slide displacement from the reference position), the base side displacement member 440 whose center of rotation is the base side support shaft 413. Only rotation can be generated.

  Thus, both displacement members 440 and 450 can be rotated about the base side support shaft 413 in a state where the amount of extension of the relative displacement member 450 from the base side displacement member 440 is kept to a minimum. The separation distance between the rotating tip of the relative displacement member 450 and the drive motor 420 (see FIG. 7) or the decorative member 480 (see FIGS. 16 and 17) can be reduced. As a result, the projection operation unit 400 can be miniaturized, and the degree of freedom in design when defining the shape of the decorative member 480 can be increased.

  From the state shown in FIG. 12 (b), the connecting rod 460 rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise) with the rod support shaft 412 as the rotation center by the rotation of the crank gear 433 (see FIG. 9 (b)). When rotated, the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 is slid toward the connection hole 462 of the connection rod 460 toward the upper end (end on the rod support shaft 412 side) and then the lower end (opposite to the rod support shaft 412) And the relative displacement member 450 is slid and displaced relative to the base side displacement member 440 in the longitudinal direction (first and second slide holes 443 and 444). (2nd operation). Thus, as shown in FIG. 12C, when the connecting rod 460 reaches the second position P2 (see FIGS. 10 and 15), the sliding position of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base side displacement member 440 is at the base. It is disposed at the overhanging position where the amount of overhang from the side displacement member 440 is maximum.

  In this case, the rotational position of the base side displacement member 440 can be maintained at the rotational position which is the position farthest from the rod support shaft 412. That is, the counterclockwise rotation of FIG. 12B around the rod support shaft 412 of the connecting rod 460 causes the connecting pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 to be along the connecting hole 462 of the connecting rod 460. The relative displacement member 450 is slid relative to the base side displacement member 440 because the direction of this slide is substantially perpendicular to the direction of the slide displacement of the relative displacement member 450 relative to the base side displacement member 440. Only a force component in the direction of displacement is generated, and no force component in the direction of rotating the base displacement member 440 about the base support shaft 413 is generated. Therefore, only the slide displacement of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base side displacement member 440 can be generated while restricting the rotation of the base side displacement member 440 around the base side support shaft 413 as the rotation center.

  Thus, the base side displacement member 440 is rotated from the retracted position in a state in which the amount of extension of the relative displacement member 450 from the base side displacement member 440 is maintained to a minimum (state in which the relative displacement member 450 is maintained at the reference position). After rotating to the position (first operation) and completing the first operation, the relative displacement member is controlled in a state in which the rotation of the base side displacement member 440 is restricted (the state where the base side displacement member 440 is maintained at the rotation position) A slide displacement (second operation) can be performed to extend the longitudinal direction 450 with respect to the base side displacement member 440. That is, since the rotation operation and the slide operation can be separated and each can be performed in two steps as separate operations, it is possible to play different types of operations compared to the case where the rotation operation and the slide operation are performed simultaneously It is possible to make the person clearly recognize, and it is possible to enhance the rendering effect by displacing the displacement members 440 and 450.

  The operation of the projecting operation unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15.

  13 to 15 are front views of the projecting operation unit 400. FIG. As described above, FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b) correspond to the states shown in FIGS. 9 (a) and 12 (a), and FIGS. 14 (a) and 14 (b) correspond to the states shown in FIGS. FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (b) correspond to the states shown in FIGS. 10 and 12 (c), respectively. Moreover, in FIG.13 (b), FIG.14 (b) and FIG.15 (b), the state from which the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 were removed is shown in figure.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, according to the protrusion operation unit 400, as described above, the base side displacement member 440 is in the retracted position shown in FIG. 13 (a) and in FIGS. 14 (a) and 15 (a). And a relative displacement member 450 disposed on the base side displacement member 440, as shown in FIGS. 13 (a) and 14 (a). The first operation, which is formed so as to be slidably displaceable between the extended position shown in FIG. 15A, and rotates the proximal displacement member 440 between the retracted position and the rotational position, and the relative displacement member 450 is displaced. A second operation of displacing the member 440 between the reference position and the overhang position is executable.

  As a result, as shown in FIGS. 13A and 14A, the base side displacement member 440 in the retracted position is disposed to the rotational position by the first operation, and the relative displacement member 450 in the reference position is secondly moved. As shown in FIG. 15A, the relative displacement member 450 can be made to project outward from the base side displacement member 440 by sliding displacement (elongation) to the overhanging position by operation. Therefore, the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 can be enlarged as a whole, so that both the displacement members 440 and 450 can be sufficiently viewed by the player, and the effect can be sufficiently exhibited.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14A, the distal end portion of the relative displacement member 450 (in the present embodiment, the decorative portion) is arranged by arranging the base side displacement member 440 to the rotational position by the first operation. The entire first portion 454a of 454 can be made visible to the player through the opening of the center frame 86, and as shown in FIG. 15A, the relative displacement member 450 is extended by the second operation. By arranging the relative displacement member 450, the player can visually recognize substantially the entire relative displacement member 450 (in the present embodiment, the entire third portion 454a of the striking portion 454) through the opening of the center frame 86.

  That is, the relative displacement member 450 which has been retracted to the retracted position and made invisible from the opening of the center frame 86 is first made to appear from the side of the opening of the center frame 86 by rotational movement (first operation). The player makes the player visually recognize only a part of the relative displacement member 450, and then causes the player to project toward the center of the opening of the center frame 86 by the linear motion (second operation) to substantially make the relative displacement member 450 An effect of causing the player to visually recognize the whole can be performed. Therefore, the visible area of the relative displacement member 450 can be enlarged by the movement form (linear movement) different from the movement form (rotational movement) at the time of appearance, and the visual recognition area by the unexpectedness by the change of the movement form and the linear movement It is possible to make the player feel the sense of speed by the enlargement and the sense of unity of the combined operation by being performed continuously while being combined. As a result, it is possible to obtain a rendering effect that can not be achieved in a mode in which the relative displacement member 450 protrudes and retracts from the opening of the center frame 86 simply by linear motion (a mode in which the retracted position and the extended position are reciprocated).

  On the other hand, when arranging the base side displacement member in the rotational position to the retracted position shown in FIG. 13 (a) by the first operation, as shown in FIGS. 14 (a) and 15 (b), the overhanging position By causing the relative displacement member 450 to slide and displace (shorten) to the reference position by the second operation, it is possible to suppress the outward extension of the relative displacement member 450 from the base-side displacement member 440. Therefore, since both the displacement members 440 and 450 can be made small by that much, the space required in order to accommodate both the displacement members 440 and 450 can be suppressed in a retracted position. As a result, it is possible to secure a space for arranging other parts and devices.

  In this case, as described above, the relative displacement member 450 is disposed on the base side displacement member 440 in a slidable manner, and the second operation is as shown in FIGS. 14 (a) and 15 (a). Since the relative displacement member 440 is slide-displaced relative to the base-side displacement member 450 between the reference position and the overhanging position, the second operation, for example, moves the relative displacement member 440 relative to the base-side displacement member 450. As compared with the case of the rotation mode, the space necessary for displacing the relative displacement member 440 from the reference position to the overhang position can be reduced, and in order to dispose other parts and devices accordingly Space can be secured. In addition, since the aspect (slide displacement) of the displacement of the relative displacement member 450 by the second operation can be made different from the aspect (rotation) of the displacement of the base side displacement member 450 by the first operation, It is possible to enhance the rendering effect by continuously performing one operation and the second operation.

  In particular, in the second operation, the direction of the slide displacement is the direction along the longitudinal direction of the two displacement members 440 and 450. That is, the relative displacement member 450 is disposed in a posture along the longitudinal direction of each other with respect to the base side displacement member 440, and is slid in the direction along the longitudinal direction of each other. The 450 can be extended and shortened efficiently as a whole. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 15A, in the state where the base side displacement member 440 is disposed at the rotational position, both displacement members 440 can be enlarged by the slide displacement (elongation) of the relative displacement member 450 as a whole. , 450 can be sufficiently viewed by the player, and the effects of the effects can be sufficiently exhibited. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13A, in a state in which the base side displacement member 440 is disposed at the retracted position, both displacement members 440 can be reduced by reducing the slide displacement (shortening) of the relative displacement member 450 as a whole. , 450 can be reduced, and a space for arranging other parts and devices can be secured.

  Further, according to the protrusion operation unit 400, as described above, the transmission means for transmitting the rotational drive force of the drive motor 420 to the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 is shown in FIGS. 13 (a) and 14 (b). And a connecting rod 460 comprising a plurality of gears (pinion gear 431, intermediate gear 432 and crank gear 433) and a connecting rod 460 and forming a crank mechanism together with the crank gear 433 as shown in FIG. Is connected to the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 in a region between the rod support shaft 412, which is the rotation center of the connection rod 460, and the base support shaft 413, which is the rotation center of the base displacement member 440. Therefore, by rotating the crank gear 433, the first operation and the second operation by the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are performed. , It can be executed in the order. That is, since two different operations of the first operation and the second operation can be performed by only one drive motor 420, the parts cost can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In this case, as a transmission means, a gear may be provided on the rod support shaft 412 side of the connection rod 460, and the teeth of the crank gear 433 may be engaged with the gear to rotate the connection rod 460. In this case, since the crank gear 433 and the connecting rod 460 are arranged in a plane and no overlap is formed in a front view, the space required for the arrangement increases. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 is inserted into the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460, as shown in FIGS. 13 (a), 14 (b) and 15 (b). Thus, the crank gear 433 and the connection link 460 can be disposed in a state of always having an overlap margin in a front view, and the space necessary for the arrangement of the crank gear 433 and the connection link 460 can be reduced by the overlap.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17, the relationship between the relative displacement member 450 and the decoration member 470 when the base side displacement member 440 is rotated (first operation) will be described.

  FIG. 16 is a front perspective view of the protrusion operation unit 400. As shown in FIG. FIG. 17 (a) is a side view of the protrusion operation unit 400 in the direction of arrow XVIIa in FIG. 16, and FIG. 17 (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the protrusion operation unit 400 in the portion XVIIb of FIG. It is. 16 and FIG. 17, the state in which the decoration member 480 is attached to the protrusion operation unit 400 is illustrated. However, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, only the decoration member 480 necessary for describing the relationship with the relative displacement member 400 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, a decoration member 480 is disposed on the upper side (upper side in FIG. 16) of the protrusion operation unit 400 (see FIGS. 5 and 6). The decorative member 480 is a decorative resin member, and is formed of a light transmitting resin material. Therefore, it is possible to make the player visually recognize other members located on the back side of the decoration member 480 via the decoration member 480 (penetrating).

  In the present embodiment, the decoration member 480 is formed with a part thereof projecting downward (FIG. 17B, the lower side), whereby as shown in FIG. 17B, the base side displacement member in a front view Between the relative displacement member 450 and the relative displacement member 450 is formed with an overlap of dimension L. Thus, when the base side displacement member 440 is rotated (first operation) from the retracted position to the rotation position (see FIGS. 13 and 14), the rotation locus of the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 is A part of the decorative member 480 can be overlapped in a front view.

  That is, since the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 can be displaced while passing the rear surface side of the decoration member 480, an operation of crossing the decoration member 480 and both displacement members 440 and 450 can be performed. At the time of the crossing, the decorative member 480 can be transmitted to allow both displacement members 440 and 450 to be visible. As a result, the rendering effect by displacing both displacement members 440 and 450 can be enhanced. In particular, in the present embodiment, the distal end side of the substrate displacement member 440 separated from the decorative member 480 is made to project more than the distal end side of the relative displacement member 450 near the decorative member 480, so contact with the decorative member 480 is difficult. As a result, the dimension L which is the overlapping margin can be made larger. Therefore, the rendering effect by crossing can be enhanced.

  In this case, as described above, the relative displacement member 450 forms the front side (the right side in FIG. 17B) of the decorative portion 454 on the base end side (the rotation center side of the base side displacement member 440, FIG. b) is inclined stepwise toward the case body 410 (left side in FIG. 17B) as it goes from the lower side to the distal end side (rotational tip side of the proximal end displacement member 440, upper side in FIG. 17B) Ru. Further, the distal end side of the base side displacement member 440 disposed on the back side (the left side in FIG. 17B) of the relative displacement member 450 is made to project more than the distal end side of the relative displacement member 450. Therefore, in the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 as a whole, the tip end side can be disposed at a position recessed toward the case body 410 side (rear side, left side in FIG. 17B).

  Thus, when the base side displacement member 440 is rotated (first operation) from the retracted position to the rotational position (see FIGS. 13 and 14), the rotation locus thereof overlaps the decorative member 480 in a front view. It is possible to prevent the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 from coming into contact with the decorative member 480 while securing improvement of the rendering effect.

  In this case, only one longitudinal side of the base-side displacement member 440 is supported by the base-side support shaft 413 and the distal end side is a free end (see FIGS. 12A and 12B). During the first operation, the tip end tends to sway in the front-rear direction (the direction approaching and separating to the case body 410 side, the direction perpendicular to the sheet of FIG. 5), and the possibility of contact with the decorative member 480 tends to occur. Therefore, the configuration in the present embodiment (the shape inclined toward the case body 410 toward the tip end side) is particularly effective.

  On the other hand, in the relative displacement member 450, the entire decorative portion 454 is not brought close to the case body 410 side, but as described above, the distal end side (rotational tip side of the proximal displacement member 440, FIG. 17 (b) A shape is positioned closer to the front (front side) (the right side in FIG. 17B) toward the base end side (the rotation center side of the base side displacement member 440, lower side in FIG. 17B) than the upper side). That is, the decorative portion 454 is raised and inclined in a step-like manner in the direction of separating from the case body 410 (right side in FIG. 17B) from the distal end side toward the proximal end side.

  Thereby, when the relative displacement member 450 is slide-displaced (second operation) from the reference position to the extended position (see FIGS. 14 and 15), the relative displacement member 440 is more front (front) side (ie, It can be placed closer to the player to increase power. In particular, in the present embodiment, the external force of the portion disposed on the front (front) side (the second portion 454 b and the third portion 454 c rather than the first portion 454 a) is larger, so Can be more effective.

  Next, the combined operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 30. 18 and 19 are front perspective views of the combined operation unit 500. FIG. In FIG. 18, the state where the driven member 560 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 5) is shown, and the state where the driven member 560 is disposed at the extended position (see FIG. 5) is shown in FIG. Ru.

  Here, in the compound operation unit 500, a pair is disposed on the left and right sides of the rotary operation unit 600 above the opening 301 (see FIGS. 5 and 6), these pair compound operation units 500 are symmetrical in left and right. Since they are formed and their structures are substantially the same, only one (provided on the right side in front view) will be described, and the description on the other (provided on the left side in front view) will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the compound operation unit 500 causes the driven member 550 to be displaced by the driving force of the drive motor 530, and causes the driven member 560 to follow the displacement of the driven member 550. The driven member 560 is displaced between the retracted position shown in FIG. 18 and the extended position shown in FIG. In this case, the driven member 560 is driven by the driven member 550 while changing the relative position to the driven member 550 by rotation and slide displacement as described later (see FIGS. 27 to 29).

  Thus, even when the driven member 550 is rotated at a constant speed with a constant orbit around the predetermined position (shafts 553 and 554) as a rotation center, the driven member 550 follows an orbit different from the driven member 550. The member 560 can be displaced, and changes can be made to the manner of displacement of its follower member 560. That is, according to the combined operation unit 500, it is possible to apply a change to the aspect of the displacement of the driven member 560 while keeping the output of the drive motor 530 constant. The detailed configuration of the combined operation unit 500 will be described below.

  20 and 21 are exploded front perspective views of the combined operation unit 500. FIG. 22 (a) is a front view of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560, and FIG. 22 (b) is a view of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 in the arrow XXIIb direction of FIG. 22 (a). It is a side view.

  20 corresponds to the compound operation unit 500 shown in FIG. 18 and FIG. 21 corresponds to the compound operation unit 500 shown in FIG. 19 in a disassembled state. FIGS. 22A and 22B correspond to the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 in the states illustrated in FIGS. 18 and 20, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 20 to FIG. 22, the compound operation unit 500 includes a front case body 510 and a rear case body 520 forming its frame, a drive motor 530 disposed on the rear side of the rear case body 520, and drive thereof. The crank member 540 attached to the drive shaft 531 of the motor 530, the driven member 550 driven by the driving force of the drive motor 530 being transmitted through the crank member 540, and the relative displacement to the driven member 550 And a driven member 560 connected mainly.

  The front case body 510 and the back case body 520 are formed in a flat plate shape from a resin material, and are arranged opposite to each other with a predetermined distance therebetween, and by fastening and fixing each other by screws (not shown) It is configured as a housing member in which an internal space is formed between the facing surfaces. A driven member 550 (interposed plate portion 552), a driven member 560 (interposed plate portion 561), and a crank member 540 are provided in the internal spaces (between facing surfaces) of the front case body 510 and the back case body 520, respectively. It is accommodated in a displaceable state.

  The front case body 510 includes a shaft support hole 511, an insertion hole 512, and a first guide groove 513. The axial support hole 511 is a hole in a front view circular shape for rotatably supporting the shaft portion 553 of the driven member 540. The insertion hole 512 is an opening through which the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 is inserted, and the insertion hole 512 is formed in a size that allows the reciprocating movement of the crank pin 541. The crankpin 541 can be connected to the driven member 560 (drive shaft 561a) through the insertion hole 512.

  The first guide groove 513 is an opening through which the first pin 561a in the interposing plate portion 561 of the driven member 560 is inserted, and has a shape obtained by taking out a part of an annular shape (that is, a groove shape curved in an arc shape, 27 (a) to 29 (a)). The groove width of the first guide groove 513 is set to a size equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the first pin 561a, and the first pin 561a is slid along the extending direction of the first guide groove 513 as described later. By moving (guiding), it is possible to define the posture (in particular, the relative rotational position with respect to the driven member 550) of the interposing plate portion 561 (follower member 560) (see FIGS. 27A to 29A). .

  The rear case body 520 includes a shaft support hole 521, an insertion hole 522, and a second guide groove 523. The axial support hole 521 is a hole in a front view circular shape for rotatably supporting the shaft portion 554 of the driven member 540, and is disposed concentrically with the axial support hole 511 of the front case body 510 described above. That is, the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520 have their axially supported holes 511 and 521 pivotally support the shaft portions 553 and 554 of the driven member 550, respectively, thereby rotatably driving the driven member 550. It can be supported. The insertion hole 522 is an opening through which the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 is inserted, and the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 can be connected to the crank member 540 through the insertion hole 522.

  The second guide groove 513 is an opening through which the connection shaft 561b of the interposed plate portion 561 of the driven member 560 is inserted, and has a shape in which a part of the annular shape is taken out (that is, a groove shape curved in an arc shape, 27 (b) to 29 (b)). The groove width of the second guide groove 523 is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting shaft 561b, and the connecting shaft 561b is slid along the extending direction of the second guide groove 523 as described later. By guiding (guiding), it is possible to define the posture (in particular, the relative sliding position with respect to the driven member 550) of the interposed plate portion 561 (follower member 560) (see FIGS. 27B to 29B).

  As described above, the crank member 540 is attached to the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530, and the crank member 540 is eccentric from the rotation shaft (drive shaft 531) when rotationally driven by the drive motor 530. A crank pin 541 is disposed at the position. The crank pin 541 is inserted into the drive groove 551 a of the driven member 550. Therefore, by rotating the crank member 540 by the rotational drive force of the drive motor 530, the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 is slid along the drive groove 551a of the driven member 550, and the driven member 550 is rotated. (See FIGS. 30 to 32).

  As described above, the driven member 550 is a member for being rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530 and for displacing the driven member 560 in accordance with the rotation thereof. By pivotally supporting the holes 511 and 521, the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520 are rotatably held. Here, the detailed configuration of the driven member 550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24. FIG.

  FIG. 23 (a) is a front view of the driven member 550, and FIG. 23 (b) is a back surface portion of the driven member 550. FIG. 24 is a side view of the driven member 550 in the arrow XXIV direction view of FIG. 23 (a).

  As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the driven member 550 includes a long plate-shaped front plate portion 551 and a long plate-shaped interposed member which intersects the front plate portion 551 substantially at a right angle in a front view. A plate portion 552, a cylindrical shaft portion 553 connecting the front plate portion 551 and the installation plate portion 552, and a circle projecting from the back surface of the insertion plate portion 552 at a position concentric with the shaft portion 553 It is mainly provided with a columnar shaft portion 554.

  The front plate 551 is a member disposed on the front of the front case body 510 (see FIGS. 20 and 21), and has an oval front view on one end side (the side opposite to the side to which the shaft 553 is connected). The drive groove 551a is formed in the shape of a circle. The drive groove 551a is an opening through which the crank pin 541 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) of the crank member 540 is inserted, and is extended along the longitudinal direction of the front plate 551. The groove width of the drive groove 551 a is set to a size equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the crank pin 541. Therefore, by rotating the crank member 540 by the rotational drive force of the drive motor 530, the crank pin 541 can be slid along the drive groove 551a, whereby the shaft portion 553, 554 is the center of rotation. The drive member 550 can be rotated (see FIGS. 30-32).

  The interposing plate portion 552 is a member disposed in the internal space (between facing surfaces) of the front case body 510 and the back case body 520 (see FIGS. 20 and 21), and one end side thereof (front stomach body portion 551). A connection groove 552a having an oval shape in a front view is bored on the side opposite to the side where the connection is made). The connection groove 552a is an opening through which the connection shaft 561b (see FIGS. 20 and 21) of the driven member 560 is inserted, and is extended along the longitudinal direction of the interposing plate portion 552. The groove width of the connection groove 552a is set to a size equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the connection shaft 561b. Therefore, the connection groove 552a can hold the connection shaft 561b rotatably and slidably. That is, the driven member 560 is connected to the driven member 550 in a rotatable and slidably displaceable state (see FIGS. 27 to 29).

  Here, the connection groove 552a has a region overlapping the second guide groove 523 of the rear case body 520 in a front view when the driven member 550 is rotated with the shaft portions 553 and 554 as a rotation center, and The connection shaft 561b can be arranged in the area (see FIGS. 27A to 27C). Thereby, as described later, the slide displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 can be defined based on the shape (contour) of the second guide groove 523.

  In the driven member 550, the interposed plate portion 552 and the shaft portions 553, 554 are integrally formed of a resin material, while the front plate portion 551 is formed of a resin material as a separate member from the respective portions 552 to 554. The axial end face (end face opposite to the interposing plate 552) of the shaft 553 is brought into contact with the back surface of the base plate 551 on the base end side (the side opposite to the side where the drive groove 551a is bored). It is assembled by fastening and fixing both with a screw.

  In this case, while four pins 553a are provided to project from the axial end face of the shaft portion 553, holes 551b for receiving the four pins 553a are provided at four places on the base end side of the front plate portion 551. It is drilled and assembled with the pins 553a received in the holes 551b. Thus, the flat plate portion 551 and the interposing plate portion 552 can be reliably prevented from relative rotation while reducing the number of screws and reducing the cost of parts.

  Referring back to FIG. 20 to FIG. As described above, the connection shaft 561b of the interposing plate portion 561 of the driven member 560 is inserted into the connecting groove 552a of the interposing plate portion 552 of the driven member 550, whereby the driven member relative to the driving member 550 560 are connected for relative displacement (rotation and slide displacement). As described above, the driven member 560 is a member that is driven according to the displacement of the driving member 550, and the connection shaft 561b of the interposed plate portion 561 is connected to the connecting groove 552a of the interposed plate portion 552 in the driven member 550. In addition to the above, the front case body 510 and the back case body 520 are held in a rotatable and slidable state by being inserted into the second guide groove 523 of the back case body 520. Here, the detailed configuration of the driven member 560 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. FIG.

  25 (a) is a front view of the driven member 560, and FIG. 25 (b) is a back surface portion of the driven member 560. FIG. FIG. 26 is a side view of the driven member 560 in the direction of the arrow XXVI in FIG. 25 (a).

  As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the driven member 560 includes a plate-like interposed plate portion 561 and a decorative portion 562 having a pair of elongated portions on the front surface of which a shape for decoration is formed, and A rear plate portion 563 which is continuously provided on the side of the decorative portion 562 and connected to the rear surface side of the interposed plate portion 561 is mainly provided.

  The interposing plate portion 561 is a member disposed in the internal space (between facing surfaces) of the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520 (see FIGS. 20 and 21). The first pin 561a to be inserted through the first guide groove 513 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) is provided in a protruding manner, and the connection shaft 561b is provided on the back surface at a position eccentric to the first pin 561a. Be done. As described above, the connection shaft 561b is inserted into the connection groove 552a of the driven member 550 (intermediate plate portion 552) and the second guide groove 523 of the rear case body 520 (see FIGS. 20 and 21). .

  Therefore, when the driven member 550 is rotated with the shaft portions 553 and 5554 as the rotation center, the first pin 561a is slid (guided) along the first guide groove 513, whereby the interposed plate portion 561 ( That is, the driven member 560) is rotated relative to the driven member 550 and the rear case body 520 with the connection shaft 561b as the rotation center (see FIGS. 27A to 29A), and the connection shaft 561b. Is slid (guided) along the second guide groove 523 so that the interposed plate portion 561 (that is, the driven member 560) slides along the connection groove 552a of the driven member 550 as a sliding direction. The slide displacement is relative to 550 (see FIGS. 27 (b) to 29 (b)).

  Here, the connection shaft 561b of the driven member 560 is inserted only through the connection groove 552a of the driven member 550 (intermediate plate portion 552), and a pin separately provided on the intermediate plate portion 561 is The same action as described above can also be obtained by inserting the guide groove 523 through the guide groove 523.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the connection shaft 561 b of the driven member 560 is provided to both the second guide groove 523 of the rear case body 520 and the connection groove 552 a of the driven member 550 (interposed plate portion 552). The connection shaft 561b is guided by the second guide groove 523 so as to define the displacement of the driven member 560 relative to the rear case body 520 (that is, slide the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550). And the function of connecting the driven member 560 to the driven member 550 so as to be capable of relative displacement (rotation and slide displacement) by being inserted into the connection groove 561b. As a result, the number of parts can be reduced to reduce the product cost, and the structure can be simplified to improve the reliability and durability of the movable member.

  The rear plate portion 563 is a circular member in a front view circular shape disposed on the rear surface of the rear case body 520 (see FIGS. 20 and 21), and an abutment portion on the front surface (the front side surface in FIG. 25A). 563a is provided in a protruding manner. The contact portion 563a is a portion that is in contact with the back surface of the rear case body 520, and is formed in an annular shape in a front view concentric with the connection shaft 561b. That is, only the peripheral portion (the protruding end surface of the contact portion 562 a) of the back plate portion 563 is in contact with the back surface of the back case body 520.

  Thus, when the connection shaft 561 b is slid (guided) along the second guide groove 523 by providing the contact portion 563 concentric to the connection shaft 561 b in the back plate portion 563, the first pin 561 a And even if the driven member 560 is rotated relative to the rear case body 520 about the connecting shaft 561b as a rotation center by the rotation action of the first guide groove 523 (see FIGS. 27 to 29), the rear case body By keeping the contact state of the back surface 520 with the back surface constant, it is possible to suppress the change of the support reaction force. As a result, the driven member 560 can be displaced in a stable state.

  In the driven member 560, the decorative portion 562 and the back plate portion 563 are integrally formed of a resin material, while the interposed plate portion 561 is formed of a resin material as a separate member from the respective portions 562 and 563; The axial direction end face of the connection shaft 561b of the interposing plate portion 561 is brought into contact with the front face 563 and assembled by fastening and fixing the both with a screw. In addition, the structure to connect both relatively non-rotatably by receiving the plurality of pins 561 c protruding from the axial end face of the connection shaft 561 b into the plurality of holes 563 b of the back plate 563 is the above-mentioned driven The same as in the case of the member 550, the description thereof is omitted.

  Referring back to FIG. 20 to FIG. The assembly of the combined operation unit 500 can be performed as follows. First, the shaft portion 553 of the driven member 550 is inserted into the shaft support hole 511 of the front case body 510, and the interposing plate portion 561 and the front plate portions 551 of the driven member 550 are fastened and fixed. Thus, the driven member 550 can be assembled to the front case body 510 in a rotatable state. At the time of this assembly, the connection shaft 561 b of the interposing plate portion 561 of the driven member 560 is inserted in advance in the connecting groove 552 of the driven member 550 (the interposing plate portion 552).

  Next, the crank member 540 is attached to the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 through the insertion hole 522 of the rear case body 520, and the crank pin 541 of the driven member 550 is inserted through the insertion hole 512 of the front case body 510. The drive groove 551a of (front plate portion 551) is inserted. At the same time, the connection shaft 561b of the driven member 560 (intermediate plate portion 561) is inserted into the second guide groove 523 of the rear case body 520, and the intermediate plate portion 561 and the rear plate portion 563 of the driven member 560 are fastened and fixed. Do. Thus, the driven member 560 can be rotatably assembled to the rear case body 520, can be connected to the driven member 550 in a rotatable and slidable state, and can be driven via the crank member 540. A state in which the rotational driving force of the motor 530 can be transmitted to the driven member 550 can be formed.

  Thereafter, the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520 are fastened and fixed to each other by screws (not shown). Thus, the compound operation unit 500 can be moved in a state in which the driven member 550 can be displaced by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530, and the driven member 560 can be displaced (followed) with the displacement of the driven member 550. It can be unitized as one device. As described above, according to the combined operation unit 500, assembling is possible by sequentially assembling each component to the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520, so that not only can the assembly cost be reduced but also it can be unitized. Thus, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by facilitating the assembly to the unit storage member 300 (game machine main body, see FIGS. 5 and 6).

  The operation of combined operation unit 500 will now be described with reference to FIGS. 27 (a), 28 (a) and 29 (a) are front schematic views of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 showing the relationship with the first guide groove 513, and FIGS. 27 (b), FIGS. 28B and 29B are schematic front views of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 showing the relationship with the second guide groove 523. FIG.

  Similarly, FIGS. 30 (a), 31 (a) and 32 (a) are front schematic views of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 showing the relationship with the first guide groove 513. b), FIG. 30 (b) and FIG. 30 (b) are front schematic diagrams of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 showing the relationship with the second guide groove 523. FIG.

  27 and 30 correspond to the state where the driven member 560 is disposed at the retracted position (state shown in FIGS. 18 and 20), and FIGS. 29 and 32 correspond to the state where the driven member 560 is disposed at the extended position. Corresponds to the state (shown in FIGS. 19 and 20). The states shown in FIGS. 28 and 31 correspond to the state in which the driven member 560 is disposed between the retracted position and the extended position.

  As shown in FIGS. 27 and 30, when the driven member 560 is disposed at the retracted position, the crankpin 541 of the crank member 540 is on the right side in a front view with respect to the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 (FIG. 30A). Located on the right side, whereby the driven member 550 tilts the tip side of the front plate portion 551 (the portion where the drive groove 551a is formed) to the right in the front view (right side in FIG. 30B) and The tip end side of the portion 552 (the formation portion of the connection groove 552a) is lifted upward (the upper side in FIG. 30B). That is, the driven member 550 is disposed at a rotational position which is a rotational end in a clockwise (clockwise) direction in a front view with the shaft portions 553, 554 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) as the rotational center.

  On the other hand, in the driven member 560, as described above, the connection shaft 561b is on the upper end side of the second guide groove 523 by the driven member 550 being in a posture in which the distal end side of the interposing plate portion 552 is lifted upward. The posture is shown in FIG. 27 (b) (upper side). That is, the driven member 560 is disposed at the uppermost position in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 30B) and at the most left position in the lateral direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 30B). Be done. Further, the driven member 560 is positioned at the front end side of the interposing plate portion 561 (the upper left side in FIG. 27A) by positioning the first pin 561a of the interposing plate portion 561 at the upper end side of FIG. The placement position of the first pin 561a is in a horizontal posture with the front view left (the left side in FIG. 27A). That is, the driven member 560 is disposed at a rotational position which is a rotational end in a counterclockwise (counterclockwise) direction in a front view with the connection shaft 561 b as a rotational center.

  From the state where the driven member 560 shown in FIG. 27 and FIG. 30 is disposed at the retracted position, the crank member 540 rotates the drive shaft 531 by the rotational drive force of the drive motor 530 When the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 is slid along the drive groove 551a in the front plate 551 of the driven member 550 when it is rotated, the driven member 550 has the shaft portions 553, 554 (FIG. 20 and FIG. 21) in a counterclockwise (counterclockwise) direction as viewed from the front, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 31, the driven member 560 is at a position approximately halfway between the retracted position and the extended position. Be placed.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 and 31, when the driven member 560 is disposed at a position substantially intermediate between the retracted position and the extended position, the driven member 550 makes the front plate 551 substantially upright and The plate portion 552 is in a substantially horizontal posture. That is, the driven member 550 is disposed at a substantially middle rotational position in the rotatable range around the shaft portions 553, 554 (see FIGS. 20 and 21).

  On the other hand, in the driven member 560, the connection shaft 561b pushed down by the connection groove 552a of the interposed plate portion 552 is second by the driven member 550 being in a posture in which the interposed plate portion 552 is substantially horizontal. The posture is set at the middle position of the guide groove 523. That is, the driven member 560 is disposed at a substantially middle position in the displaceable range in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 31B), and the rightmost in the horizontal direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 30B). Are placed at Further, the driven member 560 is disposed at a position where the first pin 561a of the interposing plate portion 561 is approximately in the middle of the first guide groove 513, so that the tip side of the interposing plate portion 561 (the first pin 561a It is set as the inclination attitude | position which orient | assigned the arrangement | positioning part) toward front view left upper direction (FIG. 28 (a) upper left side). That is, the driven member 560 is disposed at a substantially middle rotational position in the rotatable range around the connecting shaft 561b.

  When the crank member 540 is further rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in a front view with the drive shaft 531 being rotated by the rotational drive force of the drive motor 530 from the state shown in FIGS. 28 and 31, The crank pin 541 is slid along the drive groove 551a in the front plate 551 of the driven member 550, whereby the driven member 550 is fronted about the shaft portions 553, 554 (see FIGS. 20 and 21). It is rotated in a counterclockwise (counterclockwise) direction, and as shown in FIGS. 29 and 32, the driven member 560 is disposed at the extended position.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 32, in a state where the driven member 560 is disposed at the extended position, the crankpin 541 of the crank member 540 is on the left side in a front view with respect to the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 (FIG. 32), whereby the driven member 550 tilts the tip side of the front plate 551 (the portion where the drive groove 551a is formed) to the left in the front view (the left side in FIG. 32B). The tip end side of the plate portion 552 (the portion where the connection groove 552a is formed) is dropped downward (the lower side in FIG. 32B). That is, the driven member 550 is disposed at a rotational position which is a rotational end in a counterclockwise (counterclockwise) direction in a front view about the shaft portions 553, 554 (see FIGS. 20 and 21).

  On the other hand, in the driven member 560, as described above, the connection shaft 561b is at the lower end side of the second guide groove 523 by the driven member 550 being in a posture in which the distal end side of the interposed plate portion 552 is dropped downward. It is set as the attitude | pressed to FIG. 29 (b) lower side). That is, the driven member 560 is disposed at the lowermost position in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 32 (b)) and at the leftmost position in the horizontal direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 32 (b)). Be done. Further, the driven member 560 is positioned at the lower end side (the lower right side in FIG. 29A) of the first guide groove 513 with the first pin 561a of the interposed plate portion 561. In the upright posture, the (arrangement portion of the first pin 561a) is directed upward in a front view (the upper side in FIG. 29A). That is, the driven member 560 is disposed at a rotational position which is a rotational end in a clockwise (clockwise) direction in a front view with the connection shaft 561 b as the rotational center.

  As described above, according to the compound operation unit 500, when the driven member 550 is displaced (rotated) by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530, the driven member 560 is moved by the displacement of the driven member 550. The driving member 550 can be driven while being displaced relative to the driving member 550. That is, the mode of displacement of the driven member 550 is rotation about the shaft portions 533 and 554 as a rotation center, and even if it is displaced by a constant trajectory, a trajectory different from that of the driven member 550 (displacement) The driven member 560 can be displaced in the Further, since the change of the aspect of the displacement is formed by relative displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550, even if the driven member 550 is displaced (rotated) at a constant speed, The driven member 560 can be displaced on a different trajectory (displacement) from the driven member 550. As a result, it is possible to change the aspect of the displacement of the driven member 560 while keeping the output of the drive motor 530 constant.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the means (displacement defining means) for relatively displacing the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 is the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove of the front case body 510 and the back case body 520. 523 and the first pin 561a of the driven member 560 and the connecting shaft 561b. That is, the displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to each case body 510, 520 can be defined by guiding the first pin 561a and the connection shaft 561b along the guide grooves 513, 523. Thus, the relative displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 can be formed in accordance with the contours (shapes) of the guide grooves 513 and 523. As a result, the displacement defining means can be formed by mechanical elements such as the guide groove and the shaft guided thereby, and the structure is simplified, so that the product cost can be reduced. In addition, since a simple mechanical element can be adopted, the reliability and durability of the movable portion can be improved.

  Further, by setting the contours (shapes) of the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523, the aspect of relative displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 can be arbitrarily set. The degree of freedom in design when setting the aspect can be increased. As a result, it is possible to easily secure the variation of the aspect of the displacement that can be applied to the driven member 560.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the driven member 560 is rotatably and slidably connected to the driven member 550, the first guiding groove 513 and the first pin 561a mainly define rotation. A guide structure and a second guide structure configured by the second guide groove 523 and the connecting shaft 561b and mainly defining the slide displacement are provided. As a result, not only can the variations of the change that can be given to the aspect of displacement be increased, but also when the displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 is of multiple types (rotation and slide displacement) And the second guide structure can properly guide each. As a result, the displacement of the driven member 560 can be stabilized, and the reliability of the movable member can be improved.

  Here, the first guide structure described above, for example, forms the first pin 561a in the front case body 510 or the rear case body 520 in the installation plate portion 561 or the rear plate portion 563 of the first guide groove 513, respectively. The same applies to the On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first guide groove 513 is formed in the front case body 510, and the first pin 561a is formed in the interposed plate portion 561. This makes it easy to secure a space for forming the first guide groove 513.

  That is, the front case body 510 and the back case body 520 need to be formed to have relatively large outer shapes because it is necessary to hold both the members 550 and 560 while securing the displacement space of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560. There is a tendency for dead space to be formed on the plate surface. Therefore, by using the front case body 510 as the formation object of the first guide groove portion 513, it is possible to secure a sufficient space for forming the first guide groove 513 by effectively utilizing the dead space. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the contour (shape) and the extension length of the first guide groove 513, and it is possible to increase the variation variation which can be given to the aspect of the displacement. The second guide structure is also similar to the case of the first guide structure, so the description thereof will be omitted.

  Further, the first guide structure and the second guide structure are also realized by a configuration in which both the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are formed in the back case body 520. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are formed because the first guide groove 513 is formed in the front case body 510 and the second guide groove 523 is formed in the back case body 520. Can be formed without considering the formation position of each other.

  That is, when both the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are formed in the back case body 520, it is necessary to form the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 so as not to intersect with each other. The degree of freedom in the design of the contour (shape) and the extension length is limited. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, in both the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523, the outline (shape) and the extension length thereof are arbitrarily set without considering the positional relationship with the other. Since it is possible, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the design, and to increase the variation variation which can be given to the aspect of the displacement.

  Next, the rotational operation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 39. FIG. 33 is a front perspective view of the rotary operation unit 600. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 33, in the rotary operation unit 600, a first rotary body 650 in a front view annular shape is arranged with respect to a spherical liquid crystal device 670 so as to surround the periphery thereof, and a back surface of the first rotary body 650. A second rotating body 660 in a front view annular shape is concentrically disposed on the side, and in the present embodiment, the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 are rotated at different rotational speeds and in opposite directions to each other.

  Here, in the conventional product in which a plurality of rotating bodies are arranged at positions separated from each other, it is difficult to associate the rotations of the plurality of rotating bodies and cause the player to recognize them. That is, the conventional product is configured such that each rotating body is independently rotated without being associated with other rotating bodies, and therefore, the effect of the effect by rotating a plurality of rotating bodies is sufficiently exhibited. I couldn't let it go.

  On the other hand, according to the rotation operation unit 600 in the present embodiment, the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 are concentrically arranged around the spherical liquid crystal device 670, and these two rotating bodies rotate differently. Since the rotation is performed in a mode (a mode in which the rotation speed and the rotation direction are different from each other), these rotations can be associated to facilitate recognition by the player, and effects of effects by rotating a plurality of rotating bodies can be exhibited. it can. The detailed configuration of the rotation operation unit 600 will be described below.

  FIG. 34 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotary operation unit 600, and FIG. 35 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotary operation unit 600. FIG. 36 is a longitudinal sectional view of the rotation operation unit 600. In FIGS. 35 and 36, the spherical liquid crystal device 670 is omitted. The cross section shown in FIG. 36 corresponds to the cross section of the rotational operation unit 600 cut by a plane including the rotation centers of the first rotary body 650 and the second rotary body 660.

  As shown in FIG. 34 to FIG. 36, the rotary operation unit 600 includes a front case body 610 and a rear case body 620 forming its frame, a drive motor 630 disposed on the rear side of the rear case body 620, and drive thereof. A plurality of gears (first to fifth storage gears 641 to 645 and front gear 646) as transmission means for transmitting the rotational drive force of the motor 630 and the rotational drive force of the drive motor 630 are transmitted via the plurality of gears. Of the front case body 610 and the spherical liquid crystal device 670 disposed on the inner peripheral side of the first and second rotating bodies 650 and 660, which are rotated by rotation. And a light emitting device 680 disposed on the front side.

  The front case body 610 and the back case body 620 are formed in a flat plate shape from a resin material, and are disposed opposite to each other with a predetermined distance therebetween, and are fastened and fixed to each other by screws (not shown). It is configured as a housing member in which an internal space is formed between the facing surfaces. First to fifth storage gears 641 to 645 and a storage flange portion 653 of the first rotary body 650 are stored in the internal spaces (between facing surfaces) of the front case body 610 and the rear case body 620, respectively.

  In the front case body 610 and the rear case body 620, openings 611 and 621 circular in a front view are respectively formed, and the openings 611 and 621 are concentrically disposed in the assembled state. On the front side of the front case body 610, a cylindrical tubular portion 612 is provided so as to protrude toward the front (forward) at a position concentric with the openings 611 and 621. In the front case body 610, the inner diameter dimensions of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 are set to the same dimension, and on the inner peripheral side of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612, the main portion 651 of the first rotating body 610 is rotated. Possible support. In addition, the second rotating body 620 is rotatably supported on the outer peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612.

  As described above, the first rotating body 650 (main body portion 651) and the second rotating body 660 are rotatably supported by the inner peripheral surface and the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 611 of the front case body 610. The arrangement positions of the rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 can be defined with reference to the front case body 610, respectively. Therefore, as will be described later, gears (first and second outer peripheral gears 653a, 661a) engraved on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body 650 (storage flange portion 653) and the second rotating body 660, and a front surface The positional relationship between the second housing gear 642 and the front gear 646 disposed in the case body 610 can be defined with reference to the front case body 610. As a result, since it is possible to stabilize the meshing state of both outer peripheral gears 653a and 661a of both rotating bodies 650 and 660 with the second accommodation gear 642 and the front gear 646, it is possible to suppress uneven wear of the gears and to reduce driving resistance. Can be reduced.

  The pinion gear 631 is attached to the drive shaft of the drive motor 630 and attached to the back surface of the rear case body 620, whereby the pinion gear 631 is attached to the first storage gear 641 of the plurality of gears constituting transmission means. Engage. Therefore, the rotational drive force of the drive motor 420 can be transmitted to the transmission means (a plurality of gear wheels) via the pinion gear 431, and as a result, the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 will be described later. Can be rotated respectively.

  As described above, the first to fifth storage gears 641 to 645 and the front gear 646 are a gear group for transmitting the rotational drive force of the drive motor 630 to the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660, The teeth are respectively formed as spur gears engraved on the outer peripheral surface in parallel with the rotation axis. The first to fifth storage gears 641 to 645 are rotatably supported on the back side of the front case body 610, and are connected in series (engagement) so that the first storage gear 641 is at the top and the fifth storage is A gear train (gear train) is formed with a gear 645 as a tail.

  The front gear 646 is rotatably supported on the front side of the front case body 610 so as to be able to synchronously rotate with the fifth storage gear 645. That is, the front gear 646 and the fifth storage gear 645 are fixed to one end and the other end of the rotary shaft disposed through the front case body 610, and both the gears 645 and 646 and the rotary shaft are integrated. It is turned.

  According to the gear group configured in this manner, when the drive motor 630 is rotationally driven, the rotational drive force is transmitted to the first accommodation gear 641 via the pinion gear 631 and the first accommodation gear 641 is rotated. . The rotation of the first accommodation gear 641 is transmitted to the fifth accommodation gear 645 by the action of the gear train (gear train), and the fifth accommodation gear 645 is rotated, whereby the front gear 646 is rotated.

  Here, as described later, the first outer peripheral gear 653 a of the first rotary body 650 (housing flange portion 653) is in the second housing gear 642, and the second outer circumference of the second rotary body 660 is in the front gear 646. Since the gears 661a are engaged with each other, the first rotary body 650 and the second rotary body 660 can be rotated as the drive motor 630 is rotationally driven. That is, by the rotational driving of the drive motor 630 of 1, it is possible to simultaneously rotate the 2 rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660).

  In this case, in the present embodiment, an even number of gears (third and fourth accommodation gears 643 and 644) are interposed between the second accommodation gear 642 and the fifth accommodation gear 645. Therefore, not only the rotational speed between the front gear 646 and the second accommodation gear 642 rotated in synchronization with the fifth accommodation gear 645 can be different, but also the rotation between the second accommodation gear 642 and the front gear 646 The directions can also be different. As a result, as described later, the rotational speed and the rotational direction between the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 can be made different.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a gear train including the second storage gear 642 on the back side of the front case body 610 and a front gear on the front side of the front case cheer 610 are provided. On the rear side, the second accommodation gear 642 and the front gear 646 are meshed with the first outer peripheral gear 653 a of the first rotating body 650 and the second outer peripheral gear 651 a of the second rotating body 660, respectively. Therefore, for example, both the second storage gear 642 and the front gear 646 are disposed on the front side of the front case body 610, and both the gears 642 and 646 are engaged with the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660, respectively. Not only the transmission structure for transmitting the rotational drive force of the drive motor 630 to the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660, but also the structure of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 itself as compared with the structure It can be simplified.

  Furthermore, the gear train and the housing flange portion 653 of the first rotary body 650 with which the second housing gear 642 of the gear train is meshed are disposed on the back side of the front case body 610, whereby rotation is achieved. The gear train and the storage flange portion 653 can be shielded by the front case body 610 with respect to the player who views the operation unit 600 from the front. That is, a shielding structure for shielding the gear train and the storage flange portion 653 in an invisible manner can be simply formed using the rear case body 610 without the need to provide separate members.

  The first rotating body 650 is an effect member for producing effects by rotating the periphery of the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (see FIG. 33), and integrally integrated with the main body portion 651 and one side of the main body portion 651 in the axial direction. A front effect portion 652 to be formed and a storage flange portion 653 fastened and fixed to the other axial end (axial end surface) of the main body 651 by a screw are mainly included.

  The main body portion 651 is a portion formed in a cylindrical shape from a resin material, and is inserted into the opening 611 in the front case body 610 and the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612. That is, the first rotating body 650 is rotatably held by the front case body 610 (the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612) with the main body portion 651 as a rotation axis. Here, the detailed configuration of the main body portion 651 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 37 (a) is a rear view of the main body 651, and FIG. 37 (b) is a partial enlarged rear view of the main body 651 shown by enlarging a portion XXXVII of FIG. 37 (a). In FIG. 37 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the diameters of the first projecting portion 651a and the second projecting portion 651b are schematically illustrated larger than in actuality, and the first projecting portion 651a A virtual circle IS, which is a virtual circle in which the apexes of the second protrusion 651b are inscribed, is illustrated using a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 (a) and 37 (b), the main body 651 is provided with the first projecting portion 651a and the second projecting portion 651b, and at a position corresponding to the second projecting portion 651b. , And an offset portion 651c.

  The first projecting portion 651a and the second projecting portion 651b are formed to project from the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 651, respectively, and along the axial direction of the main body portion 651 (vertical direction in FIG. 37A). While extending over the entire length of the main body 651 (see FIG. 35), there are a plurality of locations (eight locations in the present embodiment) at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, the first protrusion 651 a and the second protrusion The portions 651 b and the portions 651 b are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction.

  That is, the first projecting portion 651a embeds a cylindrical body having a circular cross-section having a diameter larger than the plate thickness of the main body 561 in the main body 651 in a posture in which the main body 651 coincides with the axial direction. It is formed by the part (part of a cylindrical body) which protruded from the outer peripheral surface of the main-body part 651 among these embedded cylindrical bodies, and the inner peripheral surface. The second projecting portion 651b is also similar to the first projecting portion 651a except that the diameter of the cylindrical body embedded in the main body portion 651 is larger than that of the first projecting portion 651a.

  As described above, the first protrusion 651 a and the second protrusion 651 b protruding from the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 651 are extended along the entire length of the main body portion 651 along the axial direction. The rigidity of the 651 can be increased.

  The second protrusion 651 b is extended along the axial direction from the end face in the axial direction of the main body 651 (the front side in the drawing of FIG. 37 (b)). Therefore, as described later, when the storage flange portion 653 is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 651 with a screw, the axially extending portion of the second projecting portion 651 b is recessed on the front surface of the storage flange portion 653 By being internally fitted in the recessed portion, the main body portion 651 and the storage flange portion 653 can be firmly coupled non-rotatably relative to each other (see FIG. 36).

  The offset portion 651c is a portion obtained by offsetting the vicinity of the portion where the second protrusion 651b is formed in the main body 651 to the inner peripheral side while maintaining the plate thickness dimension, and approximately three times the diameter of the second protrusion 651b. It is formed over a range (circumferential direction). That is, the offset portion 651 c is curved in an arc shape concentric with the main portion 651 in the axial direction of the main portion 651 shown in FIG. 37 (b). By thus forming the offset portion 651c in the main body portion 651, as described later, the axial center of the second projecting portion 651b can be offset to the axial center side, and the entire main body portion 651 can be positioned. Stiffness can be increased.

  The plurality of (four in the present embodiment) first protrusions 651 a have the same amount of protrusion from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 651, and the plurality (four in the present embodiment) second protrusions 652 b have The amount of protrusion from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 651 is set to be equal to each other, and the amount of protrusion of the first protrusion portion 651a is made to be the same due to the offset by the offset portion 651c. The plurality of (eight in the present embodiment) first and second protrusions 651 a and 652 b have the same amount of protrusion from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 651. As a result, as shown in FIG. 37 (b), it is possible to set a virtual circle IS, in which the tops of the first protrusion 651 a and the second protrusion 652 b are inscribed, concentric with the outer periphery of the main body 651. In this case, the diameter of the imaginary circle IS is set to a size equal to or slightly larger than the inner diameter of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 in the front case body 610.

  Therefore, in the state in which the main body portion 651 of the first rotating body 650 is inserted into the opening 611 of the front case body 610 and the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612, the contact area thereof becomes the first projecting portion 651a and the second projecting portion Since the present invention can be limited to the respective top portions of 651b, the main body portion 651 can be smoothly rotated on the inner peripheral side of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 by suppressing the contact resistance.

  In particular, the first projecting portion 651a and the second projecting portion 651b have an arc shape in the axial direction (specifically, an arc shape in which the shape of the cross section cut by a plane orthogonal to the axial direction of the main body portion 651 is outwardly convex Not only can reduce the contact area but also smoothly contact the tops of the first and second protrusions 651a and 651b with the opening 611 of the front case body 610 and the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 612. Therefore, the main body portion 651 can be rotated more smoothly on the inner peripheral side of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 even in the case where there is rattling due to the dimensional tolerance.

  As described above, the first protrusion 651 a and the second protrusion 651 b protrude not only from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 651 but also from the inner peripheral surface of the main body 651. As a result, when the main body portion 651 is molded with a resin mold, the shape of the main body portion 651 can be made uniform (symmetrical) on the outer peripheral surface side and the inner peripheral surface side, and the formability can be secured.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, in the axial direction view of the main body portion 651 shown in FIG. 37 (b), the first projecting portion 651 a has a projection dimension of the portion formed to protrude from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 651 The projecting dimension of the portion formed projecting from the inner circumferential surface of the same is the same. Similarly, in the second projecting portion 651a, the projecting dimension of the portion formed projecting from the outer circumferential surface of the offset portion 651c and the projecting dimension of the portion projecting formed from the inner circumferential surface of the offset portion 651c are made the same. . Therefore, the shapes on the outer peripheral surface side and the inner peripheral surface side of the main body portion 651 can be made more uniform (symmetrical) to further ensure the formability thereof.

  Further, in the second projecting portion 651b, a hole having a circular cross section, which is bored along the axial direction, is bored over the entire length (see FIG. 36). Thereby, the thickness dimension of the second projecting portion 651b, which has a large diameter compared to the first projecting portion 651a, can be made uniform with other portions (the main body portion 651, the offset portion 651c, the first projecting portion 651a, etc.) As a result, the formability of the main body portion 651 can be secured.

  In this case, a female screw is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the hole formed in the second projecting portion 651b, and a screw for fastening and fixing the storage flange portion 653 can be screwed (see FIG. 36). As described above, the second protrusion 651 b having a relatively large diameter bears the screw fastening portion for fastening the screw, whereby the strength of the screw fastening portion can be secured. In particular, since the second projecting portion 651 b is a portion formed in the offset portion 651 c and the rigidity of the main body portion 651 is strengthened, the second projecting portion 651 b is a connecting portion between the main body portion 651 and the storage flange portion 653. By carrying out, while being able to connect both firmly, durability improvement can be aimed at.

  Referring back to FIG. 34 to FIG. The front effect portion 652 is a portion visually recognized as an effect portion by the player, and is formed so as to be flanged outward in the radial direction from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 651. Plating is applied to the front surface (front surface, appearance forming surface) of the front effect portion 652, and the front effect portion 652 is provided with an appearance imitating a shiny metal. Although the front effect portion 652 is made of a light transmitting resin material, it is possible that the player can visually recognize the light emitting device 680 (the light emitting element 681) through the front effect portion 652 by plating. It can be avoided.

  The front view shape of the front effect portion 652 is formed into a saw blade shape in which irregular peaks (second portion) and valleys (first portion) are repeated along the circumferential direction, and in the present embodiment, 16 are formed. The peaks (valleys) are arranged at circumferentially uneven intervals (unequal pitches). As described later, when the first rotating body 650 is rotated, the hills and valleys of the front effect portion 652 sequentially pass through the front side (front) of the light emitting element 681 of the light emitting device 680 to emit light to the player. The element 681 can be viewed intermittently and selectively (see FIG. 39).

  The housing flange portion 653 is a portion housed in the internal space (between facing surfaces) of the front case body 610 and the back case body 620, and is formed in an annular shape in a front view, and a cylindrical portion of the front case body 610. It is fastened and fixed to the end face in the axial direction of the main body portion 651 inserted through 612 through the opening 611. Specifically, as described above, by screwing the screw inserted into the storage flange portion 653 to the second projecting portion 651b of the main body portion 651, the storage flange portion 653 is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 651.

  Storage flange portion 653 has its thickness dimension set equal to or slightly smaller than the facing surface distance between front case body 610 and rear case body 620, and has an outer diameter dimension of front case body 610 and the rear case The dimension is set to be larger than the inner diameter of the openings 611 and 621 in the body 620. Therefore, the first rotating body 650 defines the axial position of the first rotating body 650 by bringing the front or back of the storage flange portion 653 into contact with the back of the front case body 610 or the front of the back case body 620. it can.

  A first outer peripheral gear 653a is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the storage flange portion 653. The first outer peripheral gear 653a is the second storage of the aforementioned gear train disposed on the back surface of the front case body 610. Gear 642 is engaged. Therefore, when the gear train is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630, the rotation is transmitted to the housing flange portion 653 via the second housing gear 642 and the first outer peripheral gear 653a, and the first rotating body 650 It is rotated.

  As described above, in the first rotating body 650, the first outer peripheral gear 653a is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the storage flange portion 653, and among the gear trains arranged along the periphery at the opening 511 of the front case body 610. Since the second storage gear 642 is meshed with the first outer peripheral gear 653a, the transmission structure for transmitting the rotational drive force of the drive motor 630 to the first rotary body 650 can be simplified. In particular, it is difficult to secure a space on the inner peripheral surface side since the first rotary body 650 is formed in a cylindrical shape and the projection surface 671 of the spherical liquid crystal device 670 described later is disposed on the inner peripheral side. It becomes. Therefore, it is effective to be able to arrange the transmission structure described above on the outer peripheral side of the first rotating body 650.

  Further, as described above, since the first rotating body 650 (main body portion 651) is rotatably supported on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 611 of the front case body 610, the disposition of the first rotating body 650 is provided. The position can be defined with reference to the front case body 610. Therefore, the position between the gear (first outer peripheral gear 653 a) engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body 650 (storage flange portion 653) and the second accommodated gear 642 disposed in the front case body 610. The relationship can be defined with reference to the front case body 610. As a result, the meshing state of the first outer peripheral gear 653a of the first rotary body 650 and the second accommodation gear 642 can be stabilized, so that partial wear of the gear can be suppressed and drive resistance can be suppressed. it can.

  The second rotating body 660 is an effect member for producing effects by rotating on the back side of the first rotating body 650 (see FIG. 33), and a main body portion formed in a cylindrical shape from a light transmitting resin material And 661 and a front effect portion 662 integrally formed on an axial end surface of the main portion 661.

  The main body 661 is set to have an inner diameter equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 612 in the front case body 610, and is externally fitted to the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion 612 (ie, The cylindrical portion 612 is inserted through the inner peripheral side of the main body portion 661), and is rotatably held by the front case body 610 (the cylindrical portion 612).

  A second outer peripheral gear 661a is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the main body 661, and the above-described front gear 646 disposed on the front of the front case body 610 is engaged with the second outer peripheral gear 661a. Therefore, when the gear train and the front gear 646 are rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630, the rotation is transmitted to the main body 661 via the front gear 646 and the second outer peripheral gear 661a, and the second rotation is performed. Body 660 is rotated.

  Thus, the second rotating body 660 has the second outer peripheral gear 661a engraved on the outer peripheral surface thereof, and the front gear 646 disposed in front of the front case body 610 is meshed with the second outer peripheral gear 661a. The transmission structure for transmitting the rotational drive force of the drive motor 630 to the second rotary body 660 can be simplified. In particular, the second rotating body 650 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is rotatably held by being externally fitted to the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610, so a space is secured on the inner peripheral surface side. It will be difficult to do. Therefore, it is effective to be able to arrange the transmission structure described above on the outer peripheral side of the second rotating body 660.

  Further, as described above, since the second rotating body 660 is rotatably supported by the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 611 of the front case body 610, the position where the second rotating body 660 is disposed is the front case body. It can be defined on the basis of 610. Therefore, the positional relationship between the gear (second outer peripheral gear 661 a) engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body 660 and the front gear 646 disposed on the front case body 610 It can be defined as a standard. As a result, the meshing state of the second outer peripheral gear 661a of the second rotating body 660 and the front gear 646 can be stabilized, so that partial wear of the gear can be suppressed and drive resistance can be suppressed.

  The axial dimension of the main body 661 is set to be equal to or slightly smaller than the facing distance between the front of the front case body 610 and the back of the front rendering portion 652 of the first rotating body 650. Therefore, the second rotating body 660 brings the end face on one side in the axial direction of the main body 661 or the end face on the other side in the axial direction into contact with the rear face of the front effect part 652 of the first rotating body 650 or the front face of the front case body 610 Thus, the axial position of the second rotating body 650 can be defined.

  A front ridge 661 b and a rear ridge 661 c are provided on the end face on one side in the axial direction and the end face on the other side in the axial direction of the main body 661. The front ridge 661 b is formed in a front view annular shape, and the back ridge 661 c is formed in a shape obtained by dividing the front view annular shape at a plurality of places. Thereby, when rotating the first rotating body 660, the frictional resistance between the main body 661 and the front case 610 and the second rotating body 650 (front rendering portion 652) is reduced, and the load of the drive motor 630 is achieved. Can be suppressed.

  The front effect portion 662 is a portion located on the back side of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650, and is a portion that is viewed as an effect portion by the player together with the effect portion 652, and radially from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 661. It is flanged outward and formed. The front rendering portion 662 has an outer peripheral side portion 662a formed in a saw blade shape in which irregularly shaped peaks and valleys are repeated along the circumferential direction, and a front view annular shape at the inner peripheral side of the outer peripheral side portion 662a And an inner peripheral side portion 662b.

  Plating is applied to the front surface (front surface, appearance forming surface) of the front effect portion 662 as in the case of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650. However, in the first rotating body 650 described above, plating is applied to the entire surface (full range) of the front effect portion 652, but with the second rotating body 650, only the outer peripheral portion 662a of the front effect portion 662 is plated And the inner circumferential portion 662b is not plated.

  Therefore, as described later, the peaks (second portion) and valleys (first portion) of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 are sequentially passed on the front side (front) of the light emitting element 681 in the light emitting device 680 When the light emitting element 681 is intermittently and selectively viewed by the player, the light emitting element 681 is watermarked on the inner peripheral side portion 662 b (that is, the portion not plated) of the front effect portion 662. It is possible to make the player visually recognize (see FIG. 39).

  A spherical liquid crystal device 670 includes a projection surface portion 671 formed of a light transmitting material as a spherical shell, and a case body 672 in which a projection device for projecting an image on the inner surface of the spherical shell of the projection surface portion 671 is housed. , And allows the player to visually recognize the image projected from the projection device and transmitted to the outer surface of the projection surface portion 671. In the assembled state, the case body 672 is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the rear case body 620, and the projection surface portion 671 causes approximately half of the spherical shell to project forward than the front of the front rendering portion 652 of the first rotating body 650. It is disposed on the inner peripheral side of the first rotating body 650 in a fixed posture (see FIG. 33).

  The light emitting device 680 includes a case body 681 in an annular shape in a front view, which is externally fitted to the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case, a circuit board accommodated in the case body 681 and a front surface (front surface) of the circuit substrate A plurality of (12 in this embodiment) light emitting elements 682 disposed (mounted) on the side are mainly provided, and in the assembled state, the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660, It is disposed on the back side of the 662.

  At the front surface (front surface) of the case body 681, openings having an outer size larger than the light emitting element 682 are formed at 12 locations at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and each light emitting element corresponds to the opening position of each opening 682 is mounted on the circuit board. That is, the light emitting device 680 has the light emitting element 682 exposed from the opening of the case body 681 in front view, and the light emitted from the light emitting element 682 is front side through the opening of the case body 681 (first rotation Irradiation can be performed toward the front rendering portions 652 and 662) of the body 650 and the second rotating body 660.

  As described above, the front effect portions 652 and 662 of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 are disposed on the front surface (front side) side of the light emitting device 680, and the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650. Is turned, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the light emission by the light emitting element 682 intermittently and selectively. Here, a structure for causing the player to visually recognize the light emission of the light emitting element 682 intermittently and selectively will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39.

  FIG. 38 is a front view of the rotary operation unit 600, and in FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (b), a state in which the first rotary body 650 is disposed at different rotational positions is illustrated. 39 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the rotary operation unit 600 taken along line XXXIXa-XXXIXa of FIG. 38 (a), and FIG. 39 (b) is a rotary operation unit 600 taken along line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 38 (b). FIG.

  In FIG. 38, in order to clarify the phase relationship between the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 and the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680, the first rotating body 650 of the rotation operation unit 600 and Only the light emitting device 680 is illustrated, and in FIG. 39, in order to clarify the relationship of the radial direction positions of the front effect portions 652 and 662 of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 and the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680. In addition, a disassembled state in which the second rotating body 660 is added to the first rotating body 650 and the light emitting device 680 shown in FIG. 38 is schematically illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the front view shape of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 is such that irregularly shaped peaks (second portion) and valleys (first portion) repeat along the circumferential direction. In the light emitting device 680, the arrangement position of the light emitting element 682 in the light emitting device 680 is radially outside (upper side in FIG. 39A) than the valley bottom in the front rendering portion 652 and in the front rendering portion 652. It is set to a radial position (vertical position in FIG. 39 (a)) which is radially inside (lower side in FIG. 39 (a)) than the peak.

  In this case, as described above, the inner (peripheral) side portion 662b of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 is not plated on the front surface (front surface) and is formed so as to transmit light. The formation range of the circumferential side portion 662b (the range indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 39) is set to a range including the valley bottom of the front rendering portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 and the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680. That is, in front view, light is emitted from the valley portion of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 through the inner peripheral side portion 662 b of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 (that is, transmitted) The light emitting element 682 of the device 680 can be viewed by the player.

  In addition, as described above, the outer surface 662a of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 is plated on the front surface (front surface) to give an appearance imitating a shiny metal. The outer circumferential side portion 662 a is disposed to face the back side of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650. That is, in the front view, the player can visually recognize the outer peripheral side portion 662a of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 from the valley portion of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650.

  As described above, according to the rotation operation unit 600, the peaks and valleys are alternately formed in the area overlapping the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680 in the front view portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 in the circumferential direction. Therefore, with the rotation of the first rotating body 650, the peaks and valleys of the front effect portion 652 alternately pass in front of the light emitting element 682 to emit light from the light emitting element 682 to the second rotating body 660. The player can intermittently make the player visually recognize through the inner peripheral side portion 662 b of the front effect portion 682 of the above. Thereby, it is possible to effectively perform an effect of rotating the plurality of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) around the spherical liquid crystal device 670 as a center.

  In addition, the outer peripheral side portion 662a of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 is plated to give an appearance imitating a shiny metal, the front (front side) side of the outer peripheral side portion 662a The front effect part 652 of the 1st rotary body 650 is arrange | positioned. Therefore, as described above, when the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 are rotated in the opposite directions, the first rotating body 650 and the second rendering portion 652 of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 It is possible to make the player visually recognize an aspect in which the outer peripheral side portion 662a of the front effect portion 652 of the two-rotation body 660 is rotated in the opposite direction to the front effect portion 652 of the first rotation body 650.

  That is, according to the rotary operation unit 600, the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680 is intermittently viewed on the valley bottom side in the valley shape of the front rendering portion 652 with respect to the player viewing the first rotating body 650 from the front. The front effect portion 662 (peripheral side portion 662a) of the second rotating body 660 is rotated in the opposite direction to the front effect portion 652 (mountain and valley shape) of the first rotating body 650 on the crest on the mountain and valley shape of the front effect portion 652 Can be viewed visually. As a result, the rotation of the first rotating body 650 and the rotation of the second rotating body 660 can be associated with each other to facilitate recognition by the player, and as a result, a plurality of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) The effect of rotating each of these can be performed effectively.

  Furthermore, according to the rotation effect unit 600, as described above, the valleys in the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 are formed at 16 locations in the circumferential direction, while the light emitting elements 682 of the light emitting device 680 are in the circumferential direction 12 Because the light emitting elements 682 are disposed at the locations, the player can selectively make only the specific light emitting element 682 visible from the light emitting elements 682 disposed at the 12 locations.

  That is, in the state shown in FIG. 38A, for example, the circumferential spacing of the valleys in the front rendering portion 652 and the circumferential spacing of the light emitting elements 682 are different from each other, for example When the first rotating body 650 (front rendering part 652) is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle from the state shown in FIG. 38A while the light emitting element 682 provided is made visible, FIG. As shown in), different light emitting elements 682 are selected, and the light emitting elements 682 disposed at four locations, upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left, are made visible.

  Thus, not only can the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680 be intermittently viewed, but also the position of the light emitting element 682 to be viewed can be changed in the circumferential direction, so a plurality of rotating bodies (first rotating body 650 and An effect of rotating the second rotating body 660 can be more effectively performed.

  Referring back to FIGS. 34 to 36, the overall structure of the rotary operation unit 600 will be described. As described above, the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 are formed in the front case body 610, and the storage flange portion 653 is separately formed with respect to the main body portion 651 and the front rendering portion 652 of the first rotating body 650. Therefore, the second rotary body 660 is mounted on the outer peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610, and the main portion 651 of the first rotary body 650 is inserted on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610. In addition, after the storage flange portion 653 is fastened and fixed to the inserted main body portion 651, the rear case body 620 is fastened and fixed to the front case body 610, whereby the first rotating body 650 is fixed to the front case body 610 and the rear case body 620. And the second rotating body 660 can be held rotatably.

  That is, the first rotary body 650 is rotatably supported by the front case body 610 by the main body portion 651 being inserted into the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610. In this case, the storage flange portion 653 of the first rotating body 650 can be brought into contact with the back surface of the front case body 610 and the front surface of the back case body 620, respectively, thereby making the first rotating body 650 for both case bodies 610 and 620. It is possible to regulate the displacement to the front side (front) and the back side (rear) of

  At the same time, the second rotating body 660 is rotatably supported by the front case body 610 by being externally fitted to the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610. In this case, the second rotating body 660 (the front ridge 661 b and the back ridge 662 c) is in contact with the back of the front rendering portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 and the front of the case body 681 of the light emitting device 680. Thus, the displacement of the second rotary body 660 to the front side (front) and the rear side (rear) with respect to both of the case bodies 610 and 620 can be restricted.

  As described above, according to the rotation operation unit 600, the rotating body (the first rotating body 650) itself can be held while being able to hold the plurality of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) in a rotatable state. Since the second part also serves as a part that regulates the displacement of the second rotating body 660, the structure can be simplified accordingly. In addition, the holding flange portion 653 is fastened to and fixed to the main body portion 651 of the first rotating body 650 in a holding structure capable of holding the plurality of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) in a rotatable state. The assembly process can be simplified because it can be formed only by As a result, the product cost can be reduced.

  Further, according to the rotation operation unit 600, the first rotating body 650 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the opening 621 is formed in the back case body 620. Therefore, a plurality of rotations are made in the front case body 610 and the back case body 620. After holding the body (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) in a rotatable state, only by attaching and fastening the spherical liquid crystal device 670 from the back side of the back case body 620 The assembly of the unit 600 can be completed (see FIG. 33). That is, the spherical liquid crystal device 670 can be attached to the assembly of each case body 5610, 620 and each rotating body 650, 660 in a separate step. Therefore, this point also contributes to the simplification of the assembly process and the reduction of the product cost.

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, It is easy to be able to carry out various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In the protrusion operation unit 400 in the above embodiment, the relative displacement member 450 is disposed so as to be slidably displaceable with respect to the base side displacement member 440, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The relative displacement member 450 may be rotatably disposed relative to 440. That is, as in the case of the above embodiment, the first operation is such that the base side displacement member 440 is rotated between the retracted position (see FIG. 13) and the rotational position (see FIG. 14); A configuration may be employed in which the relative displacement member 450 is rotated relative to the base side displacement member 440 between the reference position (see FIG. 14) and the overhanging position (see FIG. 15).

  Also with this configuration, the base-side displacement member 450 in the retracted position is disposed to the rotational position by the first operation, and the relative displacement member 450 in the reference position is disposed to the overhanging position by the second operation. While the entire displacement member 440, 450 can be made sufficiently visible to the player and the rendering effect can be sufficiently exhibited, the relative displacement member 450 in the overhanging position is rotated to the reference position by the second operation. Since the base side displacement member 440 in the rotational position is disposed to the retracted position by the first operation, the entire displacement members 440 and 450 are reduced in size, thereby reducing the space required to accommodate the displacement members. it can.

  In the protrusion operation unit 400 in the above embodiment, when the base side displacement member 440 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 17B), the tip end side of the base side displacement member 450 is closer than the tip side of the relative displacement member 450. Although the case where it protrudes to the decoration member 480 side (FIG. 17 (b) upper side) was explained, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the tip side of the relative displacement member 450 is opposite to this. A configuration may be employed in which the decorative member 480 is projected to the side of the decorative member 480 (upper side in FIG. 17B) than the tip end side.

  Even with this configuration, it is possible to make the rotational locus of both displacement members 440 and 450 intersect the decoration member 480 and allow the decoration members 480 to pass through at the intersection to make both displacement members 440 and 450 visible. The effect of displacing the members 440 and 450 can be enhanced. Furthermore, according to this configuration, when projecting the relative displacement member 450 (see FIG. 15), the area of the decorative portion 454 located on the front side (front side) can be further enlarged, and the force can be further increased. It can improve.

  In the combined operation unit 500 according to the above embodiment, the connection groove 552a of the driven member 550 is formed in an elongated hole shape, so that the driven member 560 (connection shaft 561b) can be rotated to the driven member 550 (connection groove 552a). And although the case where it connects in the state in which slide displacement is possible was explained, it is not necessarily restricted to this, and the driven groove to driven member 550 (connection groove 552a) is formed by connecting groove 552a being formed circularly. A configuration (that is, a configuration in which only rotation is permitted) in which slide displacement of the 560 (connection shaft 561b) is disabled may be adopted. Also according to this configuration, when the driven member 560 is relatively displaced according to the displacement of the driven member 550, the relative angle of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 can be changed. Can be changed to enhance the rendering effect.

  In this case, the displacement defining means constituted by the first guide groove 513 and the first pin 561a is meshed with the gear coaxially arranged on the driven member 560 with the connecting shaft 561b and the gear The curved rack gear may be formed along a circular arc centered on the drive shaft 551 a of the driven member 550 and disposed on the front case body 510 or the back case body 520. Accordingly, when the driven member 560 is relatively displaced in accordance with the displacement of the driven member 550, the relative angle of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 can be changed by rolling the rack gear. it can.

  In the combined operation unit 500 according to the above-described embodiment, the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are formed in the front case body 510 and the back case body 520, and are respectively inserted into both the guide grooves 513 and 523. Although the case where the 1 pin 561a and the connecting shaft 561b are formed on the driven member 560 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and conversely, the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are driven members And a portion (a member corresponding to the first pin 561a and the connection shaft 561b) to be inserted into both the guide grooves 513 and 523 is provided on the front case body 510 and / or the back case body 520. It is good. Also according to this configuration, the combined movement of the linear movement and the rotational movement can be performed on the driven member 560 in accordance with the displacement of the driven member 550, so that the trajectory of the driven member 560 is changed. The presentation effect can be enhanced.

  Although the case where the first guide groove 513 is drilled (opening formed) in the front case body 510 has been described in the combined operation unit 500 in the above embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. May be formed as, for example, a U-shaped cross section. That is, the first guide groove 513 is of the meaning sufficient as long as it can guide the first pin 561 a in the extending direction.

  In the combined operation unit 500 according to the above-described embodiment, the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are curved and extended, and the connection groove 551a is linearly extended. On the contrary, the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are linearly extended, while the connection groove 551a is curved and extended. Also good. In particular, the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 have been described as having a constant radius of curvature, but the present invention is not limited thereto. A combination of arc shapes with a plurality of radii of curvature is used. Of course, it is possible to adopt another shape (for example, an S-shape etc.). As a result, the trajectory of the driven member 560 can be changed more complicatedly, so the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  Specifically, for example, when the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 is set to an arc shape, the arc shape is a rotation start end of the driven member 550 in the rotation direction about the shaft portions 553 and 554. Alternatively, it is preferable to make the radius larger than the reference value (decrease the curvature) in the state of being disposed at the terminal end and in the vicinity thereof. That is, the radius in the first end of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 and the first range in the vicinity thereof or the second range in the vicinity thereof is made larger than the reference value, or the first range and the second range It is preferable to make it larger than the radius in the 3rd range located between ranges. Thus, in the initial stage of starting the driving of the driven member 550 in the stopped state by the drive motor 530, the load can be reduced and the driving can be smoothly started.

  Alternatively, while the driven member 560 is not visible by the front case body 510, the radius of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 is set to a value larger than the reference value, and a part of the driven member 560 is The first drive unit 560 is exposed from the area of the front case body 510 (visible) to the time when the entire driven member 560 is exposed to the outside of the area of the front case body 510 (visible). The radius of the guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 may be set to a value smaller than the reference value. According to this, in the former case, the operation of the driven member 560 is not viewed by the player, so that the load on the drive motor 530 can be reduced without affecting the rendering effect, and in the latter case, The movement of the driven member 560 can be made faster in a range in which a part of the driven member 560 is shielded by the front case body 510, so that the driven member 560 appears suddenly from the front case body 510. It can be made to hide behind the back quickly.

  Alternatively, the driven member 560 is in a range defined by a pair of virtual lines inclined 45 degrees up and down with respect to a horizontal line passing through the connection shaft 561 b in the horizontal attitude (see the connection shaft 561 b (see FIG. 30)) The radius of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 is set to a value larger than the reference value while the position of the center of gravity of the portion 562 is positioned), and while the driven member 560 exceeds the horizontal position, The radius of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 may be set to a value smaller than the reference value. According to this, in a region where the drive force of the drive motor 530 needs to support the own weight (action of gravity) of the driven member 560 relatively large, the radius is increased, and n While the load of the drive motor 530 can be reduced by reducing the influence of the inertial force due to the posture change of the member 560, a region where the necessity to support the self weight (action of gravity) of the driven member 560 by the drive force of the drive motor 530 is relatively small. Then, by reducing the radius, it is possible to increase the change in the operation of the driven member 560 and enhance the rendering effect.

  In the rotation operation unit 600 according to the above-described embodiment, in the first rotating body 650, the main body portion 651 and the front rendering portion 652 are integrated, and the storage flange portion 653 is separated. Alternatively, the first rotary body 650 may be formed by integrating the main body portion 651 and the housing flange portion 653 and the front effect portion 652 as a separate body. Also with this configuration, as in the case of the above embodiment, the structure and assembly process for rotatably holding the plurality of rotating bodies can be simplified, and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the rotation operation unit 600 in the above embodiment, the case where the inner peripheral side portion 662b of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 is formed with the front surface (front surface) as a flat surface has been described. However, part or all of the front surface may be replaced with a flat surface to have another shape. As another shape, for example, a surface having a plurality of concavities and convexities, a surface formed with a cross-sectional corrugation, an inclined surface, a curved surface, or a surface obtained by combining these is exemplified. When these other shapes are adopted, not only diffuse reflection or refraction of light emitted from the light emitting element 682 and transmitted through the inner peripheral side portion 662 b, but also irregular reflection of the second rotary body 660 as it rotates Since motion can be given in the direction of refraction, the rendering effect can be enhanced (see FIG. 39).

  In the rotation operation unit 600 in the above embodiment, the outer diameter dimension of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 is set to a size that overlaps with only a part of the front gear 646 in front view ( 36), but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the outer diameter dimension of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 may be set to a size overlapping with the entire front gear 646 in front view. Thus, since the front gear 646 can be shielded by the front rendering unit 662, it is unnecessary to separately provide a member for making the front gear 646 invisible to the player. If the front gear 646 can not be viewed from the player, the front gear 646 can be a gear having a larger diameter, so that the degree of freedom in setting the gear ratio can be increased. Therefore, the change in rotation of the second rotating body 660 with respect to the first rotating body 650 can be increased.

  In the rotation operation unit 600 in the above embodiment, the description of the stop positions of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 is omitted, but may be configured as follows. That is, the shape of the mountain in at least one or both of the front directing portions 652 and 662 of the first rotating body 650 or the second rotating body 660 is formed to have a size that can shield the front gear 646 in front view. The rotation of the first rotating body 650 or the second rotating body 660 may be stopped at a phase position in which the portion of the shape is disposed in front of the front gear 646. Thereby, when the rotation of the first rotating body 650 or the second rotating body 660 is stopped, the front gear 646 can be made invisible from the player.

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

Second Embodiment
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 40 to FIG. In the second embodiment, a control process (a process related to control of a game such as display effect) executed by the pachinko machine 10 described in the first embodiment will be described.

<About the mechanical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3. FIG. 1 is a front view, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. Balls are played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 49) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination causes the ball inserted into the upper plate 17 to be guided to the ball firing unit 112a. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17.

  The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the background mode of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) to be described later (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the notice effect. Ru. Further, the frame button 22 may be configured to be used as a switch for driving, for example, a driving combination or the like provided in a game machine.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side of the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. 2), and the like can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player for driving a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed, and driving of the ball launch unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Sensor 51a, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 based on a change in electric resistance (Not shown) is built in. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of operation, and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is then driven to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "two-and-a-box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls, a windmill and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, a first The winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the electric combination 640a, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed by wood screws etc. from the front side. The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is formed by dividing two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 into a substantially circular area (a winning opening etc. is disposed, and a shot ball is (Flowing down area).

  The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 49) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated. In addition, a resin-made arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. It is driven in and fixed to the plate 60.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery of special symbol 1 (first symbol) is performed when the ball enters the first winning opening 64, and a special symbol 2 (when the ball enters the second winning opening 640) When the ball passes through gate 67, the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed. In the drawing of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 (hereinafter, the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is indicated as the special symbol) performed for entering the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, the special symbol Whether or not the jackpot of the symbol is determined whether or not it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is determined. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is closed until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses) or 10 balls are won ) The opening is repeated 16 times (16 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, and therefore, a large number of prize balls are paid out from the normal time. As a jackpot type of special symbol, two types of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are provided, and after the end of the special game state as a added value after the jackpot end, on the game according to these jackpot types The player's value (game value) is given to the player.

  In addition, when the drawing of the special symbol 1 (first symbol) or the special symbol 2 (first symbol) is performed, the variation display of the special symbol is started in the first symbol display device 37 and the predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds) After 30 seconds, etc.), the special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first winning opening 64 while the variable display of the special symbol is being performed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of times of entering the ball is suspended up to four times, and the number of holding balls is the first While being shown by the symbol display device 37, it is also shown in the third symbol display device 81. Similarly, when the ball enters the second winning opening 640 while the special symbol is moving, the number of ball entry is suspended up to four times, and the number of holding balls is shown on the first symbol display device 37 Both are shown also about the 3rd symbol display device 81. In addition, the number of holding balls of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is shown in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in display modes that can be identified respectively. As will be described in detail later, the third symbol display device 81 is configured so that the number of holding balls, the variation display mode of the special symbol, the determination result, etc. can be easily identified for the player than the first symbol display device 37 The normal player is configured to play a game by viewing the display mode of the third symbol display device 81.

  When the variation display is finished in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of holding balls for the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 remains, a lottery of the next special symbol is performed, and the lottery is performed. The variable display according to is started. In addition, although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the number of holding balls of the second winning opening 640 has priority over the number of holding balls of the first winning opening 64, and the drawing of the special symbol 2 is performed. , The variable display according to the lottery is started. Therefore, the lottery for the holding balls of the first winning opening 64 is configured to be executed when there is no holding ball in the second winning opening 640. While the special symbol 2 variation is being performed, the special symbol 1 variation is not performed. That is, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are configured such that there is no period in which they simultaneously change.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it was set as the structure which does not change simultaneously with the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, you may comprise not only it but it may be changed simultaneously. By configuring in this manner, more lotterys of the game can be executed in a short time, and the determination result can be displayed, so that the game can be performed more efficiently.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the second winning opening 640 restricts the ball entry into the ball entry opening state where the game ball can be guided to the ball entry into the ball entry port where the game ball enters the ball entrance. And an electric part 640a having a rotatable wing member in the closed state. The motorized part 640a is operated from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time based on the winning (a win) of the normal symbol (second symbol) described later. Also, during normal times, the game ball is held upright so as to prevent game balls from entering from both sides of the ball entrance, so as to prevent the game balls from entering the ball from among the wing members. , The first winning opening 64 is arranged. Therefore, the second winning opening 640 is normally configured so as to be able to enter the ball only when the motorized accessory 640a operates in the open state. Therefore, normally, the game ball is configured to easily enter the first winning opening 64, and the player plays the game by firing the game ball to enter the game ball into the first winning opening 64. It becomes a thing.

  The special winning opening 65a, which is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, is provided immediately below the second winning opening 640. Therefore, during the special game state, the player hits a ball in an attempt to win a special winning opening 65a, so many balls enter the first winning opening 64 as well. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of holding balls for the first winning opening 64 is maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the normal symbol performed for the passage of the ball in the through gate 67, the propriety determination of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is performed. Two types of opening per hour and a long time per opening, in which the opening time and the number of opening times are respectively increased, are set to the normal design per contact, compared to the normal per contact and the normal per contact. When a normal symbol or a long-time hit comes, the electric winning combination attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 2 seconds), and the second winning opening 640 The ball is ready to enter the ball. That is, when it comes to the hit of the normal symbol, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640, and as a result, the drawing of the special symbol becomes easy to be performed.

  In addition, when the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display device 83 and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball passes through the through gate 67 while the variable display is being performed in the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is suspended up to four times, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 And is also shown in the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variation display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of holding balls for the through gate 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed, and the variation display according to the lottery is started Ru.

  As described above, as the jackpot type of the special symbol, there are provided two types of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B". When it becomes "big hit A", "big hit B", it becomes special game state (16R big hit) with the number of rounds of 16 rounds. Then, in the case of "big hit A", as added value after the big hit end, the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state of special symbol (after the big hit end until the jackpot game of the next special symbol starts) Transition to special symbols). On the other hand, for "big hit B", the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased from the end of the big hit until the lottery of the special symbol is finished 100 times. In the high probability state, the hit probability of the normal symbol is similarly set up.

  Here, the "special symbol high probability state" refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, a so-called probability state of the special symbol (during the special symbol oddity), in other words, the special gaming state (16R jackpot) It is the state of the game which is easy to shift to). On the other hand, when it is not "high probability state of special symbol" is called "low probability state of special symbol", it is a state where jackpot probability is lower than the probability change state of special symbol, that is, jackpot probability of special symbol is normal state Indicates the (normal symbol or low probability gaming status of special symbol). In addition, with "time symbol state of normal symbol" (time symbol during normal time or short game status of normal symbol), the probability of hitting the symbol normally increases and the state of the game where the ball is easy to enter the second winning opening 640 Say In contrast, when it is not "normal symbol time reduction state" is called "ordinary symbol normal state" (ordinary gaming state), this is the normal symbol hit probability is normal state, that is, a state where hit probability is lower than time saving Show that. Hereinafter, the period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit of the special symbol is referred to as a definite variation period of the special symbol.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot type is “big hit A”, the period from the end of the “big hit A” to the start of the next big hit is the definite variation period, but it is not limited thereto. A period during which a lottery of special symbols may be executed may be set as a probability variation period. In addition, the "big hit A" and the "big hit B" may both be set to be a definite variation period for a predetermined number of times. Also, the definite variation period may naturally be a definite variation period during a predetermined time (such as 2 minutes or 5 minutes).

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power supply or the like, it is always set to the "special symbol low probability state". After that, when it becomes the jackpot of the special symbol, it shifts to "the high probability state of the special symbol", and shifts to "the time saving state of the normal symbol".

  In addition, while "the high probability state of special symbol" is continued, when the jackpot of the special symbol is newly made and the jackpot type is "big hit A", "the high probability state of special symbol" is further that It will be continued from the end of the new special symbol jackpot to the start of the next jackpot game.

  A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, at the upper right side upper part (right upper part of FIG. 2) of the game area. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a are lit depending on whether or not the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 which is performed along with the ball entering the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (start winning) is being executed. Display a variable display or show a special symbol 1 (first symbol) or a special symbol 2 (first symbol) according to the lottery result of the special symbol as a stop symbol after the end of the variation by lighting. Among the balls entered into the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, the number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) whose variation has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state.

  A ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 while the variation display of the special symbol 1 (first symbol) or the special symbol 2 (first symbol) is performed in the first symbol display device 37. In the case of a ball, the number of times of ball entry is held up to four times, respectively, and the number of holding balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is held up to four times at maximum, but the maximum holding number is limited to four times Instead, it may be set three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds in the jackpot and an error display. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the luminescent color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states (high probability state of special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 with few LED by the combination of the luminescent color Or, it can display the time of the normal pattern, etc.). In addition, LED 37a not only indicates whether the lottery result of special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, its big hit type (big hit A, big hit A special symbol (first symbol) according to B) is shown.

  In addition, as for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, separate dedicated LEDs 37a are respectively assigned for symbol display and for display of the number of holding balls. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to configure so that the player can distinguish between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 more easily.

  Further, in the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is disposed on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (start winning), it is used as a trigger to correspond to the starting opening entered in the first symbol display device 37. The variable display of the symbol is executed. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inches in size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right The columns are displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is used to display the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is performed according to the request. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a view for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 40 (a) is a view schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG.40 (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen.

  The third symbol is constituted by the main symbols of the numbers "0" to "9". Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 49) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not aligned is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit A", the variable display is performed in which the main symbols of the odd number "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" are aligned and stopped. Moreover, if it is "big hit B", the variable display in which the main symbols of "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" which is an even number are equal is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 40 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into two vertically, and the upper 2/3 of the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, and other than that The lower one-third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of holding balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The approximate center of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol is stopped on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. A large hit moving image is displayed as a big hit if it is aligned with a combination of big hit symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and is equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of holding balls which is the number of balls (holding balls) of which the variation has not been executed among the balls entered into the first winning opening 64, and the small area Ds2 is an area The small area Ds3 is an area for displaying the number of holding balls which is the number of balls (holding balls) of which the variation has not been executed among the balls entering the second winning opening 640. It is.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 40 (b), a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm. In the case of variable display, in addition to the main symbol displayed in the central part, the main symbols arranged before and after it are displayed visibly, so a total of nine main symbols are displayed at the maximum. In some cases. In the sub display area Ds, one “●” symbol is displayed for one holding ball, and the holding symbols corresponding to up to four holding balls for each of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are displayed. Is displayed. That is, up to eight reserved symbols are displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  In the present embodiment, although the same reserved symbol (design) is used for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, the present invention is not limited thereto, but different symbols (for example, for the special symbol 1, as a symbol "●" The symbol 2 may be configured to be displayed by "□" symbol).

  As a result, the holding balls of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, that is, the holding balls of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 can be easily identified and displayed. In addition, since the display mode of the holding ball entering the second winning opening 640 is displayed differently depending on the hit type of the normal symbol, the player is allowed to easily discriminate that the holding ball has been generated for a long time be able to.

  In the present embodiment, in the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, in addition to the main symbol, the hold symbol, etc. described above, the character display and the notice effect display such as the character, etc. The display of the number of changes is appropriately displayed. Also, when the holding symbol is not displayed, it indicates that the number of holding balls is 0, that is, there is no holding ball.

  In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first winning opening 64 is configured to be suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of balls reserved is not limited to four times, and is three times or less Alternatively, it may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times). In addition, in place of the display of the number-of-parking balls number symbol in the small area Ds1 or the small area Ds3, the number of holding balls is divided into a number of parts of the third symbol display device 81 or the area divided into four It may be displayed in an aspect (for example, a color or a lighting pattern) different by an amount. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls held may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which corresponds to the maximum number of holdings, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Continuously, with reference to FIGS. 41-44, the display aspect of the pending production performed in the 3rd symbol display device 81 is demonstrated. In the second embodiment, the display mode of the reserved symbol of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is variably displayed to notify of the result of the game or the variation pattern type to be selected. . In the present embodiment, a normal holding effect as shown in FIG. 41 and eight effects as shown in FIG. 42 are respectively set. For normal holding effect, as shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and (b), when the number of holdings is less than 8, one symbol of the holding symbol is changed to a symbol displayed as "push" It is displayed (FIG. 41 (a)). When the player depresses the frame button 22 after being variably displayed on the symbol displayed as "push", the symbol is variably displayed on the symbol "Δ" (see FIG. 41 (b)).

  In the present embodiment, when the stored symbol for which super reach is selected is stored in the stored symbol stored, or when the stored symbol for which the result of the pass / fail determination is a hit is stored, the normal held symbol is executed by lottery. When it is lottery, the held symbol is displayed variably as a "push" symbol as shown in FIG. 41 (a). In addition, this "push" symbol is a notification holding symbol that informs the player to press (operate) the frame button 22. As long as the frame button 22 is not pressed, the display mode of the notification holding symbol is maintained and displayed until the holding symbol starts to change.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it comprised so that it might be displayed by alerting | holding symbol until it becomes a fluctuation | variation start, you may comprise not only it but it may be displayed by alerting | holding symbol only for a fixed time. In addition, although the normal holding effect is configured to be executed by lottery when the holding symbol to be the super reach is stored and the holding symbol to be the big hit is stored, it is not limited thereto, but other than that It may be configured to be executed by lottery also in the case of (e.g., normal reach, out of range, etc.). The symbols displayed variably from the notification suspension symbols may be set in various ways, and the result of determination of acceptance or rejection, the type of reach, etc. may be notified by the symbol type, the color, etc. Further, by configuring the normal holding effect so that it is easy to be drawn when the success / failure determination result is a big hit, it is possible to make the jackpot more expectable when the normal holding effect is displayed.

  Next, eight effects will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, when the number of pending items reaches the maximum of eight, it is lottery whether or not to execute eight effects (see FIGS. 42 (a) and (b)) using all eight pending symbols. When it is determined that eight effects are to be executed, as shown in FIG. 42 (a), all the held symbols are variably displayed as the notification held symbols of the "push" symbol. Then, at the right end, a notification mode (a notification mode that is not a reserved symbol) in which the characters "Press! Please!" Is displayed, and it is configured to urge the frame button 22 to be pressed.

  When the player presses the frame button 22 during a period in which the eight effects are being executed, as shown in FIG. 42 (b), the notification suspension symbol is displayed variably into characters one by one. Here, one notification hold symbol is variably displayed each time the frame button 22 is pressed once. The variable order is configured to change sequentially from the notification holding symbol displayed on the left.

  It is determined whether or not the eight effects are to be executed by lottery when there is a stored memory that is super reach or a stored memory that is a big hit among the eight stored stored stored symbols. Be done.

  In the eight hold effect, notification is performed to the player by letters using eight hold symbols. Specifically, when the character "big hit !!!!" is displayed, it is informed that in 8 pending storages there is a pending storage in which the result of the pass / fail judgment is a big hit (confirmed that a big hit will be made) doing. On the other hand, when the character "big hit !!!?" Is displayed, there is a possibility that a pending storage as a big hit is stored in eight pending storages (as a big hit in eight pending storages) Is notified that it is undecided that the pending storage is stored.

  By configuring in this manner, when the player presses the frame button 22 one time after the eight notification effect symbols of the effect are displayed, the notification hold symbol at the left end is variably changed to "large" and displayed Be done. By displaying this character, the player first presses the frame button 22 in expectation of the character of "big hit". Here, when “OK” is displayed, next, the frame button 22 is pressed to expect that the characters “R” will be displayed. In this way, seven notification hold symbols are variably displayed, and when the character "big hit !!!" is displayed, the last notification hold symbol (the hold symbol on the far right) left is "! The expectation to the jackpot will be high if it may be changed to Thereafter, when the player operates the frame button 22, the player can determine the notification result. As described above, in the eight hold effect, each time the frame button 22 is pressed, a game can be performed while expecting the characters to be displayed next, and the player can be entertained.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, even if the holding ball is digested and the fluctuation is started, the remaining notification holding symbols changed by eight effects are maintained and displayed, so that the player can obtain the remaining notification holding symbols. It is possible to predict what character (informing mode) has been set from the characters.

  In this embodiment, since eight reservations are stored, effects are produced that are advantageous to the player are executed, so the player is allowed to play the game so that the ball is more stored. Can. Specifically, when a long fluctuation pattern (high expectation to jackpot) such as super reach is usually selected, the player may stop playing the game ball and play a game. However, during that time, it is also a period during which the holding balls are easy to accumulate, so that the player can play the game without stopping the firing of the game balls so that eight effects are executed even when the balls come off. it can.

  Moreover, you may be comprised so that eight production | presentation may be performed if eight holding balls are memorize | stored for a fixed time, after eight production | presentation is performed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible for the player to continue playing the game ball and continue playing the game ball in order to further generate the holding ball.

  In addition, the notification mode (characters to be displayed) determined at the timing when eight effects are executed may be configured to be variable according to the determination result when a new holding ball is generated. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to provide fun for determining the timing at which the player changes the notification suspension symbol.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 43 to 44, the combined display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment will be described. In the combined display effect, the sub symbol (blank symbol "△") is changed to the "push" symbol and displayed after the main symbol to be dislocated to the middle symbol is temporarily stopped when the reach display mode is selected. After being displayed, the "push" symbol is moved to the center of the third symbol display device 81, and is variably displayed as a "push" symbol having a large size. Thereafter, when the player presses the frame button 22, a combination of main symbols indicating the result of the pass / fail judgment is displayed again. Specifically, if the result of the pass / fail judgment is a hit, it is displayed as a combination indicating a jackpot such as "777". On the other hand, if it is out of alignment, it is displayed with a symbol indicating out of alignment such as "717".

  FIG. 43 (a) shows a state where the variation pattern of the combined display mode is displayed and the reach display mode with the "7" symbol is displayed, and the middle symbol is variably displayed. In the case of reach, except for the variation pattern of the composite display mode, the middle symbol is variably displayed (dynamically displayed) beyond the symbol which is the reach. That is, the reach symbol is scrolled once through the reach effective line. However, in the variation pattern of the composite display mode, the reach symbol is set to temporarily stop in front of the reach line without passing through the reach effective line. That is, the reach period is set shorter than the normal reach display mode.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (b), after the “5” symbol before the reach symbol stops at the reach effective line, a sub-second arranged between the main symbols of the left symbol row and the right symbol row after 3 seconds The symbol (blank symbol “Δ”) is variably displayed as the informing symbol of the small “push” symbol. Among the fluctuation patterns of the synthetic display mode, the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo synthetic display mode is configured not to be variable to the synthetic display mode from being changed to the notification symbol. In this case, when the frame button 22 is pressed, an effect of re-variing the "5" symbol of the stopped middle symbol is executed.

  On the other hand, in the variation pattern changed to the composite display mode, as shown in FIG. 44 (a), the “5” symbol of the middle symbol row in which the “push” symbol is displayed at the central portion of the third symbol display device 81. It moves toward and is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), the “5” symbol is covered and a large “push” symbol is displayed. The variation pattern of the composite display mode in which the large "push" symbol is displayed is extremely easy to be selected when the result of the pass / fail judgment is a big hit, so that the player can display this composite display mode. , You can have high expectations for the jackpot.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 45 to 48, time presentation in the present embodiment will be described. The time effect is changed to a dedicated background image set in advance for a predetermined time (five minutes in the present embodiment) every predetermined time (a certain period) after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. It is an effect mode to be executed. In the present embodiment, the clocking means 292 configured by an RTC (real time clock) is provided, and since the internal power supply (battery in the present embodiment) dedicated to the clocking means 292 is provided, the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 Timekeeping can be continued even in the unsupplied state. Here, when manufacturing the pachinko machine 10, by setting the same time (for example, the present time) to the clock means and manufacturing, it is configured to supply power to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 simultaneously. The same insertion time information can be acquired between the pachinko machines 10. By configuring in this manner, time presentation can be performed synchronously among the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

  FIG. 45 is a timing chart showing the timing of executing the time presentation period. When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the current time information is clocked by the time setting process (S1214 in FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 described later (see FIG. 68). Obtained from Based on the acquired time information, when 55 minutes have elapsed, a time effect period (effect mode B) is set. Note that a normal gaming machine period (rendering mode A) is set in a period until this time effecting period is set. The time effect period is normally set to 5 minutes, and when this 5 minutes has elapsed, a normal game period is set.

  Here, when five minutes of the time effect period has passed, it is determined whether the winning storage result at that time or the special symbol in change is set as a big hit or not, and the big hit will be made. If one is set, the time rendering extension period (rendering mode C) is set as the time until the variation ends.

  Fig. 46 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of time effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the remaining time in the time effect period is 180 seconds. During the time presentation period, a background image is a display mode in which a school of fish is displayed.

  FIG. 46 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the remaining time in the time effect period is 3 seconds. In the example of FIG. 46 (b), the actual third symbol is reduced and is variably displayed in the lower right of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Then, the same effect pattern as the third pattern is displayed in a stop manner in a display mode in which it shows off. In this case, the effect pattern is displayed with a slight shaking to notify that the stop display is not completely displayed. As described above, it is rare for the end timing of the time effect period to coincide with the change stop timing of the third symbol, but it is possible to switch to the effect symbol and display it as if it were displayed as if the third symbol was stopped. Also, it is possible to make it seem as if the third symbol is stopped and displayed at the same timing with the other pachinko machines 10 as well. In addition, also when the stop timing of a 3rd symbol corresponds with a time presentation period, a production symbol is displayed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress that the display mode at the end of the time effect period becomes constant and the player feels the sense of discomfort.

  When the rendering symbol is stopped and displayed 3 seconds before the remaining period, as shown in FIG. 47 (a), a prognostic display mode is displayed in which the rendering symbol is slightly shaken for 3 seconds. Then, after the character "super fish school time" indicating that it is a time presentation period, a notification mode which is the timing of the division of whether "end?" Is extended or not is displayed. After that, when the time rendering extension period is set, the text “Super fish school time extension !!” is displayed to notify that the time rendering period has been extended as shown in FIG. Is displayed again. In this case, at the same time as the extension start, the effect symbol starts variable display, and the player is notified as if a new special symbol change is started. Further, since the extension period is a period until the variable display, which is a big hit, is ended, the remaining period (115 seconds in the example of FIG. 47B) is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, when the time effect period is extended, the time effect is extended because the hold memory for the big hit is set, or the change is already started (during the change). That is, the jackpot will be notified to the player 4a. Here, in the time effect period, the same effect is executed synchronously between the same pachinko machines 10, and the effect (see FIG. 47 (a)) indicating whether the extension period is set at the same timing is displayed Be done. As a result, it is possible to determine that the jackpot of the pachinko machine 10 for which the extension period has been set can be hit by other players as well, and it is possible to win the other players's euphoria.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 48, when the extension effect is not set, the characters “super fish school time end !!” are displayed to notify that the time effect period has ended. After that, when the third symbol is changing, the effect pattern is displayed in the same time as the remaining changing time of the third symbol, and then it is stopped and displayed. From the next change, the reduced display of the third symbol is released, and the third symbol is changed and displayed in the normal size. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort even when the time effect period ends. On the other hand, when the timing at which the third symbol is stopped and displayed matches the end timing of the time effect period, the reduced display of the third symbol is canceled and displayed from the start of the next change.

  In addition, when change is already complete | finished at the completion | finish timing of a time production period, and pending | holding memory | storage is not memorize | stored, precursor effect production is not performed.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot condition is set as the condition under which the extension is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be set as a pending storage in which the fluctuation pattern to be the super reach is selected. It may be configured to be set when a lottery is made and it becomes a win.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 changes display by indicating whether or not a lottery of a normal symbol performed in conjunction with the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is being executed, and is stopped after the end of the change. As a symbol, the normal symbol (the second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is shown by the lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time the ball passes through the through gate 67, the variation display in which the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lighted To be done. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of "o"), the motorized prize 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 operates for a predetermined time. As a result, the second winning opening 640 is configured so as to easily enter a ball. The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to four times at maximum, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and is also lit and displayed in the second symbol holding lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and also the first symbol display device 37 And you may make it carry out using a part of 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. Similarly, lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, as with the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is not limited to four, and the number of holding balls is not limited to four, and is three or less, or five or more The number of times (for example, eight times) may be set. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be configured not to perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, there are disposed a first winning opening 64 and a second winning opening 640 where balls can enter. When the ball enters the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, the first entrance switch and the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 are turned on. Due to the first ball entry switch and the second ball entry switch being turned on, a lottery for special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 is made by the main control unit 110, and the display according to the lottery result is the first symbol display device 37 Is shown by the LED 37a. Further, the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the ball enters.

  In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls when entering the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is the same, but is not limited thereto, and may be different numbers of winning balls. For example, when entering the first winning opening 64, the number of winning balls for the second winning opening 640 as the four winning balls when entering the second winning opening 640 as the three winning balls It is also possible to set more than the number of winning balls for one winning opening 64.

  On the other hand, when the number of winning balls for the second winning opening 640 is set smaller than that for the first winning opening 64, it is possible to design the second winning opening 640 to win more gaming balls during a definite change period or time. As a result, the number of balls reserved for special symbol 2 can be maintained at a larger number, and efficient games can be played. Therefore, during the time saving, the game time of the definite variation period can be shortened, and the sales on the gaming shop side can be further increased.

  Below the second winning opening 640, a variable winning device 65 is disposed, and at a substantially central portion thereof, a horizontally-long rectangular specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed in the main controller 110 is a big hit, after the predetermined time (variation time) has passed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a big hit stop symbol. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (a jackpot of 16 rounds) in which a large amount of prize balls are paid out from the normal time. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is lit in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning A game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time for a predetermined number of times as a special gaming state is triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

  In the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13, adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for attaching a certificate, an identification label and the like are provided, and the certificate paper and the like affixed to the adhesive space K1 is a front frame 14 Can be viewed through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball which has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided to an unshown ball discharge path through the out port 66. A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 49) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 49), for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electric Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  In main controller 110, lottery of special symbols, lottery of ordinary symbols, setting of display in first symbol display device 37, setting of display in second symbol display device 83, and setting of display in third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 52, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and display setting in the third symbol display device 81. Used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to

  In order to select the jackpot type of the special symbol and the first random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the special symbol, in the drawing of the special symbol and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first hit type counter C2 used for the first time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1, and the change type counter CS1 used for the change pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and it returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 58), and some counters are periodically updated in the main processing (see FIG. 67). The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 stores the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a consisting of four holding areas (the first to fourth holding areas) for storing the holding balls of the special symbol 1 and the holding balls of the special symbol 2 Special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b consisting of four holding areas (holding first to fourth area) of each is provided, and the common special symbol holding ball execution area of special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 is It is provided. In each area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, each value of the first random number counter C1 and the first collision type counter C2 is stored according to the timing of entering the first winning opening 64. Similarly, the same value is stored for each area of the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b in accordance with the timing of entering the second winning opening 640.

  Also, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas), and a ball passes through each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored according to the timing of passing through the gate 67.

  Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), and is 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 299) It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 299, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58) is executed, and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 57).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. And the value of the random number which becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the special symbol big hit random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is special When it agrees with the value of the random number which becomes the jackpot set by the symbol jackpot random number table, it is determined that the special symbol is the jackpot. In addition, this special symbol big hit random number table is for high probability of special symbol (period during the low probability state of special symbol) and high probability of high probability of becoming special jackpot from the low probability (special symbol) And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. Thus, the probability of becoming a jackpot is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot. The special symbol big hit random number table (not shown) for high probability of special symbol and the special symbol big hit random number table (not shown) for low probability of special symbol are in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110. Provided in

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) And return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit classification counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol 1 hold of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number that makes the big win of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that causes the special symbol to go out, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the one symbol display device 37 is at the time of removal of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that will be the big win of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 The display mode is for the jackpot of the special symbol. In this case, a specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. In the present embodiment, two types of "big hit A" and "big hit B" are set for the big hit type, and either "big hit A" or "big hit B" is set by the first hit type counter C2. Is determined. Then, the display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first random number counter C1, at the low probability of the special symbol, there are three random number values that become the big wins of the special symbol, and the random number "7, 107, 282" is the special symbol for low probability It is stored in the jackpot random number table. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 300, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 3, so the probability of becoming a big symbol of a special symbol is "1/100".

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, there are 30 random number values that become the jackpot of the special symbol, and the value is "4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 "is a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability Is stored in As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 300, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 30, so the probability of being a big symbol of a special symbol is "1/10".

  In the present embodiment, the random number value for the big hit stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for low probability time, and the random number value for the big hit stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability time In order to avoid duplicate values, random numbers are set to be the respective jackpots. Here, if there is a value that is always used regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10 as a random number value that will be a jackpot, the random number value may be input from the outside, and it may be easy to illegally attract a jackpot. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state of special symbol or low probability state of special symbol), change the random number value to be a big hit Since it can be made difficult to predict the random number value which becomes the jackpot of a special symbol by this, suppression against fraud can be aimed at.

  Further, the value of the first collision type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type when the random number value is “0 to 59” in the first jackpot type counter C2 set in the jackpot type selection table (not shown) is “jackpot A”. In addition, the jackpot type when the value is “60 to 99” is “jackpot B”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. In addition, the random number value for determining the big hit type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2 is set by the special symbol big hit type table (see FIG. 52 (b)), The table is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The fluctuation type counter CS1 determines rough display modes such as so-called short time deviation, long time deviation, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the variation time of symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol fluctuation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 Ru. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 67) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) storing a random value for determining one fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of fluctuation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is done.

  In the variation pattern selection table 202d, variation pattern selection tables for selecting a variation pattern dedicated to the special symbol 1 are set for each gaming state (normal gaming state, time saving gaming state, probability variation gaming state). In addition, although it demonstrates in detail by the description about selection of the fluctuation pattern in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 mentioned later, in the main control apparatus 110, based on the yes / no decision result, the number of holding balls, and the value of fluctuation type counter CS1. Then, the contents of the rough fluctuation pattern (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) and the fluctuation time are determined, and the fluctuation pattern command indicating the contents of the determination is set.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52 (c), if the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired is any one of 5 to 20 at the low probability of the normal symbol, the normal symbol is normal It is determined to be a hit. On the other hand, when the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired is any one of 5 to 204 at the high probability of the normal symbol, it is determined that it is a normal hit of the normal symbol.

  Thus, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be hit. Therefore, when the probability is low, it is possible to lower the frequency at which the motorized prize 640a is operated and to reduce the frequency at which the second winning opening 640 is entered. Therefore, it is possible to enter the first winning opening 64 mainly, thereby increasing the game ball consumption of the player and increasing the profit of the gaming shop side. On the other hand, in the high-probability time-span and mid-term and definite change periods, the opportunity to operate the motorized accessory 640a can be given with the probability of 1 / 1.2, and the chance of entering the second winning opening 640 is increased. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to set the gaming state advantageous to the player by suppressing the consumption of the game ball of the player. Therefore, the player can play a game aiming at a game with a high probability, and can play more time games.

  If the ball passes through the through gate 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the variation display of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device 83 is obtained. Runs for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 obtained is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be won, and after the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed The symbol of "o" is lit and displayed. Then, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is "5 to 20", the second winning opening 640 is opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" as a normal hit. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 640 is opened only for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "0.5 seconds x 2 times" may be opened.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, there are 200 random number values that become the jackpot of the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 53A) for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 200, so the probability of becoming a big symbol of a special symbol is "1 / 1.2."

  If the ball passes through the through gate 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, the second random number counter C4 value is acquired and the variation display of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device 83 is obtained. Is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed ) And the second winning opening 640 is opened "2 seconds x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the variable display time becomes very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds" as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, the release period of the second winning opening 640 Since it becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 2 seconds × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second winning opening 640. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 640 is opened for "two seconds x 2 times" when the normal symbol is hit, but the opening time is The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 67).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

  Returning to FIG. 49, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 50, the RAM 203 is a stack area where the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of.

  The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 67), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 41) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 65) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 holding ball number. It has a counter 203d, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, a time saving counter 203g, a probability change flag 203h, and other memory areas 203z.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area for the special symbol 1 and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and in each of these areas, Each value of the random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (start winning), and the acquired data includes four holding areas (the first holding area). Among the vacant areas of the area to the reserved fourth area), the areas with the smallest area number (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to the winning in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main controller 110, when a lottery of special symbols is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is to the execution area Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 which are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determinations such as lottery of special symbols are performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the hold first area to the execution area, the hold first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which winning data stored in other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) is packed into a hold area (hold first area to hold third area) with one smaller area number. To be done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which data of winning is stored. Further, the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the special symbol 2.

  The regular symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through gate 67, the value of counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data indicates that the four reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) are vacant. Among the existing areas, the areas with the smallest area number (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, similar to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning sequence is held. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control unit 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area), the determination such as the lottery of the normal symbol is performed.

  It should be noted that when data is shifted from the first holding area to the execution area, the first holding area becomes empty, so similar to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the winning combinations stored in the other holding areas A shift process is performed to pack data into a reserve area with a small area number. In addition, data shift is also performed only for the holding area in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is a variation display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on entering the ball into the first winning opening 64 (start winning). It is a counter which counts the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the ball enters the first winning opening 64 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases to 1 at maximum value 1 each time Are added (see S404 in FIG. 61). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S307 in FIG. 60).

  The value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command. The holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d is changed.

  The special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e is a counter for counting the holding balls based on winning in the second winning opening 640, and the other configuration is the same as the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d, so Detailed description is omitted.

  The voice lamp control device 113 suspends the fluctuation display suspended in the main control device 110 by the suspension ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 retention ball number counter 203 d is changed. You can get the value of the ball number itself. As a result, the number of holding balls in the variable display controlled by the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is actually held in the main control 110 due to the influence of noise etc. Even if it deviates from that, it is possible to correct the deviation by means of the number of balls command received next.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command, and the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of holding balls every time the number of holding balls changes. Send a ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the number-of-held-balls number pattern in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of held balls notified by the number-of-held-cells-for-display command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is the maximum number of holding balls (number of waits) of the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and it is incremented by 1 up to the maximum value 4 each time the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. See S704 in FIG. 64). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 63).

  When the ball passes through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of suspension of variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 64). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4 when the ball passes either the left or right through gate 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (see FIG. 64 S703: No).

  The hour-time counter 203g indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, and if the value of the time-period counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-short state of the normal symbol If the value of the time counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. At this time, the initial value of the counter 203g is set to zero, and a lottery for a special symbol is performed in the main control unit 110, and a value according to the jackpot type is set every time it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot Be done. That is, when it becomes the big hit of the special symbol, the value according to the big hit classification is newly set regardless of how many the value of the time counter 203 g is.

  The probability change flag 203h is a flag indicating that the gaming state is a probability change gaming state. When the probability variation gaming state is set as the gaming status, the probability variation flag 203h is set to on. The probability change flag 203 h is set to off when the jackpot B is won. In the initialized state, it is set to off.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specified winning opening 65a A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side and a solenoid for driving a motorized part is connected to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 is outputted from the various switches 208. Various processings are executed based on the control signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 65) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and continuous advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or at the time of super reach The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents of the above, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110, the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, etc., and displays the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

  As shown in FIG. 53A, the variation pattern selection table 222a is stored in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. Also, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c, and a normal symbol holding ball Number counter 223d, change start flag 223e, stop type selection flag 223f, effect counter 223g, hold effect flag 223h, eight effect flag 223i, set time storage area 223j, effect mode storage area 223k, normal period flag 223m, start period flag 223o, an extension effect flag 223p, an extension effect time storage area 223q, a button effect flag 223r, a button effect counter 223s, and other memory areas 223z.

  The winning information storage area 223 a is an area in which winning information is stored corresponding to the holding ball based on the winning command output from the main control device 110. As the winning information, various types of information such as a result of determination of success or failure, a variation pattern, and a type of stop are set.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b is a storage area in which the number of holding balls of the special symbol 1 is stored based on the holding ball command. The special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223 c is a storage area in which the number of holding balls of the special symbol 2 is stored based on the holding ball number command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 223d is a storage area in which the number of holding balls of the normal symbol is stored based on the holding ball command.

  The fluctuation start flag 223e is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start fluctuation of the third symbol.

  The stop type selection flag 223 f is a flag indicating a stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a stop state based on the stop type command output from the main control device 110.

  The effect counter 223 g is a counter used in the sound lamp control device 113 for determining various effects and details of fluctuation patterns, and for performing various lottery and the like. The effect counter 223 h is repeatedly updated in the main processing in the range of 0 to 198.

  The hold effect flag 223 h is a flag indicating that the normal hold effect is being performed. The normal holding effect is set to be performed, and the holding symbol is set to be off based on the timing when the fluctuation starts.

  The eight effect flag 223i is a flag indicating that eight effect is being executed. It is set to ON based on the fact that eight effects are determined to be executed, and is switched off based on the timing at which the eighth reserved symbol displayed when eight effects are executed starts changing. It is a flag set to

  The set time storage area 223i is a storage area in which time information for executing a time presentation period is stored. In this set time storage area 223i, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the time setting process in the start process (see FIG. 68) executed by the MPU 113 of the voice lamp control device 113 (FIG. 69, S1214) In S1222, the information of the time presentation period is set for 24 hours.

  The effect mode storage area 223 k is a storage area in which information on the effect mode A, the effect mode B, and the effect mode C is stored (set). In the effect mode, if the current effect mode is the normal game period (out of the time effect period), the effect mode A is stored, and if it is the time effect period, the effect mode B is stored, if it is the extended time effect period, the effect Mode C is stored.

  The normal period flag 223 m is a flag indicating that the normal game period is started. By setting the normal period flag 223m to ON, the background image is changed from the time effect period or the extension time effect period to a background image corresponding to the normal game period. In that case, after the background image shown in FIG. 48 is displayed, the background image showing the normal game period is displayed.

  The start period flag 223o is a flag indicating that a time effect period is started. By setting this time effect period to ON, a background image (see FIG. 46A) of the super fish school indicating that it is a time effect period is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The extension effect flag 223p is a flag indicating that a time effect extension period is started. When this time effect extension period is set, a background image showing the time effect extension period shown in FIG. 47 (b) is set.

  The extension effect time storage area 223 q is a storage area in which the time until the end of the fluctuation that becomes the big hit is calculated when the time effect extension period is set, and information indicating the time is stored. Based on the value of the extension effect time storage area 223q, the remaining time of the time effect extension period is displayed.

  The button effect flag 223r is a flag indicating that a variation pattern for executing a button effect is selected. It is determined that the button effect is executed by this flag.

  The button effect counter 223s is a counter for selecting the display mode of the button effect.

  The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 71) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process is performed. The command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the fluctuation display (variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81) Control). The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 65) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected via the bus line 240 to the output side of the input port 238. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is another model in which the lottery probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one big symbol of a special symbol are different. The display control device 114 is converted into a common part and the cost is reduced because there are models of the same specifications.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processing according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction of the instruction pointer, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a large area with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. When the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a row in a plurality of pages, data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. It takes a long time to output data after In addition, when reading out non-consecutive data, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read out. As described above, since the speed for reading the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instruction that configures the control program. In the case where a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control apparatus 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later, and the data read / write is performed at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read an instruction constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing the NAND flash memory 234a, the ROM controller 234b, the buffer RAM 234c, and the NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the player's interest.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can also store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this manner, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the character ROM 234 can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234 b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data Are read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits into which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or a defective data block in which data can not be written is generated. To Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known to read and write data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Execute conversion of data address of.

  Since error correction is performed on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit by the ROM controller 234b, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on the erroneous data. Thus, it can be suppressed that the MPU 231 performs processing or the image controller 237 generates various images.

  Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and the access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234 a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234 c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234 a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b causes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. It is determined whether or not the data of (1) is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, if it is not set, data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read out from the NAND type flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. Do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is configured by two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside, for example, using the other bank with data set in one bank, or designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. Processing for transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other The processing of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading of the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR type ROM 234 d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234 and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234 a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234 a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be performed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the range of the capacity of one bank (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the buffer RAM 234c in this boot program. From the instruction, a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specification of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated to the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d And the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by one, and transmits the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set from the NOR ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c while the address specified by the bus line 240 points to the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset is released are NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the specification of the address to the output of the data in the reading of the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If it has been, the character ROM 234 has to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies an address "0000H" and then an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of latency before receiving the code. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234 d from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs. When the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately uses the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d as the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. A fixed amount data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program, a predetermined amount (for example, a capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) program storage area of the work RAM 233 It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after releasing the system reset, and the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 A predetermined amount of data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured to have a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set to only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c is unnecessary, so the time for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a It is programmed to set a first predetermined address. Thus, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the predetermined amount by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined one of the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of program among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various processing can be performed. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And perform various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, among the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, the remaining boot programs are the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 83) executed after the boot process (see S2001 in FIG. 84) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. The various control programs are used to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are Even when stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 57) transmitted from the MPU 231, and one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later The image drawn in the buffer is displayed, and the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame, and the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for which the image rendering process for one frame is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 85B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display An instruction to draw an image can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, before drawing is performed, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231.

  Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower compared to other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 allows image data of an image to be displayed frequently and image data of an image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image.

  When the display control device 114 renders an image using image data nonresident in the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the rendering is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is used for image drawing, there is a possibility that the image data may be deleted by overwriting, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured in the above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, so that the drawing of the image is immediately performed and the drawn image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, cost increase due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data that the MPU 231 sends to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list is the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), information of transfer destination (information indicating to which of resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data of one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the image data is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the video RAM 236 for ordinary use. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source head address indicated by the transfer instruction.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored temporarily in the buffer RAM 237a, and thereafter, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can. Thus, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the ordinary video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 can not be used for image rendering processing, and as a result, the image rendering or the required time is taken. The third symbol display device 81 can be prevented from not being displayed in time.

  In addition, since transfer from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236 perform the image drawing process and the third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period of time unused for display processing on the device 81, and simplification of the processing can be achieved.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is on, and the power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, the character pattern area In addition to the error message image area 235f, at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and entry of the first winning opening 64 is detected. In this case, it is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, which displays the lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by the fluctuation effect.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a. A transfer instruction is sent to the controller 237 (see FIG. 83).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. When the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b immediately after power on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at the time of the power-on to use the main image (not shown) at the time of the power-on. 3 Display on the symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the main image at power on. On the display screen, the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "○" in the lower right position toward the screen and the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "X" in the same position as the "○" symbol, fluctuation period The display is repeated alternately. Then, based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 and the stop type command, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 cause the lottery performed by the main control unit 110. Judge the result, if it is "big hit of the special symbol", the image showing it is displayed for a certain period of time after stopping the fluctuation production, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the image showing it is stopped the fluctuation production Displayed for a fixed period later.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. At power on, it instructs to draw the main image. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall may confirm the main image when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 While transferring data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, wait until transfer of image data to resident video RAM 235 is completed without fear that the operation has stopped. Can.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. It is possible to immediately confirm that this is the case, and further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the power change image area when the power is turned on. The power-on-time change image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on time change image resident on 235b, and the images showing “o” and “x” are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Thus, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform simple fluctuation presentation using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Further, at the stage when the main image at power on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the fluctuation effect image at power on is already resident in the power on fluctuation image area 235b. When the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately it can.

  Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235 c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235 d is an area for residence of the third symbol used in the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 40) with the numerals "0" to "9" being the third symbol are resident. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 performs the fluctuation effect, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to start fluctuating production quickly. Therefore, after entering the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37 changes in the third symbol display device 81 despite the fact that the fluctuation effect is started. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the effect is not immediately started.

  The character symbol area 235 e is an area for storing image data corresponding to a character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e, whereby display control is performed. When changing the character pattern based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but in the character pattern area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading out image data previously resident. As a result, since it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to change the character pattern immediately.

  The error message pictorial area 235 f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control unit 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even if the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the occurrence of the error to the display control device 114 together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of an error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 generates an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the graphic area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, there is no need to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even when using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

  The image storage area 236 a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and for each sub area, the type of image data stored in the sub area is determined in advance.

  Among the image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is required to render image data required for subsequent rendering of the image from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image of one frame drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby allowing one frame of the frame buffer While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the other frame buffer reads the image information of one frame that has been expanded first, and sends a drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes processing for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer at the same time. The image for one frame expanded earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and the image for one frame read out can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, with the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the drawing processing of the image for one frame is Every 20 milliseconds for completion, either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c is alternately interchanged and designated by the MPU 231.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Configured The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily carry out diversified and complicated renditions.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time elapses with respect to one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data It is an area where transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among transfer image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device By using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition.

  Here, the details of the various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, variation effects, round effects A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display fluctuation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. When the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the fluctuation effect is also received. For example, when the change effect is started, if the stop type of the change effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the end is finally displayed stop, while the stop type of the change effect is big hit A, big hit B If it is either, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot is finally displayed stopped. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect, and can easily determine the game value to be awarded according to the jackpot type.

  In addition, since the first winning opening 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as a winning ball when a ball enters the ball, the electric jackpot becomes a big hit of an ordinary symbol and the ball is a second winning opening It becomes easy to get to 640 and the number of prize balls increases. As a result, even if the pachinko machine 10 plays a game, it is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls or a state in which the number of balls is not reduced. You can get a sense of the period that you can get the jackpot of the special symbol without it. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the will to participate in the game.

  In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next change effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has passed since the one change effect was stopped. While the third symbol consisting of the main symbols not numbered from "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. In addition, as for the fluctuation display data table which is a display data table for fluctuation presentation, if there are 32 fluctuation demonstration patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one fluctuation presentation pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is represented as one unit The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame are specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image of one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. Note that if the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The semitransparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semitransparent value, the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and a character, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information and filter designation information Since the variation display data table is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image, is defined.

  When it is specified that the MPU 231 displays any of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (undersea, beach, background of preparation period, background dedicated to time rendering) according to the back surface type, the player of the background is selected by the player. The back image corresponding to the designated stage is specified as the drawing target, and the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified along with the passage of time.

  In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead, the back surface type and the range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type And position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database It specifies based on the position of a back surface image, and the elapsed time after drawing of the said image shown by position information (or display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is information indicating an elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed according to the back surface type, and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information (for example, of the range corresponding to the initial position) of the position information together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started (Information indicating (1)) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating an elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which a range of a back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. The offset information is information representing the difference between the numerals attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly identifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is identified by the fact that the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect to be performed this time The reason is to change according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed one before is described. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 Describe the information. Thereby, the fluctuation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the third symbol is the variation symbol in the variation production of one before or the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing it with the number given to the symbol and representing the offset information with the difference between the digits given to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for the predetermined time that is switched from the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently performed this time It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at high speed, the third symbol is in a state in which it is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  The start address of the display data table "0000H" describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 55) describes the data table. "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control unit 110 and displays the selected The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is next processed based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 57) to be described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw that image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233 d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images Since the processing of the start and execution of a program that is complicated and enormously takes a great deal of load, the processing capability of the display control device 114 may be limited, which may limit the diversification of effect images that can be controlled. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed one frame at a time according to the set data table. The pachinko machine 10 can be created because an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines and the like other than pachinko machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents are changed on the spot based on the user's operation, and therefore the display contents can not be predicted. The display data table corresponding to the presentation mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer according to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of sprites used in effects specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Are described (addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 56 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data is defined (meaning the address “0002H” in FIG. 56).

  As transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the case of the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 56, In “02F0H”), “End” information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from main controller 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding thereto, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the display content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 57) to be described later is created. Then, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 56, when the pointer 233 f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined at the relevant address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the drawing list after the addition is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233 f is “0002H”, since the null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with setting the table in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Since data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, a wide variety of effect images are easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simplified image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not the power-on image (not shown) (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. After this simple image display flag 233c is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on change image area 235b of the resident video RAM, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on change image is transferred. , And in the main processing (see FIG. 83) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2005 in FIG. 83). Then, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image when all resident object image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process. It is set to off (see S3605 in FIG. 95 (b)).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2301 in FIG. 85 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simplified command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 85 (b)) and the simplified display setting process (see FIG. 85B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 85 (b) (see S2309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simplified image display flag 233 c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 86 to 91) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 92 to 94) are performed.

  Also, the simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3501 of FIG. 95A), and the simplified image display flag 233c is on. Executes resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 95 (b)) for transferring resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. If the simplified image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 96) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110 It is a buffer to The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233 f one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 57) in which the contents of the image drawing instruction for the image is described is generated. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, an image for the image controller 237 every frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 57) in which the contents of the drawing instruction are described is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233 e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It stores in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing null data that means that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of transfer target image data defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233 e while adding the pointer 233 f by one. (That is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a drawing list (see FIG. 57) described later (see FIG. 57) describing the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image to add.

  Thereby, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute processing to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233 f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. It is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233 f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from which the image controller 237 completes the image drawing process for one frame (FIG. 70)), the pointer update process (see S3105 in FIG. 70B) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f every time the pointer 233f is updated, and a drawing list to be described later. (See FIG. 57), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, obtain the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time, and the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Also, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 57, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third pattern (symbol 1, 1 ···, effects (effect 1, effect 2, ···), characters (character 1, character 2, ···, holding ball number design 1, holding ball number design 2, ···, error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite, such as a design. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (video RAM 235 for residence or video RAM 236 for normal use) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read out from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing is performed according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value. Processing, combining processing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, tone correction processing according to color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233 j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying the hold ball number pattern) Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame based on an image, a warning image notifying of the occurrence of an error, etc., and the detailed information for each sprite Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of data of a sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. It is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and to easily include the information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 is specified in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (pattern 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) The detailed information corresponding to the respective sprites is described in the order of the characters (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number pattern 1, holding ball number pattern 2, ..., error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (a character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the image data is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 generates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source head address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233 d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process (FIG. Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S3107 in FIG. 69). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs according to the end of the effect Perform various processing.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S2002 in FIG. 83) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" which indicates that the storage state for all the sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Then, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when the transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 96) executed by the MPU 231. It will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to “on” which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236 a. Also, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite always becomes unstored by the image data of the one sprite being stored. So, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

  Further, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and transfers the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3713 in FIG. 96). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer instruction of the image data is set (see S3514 in FIG. 96). The image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of the image data is canceled. As a result, wasteful transfer of data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 can be reduced and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233i is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) for expanding an image drawn by the image controller 237 out of two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the drawing target buffer when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is zero, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified when it is one. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3802 in FIG. 97).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn on the basis of the drawing list onto the specified drawing object buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing processing, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update should be set to "1" by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, to "1" when the value is "0", and to "0" when the value is "1". Done by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, transmission of the drawing list is performed by the V-interrupt performed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed. Every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 85B) is performed, the process is performed (see S3802 in FIG. 97).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

<Control Process of Main Controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIG. 58 to FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated with power on and a main process executed after the start-up process, and activated periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment) There are timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start-up. The processing and the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, read processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When each reaches 299, 99, 239), each clears to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, special symbol variation processing for setting a variation pattern or the like of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 while executing processing for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104), and thereafter, The start-up winning process is executed in association with the winning (starting-up winning) to the first winning opening 64 (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 59 to 62.

  After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process which is a process for performing display in the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying passing of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed To do (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and firing the ball on condition that the strike stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process to determine the on / off of the The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device It is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81, and the like.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is currently in the middle of a special symbol (S201). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: Yes), this processing ends.

  If it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing If not (S202: No), the special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S203). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S204). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the stop type selection counter C3 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation If the time has not passed (S204: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S204: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S205). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S203) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, based on values of various counters stored in an execution area provided in common to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. , Lottery of special symbol is done. More specifically, according to the value of the first random number counter C1 it is determined whether or not the big win of the special symbol, and when it is the big win of the special symbol, it is according to the value of the second hit type counter C2 Whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B occurs, the red LED is turned on. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released, when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what makes it light only for several seconds after the stop of a fluctuation | variation.

  After the process of S205 is completed, when the variable display under execution in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether it is a jackpot of a special symbol (S206). If the lottery result this time is a big hit of the special symbol (S206: Yes), it is determined what the big hit type is among the big hit (big hit A, big hit B) of the two kinds of special symbols (S207), big hit type Is a big hit B, 100 is set to the hour / minute counter 203g of the RAM 203 (S209). Thereafter, the process of S210 is performed. If the jackpot type is the jackpot A, the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability that is a probability change period (S208). Then, the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S210), and the present process is ended.

  In the process of S206, if the current lottery result is the deviation of the special symbol (S206: No), it is determined whether the value of the time counter 203g is 1 or more (S211), the value of the time counter 203g is 1 If it is the above (S211: Yes), the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S212), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 0 (S211: No), the process of S212 is skipped and this process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the special symbol variation start process (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S203). This special symbol variation start process (S203) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 59) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), and the special symbol retention 1 ball storage area 203a and Based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area provided in common with the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery (judgment judgment) of "big hit of special symbol" or "out of special symbol" While performing, it is processing for determining the production pattern (the fluctuation production pattern) of the fluctuation production performed with the 1st symbol display 37 and the 3rd symbol display 81.

  In the special symbol variation start process (S203), first, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d or the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (number of holding N2 of the fluctuation display in the special symbol) (S301). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S302), and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is not 0 ((S302) S302: Yes, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S303), and the holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S304). The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 67) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value to the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223 c of the RAM 223 Store.

  After setting the holding ball number command by the process of S304, the data stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball number area 203b is shifted (S305). In the process of S305, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the pending first area to the pending fourth area of the special symbol 2 pending ball storage area 203b toward the execution area is performed. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After the process of S305 is executed, a process of acquiring data of the execution area in the special symbol holding ball number storage area is executed (S310).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S302 that the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is 0 (S302: No), the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d acquired in the process of S301. It is determined whether (N1) is 0 (S306). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S306: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S306, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S306: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S307), and sets a ball holding number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation (S308). The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 67) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b of the RAM 223 Store.

  After setting the holding ball number command in the process of S308, the data stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is shifted (S309). In the process of S309, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, acquire the values of the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. (S310).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is currently in a probability variation period (high probability gaming state) (S311). The determination as to whether or not it is a definite variation period is performed by determining whether a definite variation flag (not shown) is on. The probability change flag is set to on based on the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot A. On the other hand, it is set to off based on the start of the jackpot game.

  If it is determined that the probability change is in progress (S311: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special variation state of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S312. In the process of S312, based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S310 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, the lottery result of whether the jackpot of the special symbol is acquired or not ( S312). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random value of 30 stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability. As mentioned above, as a random value which becomes the big hit of the special symbol, “4, 11, 28, 38, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168 , 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 "are set, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the number of these rounds Is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol when the random numbers match. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S314.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S311 that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (S311: No), the process of S313 is executed. In the process of S313, based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S310 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol jackpot is acquired ( S313). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random value of 3 stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for low probability. Three random numbers, "7, 107, 282", are set as the jackpot of the special symbol, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number of those hits. , Determined to be a jackpot of special symbols. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S314.

  In the process of S314, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S312 or S313 is the jackpot of the special symbol (S314), and when it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is (S314: Yes), based on the value of the second hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S310, the display mode at the time of big hit is set (S315). More specifically, the value of the second hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S310 is compared with the random value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, and the big hit of two types of special symbols (big hit A, Of the jackpot B), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 59", it is determined that the jackpot A (16R jackpot, probability change period up to the next jackpot after jackpot game), "60- If it is in the range of "99", it is determined that the jackpot B (16R jackpot, 100 times a short time of the normal symbol).

  In the process of S315, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big jack A, jack B). Further, in order to cause the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S316). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S316, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third pattern display device 81 stops until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation time is previously defined by a table or the like.

  In the fluctuation pattern, the main control unit 110 determines the fluctuation time of the third symbol to notify of the result of the judgment of acceptance, and notifies the sound lamp control unit 113 of the fluctuation time. In the voice lamp control device 113, the content (variation pattern) of the variation display mode to be actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the variation time and the result of the determination of success or failure. In the main controller 110, even in the display mode of the outreach, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to switch to the display mode of the out which is not the reach display mode as long as the change time is the same. Thereby, various display modes can be displayed, and effects can be diversified.

  For example, as variation patterns for outliers, various types such as "displacement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short duration)", "disappearing normal reach", "disappearing super reach", and "disappearing special reach" are defined. ing. As the variation pattern of jackpot A and jackpot B common use, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined.

  In the process of S314, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S314: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S317). In the process of S317, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and set to the display mode corresponding to the symbol, and is stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. The fluctuation time (variation pattern) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3.

  Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of out of step is determined (S318). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the dislocated symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S317, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3, symbol fluctuation such as normal reach or super reach Determine the fluctuation time.

  Next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S316 or S318 is set (S319). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the stop type selection counter C3 set in the process of S316 or S318 is set (S320). The fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (FIG. 67). Ru. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S320 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58) to determine the presence or absence of a winning on the first winning opening 64 (start winning), and when there is a start winning, It is a process for performing prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol from the holding process of the value indicated by the various random number counters and the value indicated by the held various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, entry into the first winning opening 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S402) . Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether there is no winning in the first winning opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command of the special symbol 1 indicating the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 67) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b of the RAM 223 Store.

  After setting the holding ball number command by the process of S405, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the second type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is stored in the first area of the vacant holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, for S407 to S411, the processing for the winning of the first winning opening 64 is changed to the processing for the winning of the second winning opening 640 for each of the processing of S401 to S406 described above, Since the same processing is performed, the detailed description is omitted. In addition, when the game ball is won in the second winning opening 640, also when stored as a holding ball, each value of the first random number counter C1 and the second hit type counter C2 is acquired, and the corresponding special It is stored in the vacant reservation area of the symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203b.

  As described above, the first hit random number counter C1 and the second hit type counter C2 similar to the special symbol 1 are also obtained for the special symbol 2 based on entering the second winning opening 640. Since a lottery can be executed using a random number common to the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, even in the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, the hit probability can be made constant.

  After the process of S411 is performed, the prefetch process is performed (S412). The details of the pre-reading process (S412) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 62, but based on the values of various counters acquired for entering the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Processing for determining in advance each lottery result to be executed at the start of fluctuation.

  In the present embodiment, the value of each counter is selected based on the ball entry, but may be selected at the start of fluctuation. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 without requiring a storage area for storing the value of each counter until the start of fluctuation. Further, among the counters, a part of the counters (for example, only the stop type selection counter C3) may be acquired at the start of fluctuation. By configuring in this way, a counter related to the hit / not determination at the time of entering the ball can be obtained, and a counter not involved in the hit / off determination can be obtained later, and the amount of data to be stored is maintained while maintaining the fairness of the game. It can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the prefetching process (S412) which is one process in the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this pre-reading process (S412).

  In the pre-reading process (FIG. 62, S412), it is first determined based on the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 whether the success or failure judgment at the start of fluctuation is a big hit (S501). Whether or not the game state at the start of fluctuation is the normal gaming state (low probability) or the probability variation gaming state (high probability gaming state) is the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is determined by the pass / fail judgment of what is displayed earlier than the respective counter values and the hit type thereof. If it is determined that the determination result is a jackpot (S501: Yes), a winning command indicating a jackpot is set (S502). On the other hand, in the process of S501, when the determination result is not a big hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not it is a loose super reach (S503). If it is determined in the process of S503 that the game is out of the reach (supervisory reach) (S503: Yes), a winning command indicating the outreach is set (S504). On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S503 that the game is not the out-of-order super reach (S503: No), a winning command indicating that the game is out is set (S505). As described above, since the result of the determination of the qualification in advance before the start of the fluctuation is output as the winning command to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the holding ball is established, the voice lamp control device 113 It is possible to recognize in advance the result of the pass / fail judgment and the hit type. Therefore, the warning lamp control device 113, based on the winning command, notifies the player of the acceptance / rejection determination result on the holding ball in advance (for example, the color of the suspension symbol is changed to the color for notifying the acceptance / rejection determination result It is possible to execute an effect such as outputting a notification sound for notifying of the result of determination of the propriety of the holding ball. In addition, since the winning command is one winning command output to the holding ball each time the holding ball is established, the voice lamp control device 113 can also recognize the establishment of the holding ball.

  Next, normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), and the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the electric motor accompanying the second winning opening 640 This is a process for controlling the opening time of the special object 640a and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is in the middle of a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As the middle of the second design, the second symbol display device 83 displays a hit and the opening and closing control of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if it is in the middle of the second symbol (S601: Yes), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is not inside the second symbol (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the display manner of the second symbol display device 83 Is not being changed (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is in the time saving state (S608), and if it is not in the time saving state (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. On the other hand, when it is in the time saving state (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S609). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included.

  In the process of S609, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: No), it shifts to the process of S610. In the process of S609, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: Yes), it proceeds to the process of S610.

  If the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: No), if the pachinko machine 10 is within the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: No), the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 Based on the value and the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 52 (c)) for high probability, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 52C).

  In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607, Based on the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 52 (c)) for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the hit of the normal symbol is obtained (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the normal random number table 202c for low probability (see FIG. 52C).

  In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, the lottery of the normal symbol is configured to be less likely to hit. This is because during the jackpot of the special symbol (ie, in the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so the motorized role 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened. The purpose of this is to suppress, as much as possible, the ball that is intended to be won by the special winning opening 65a from entering the second winning opening 640. In addition, since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening even if the ball is suppressed from entering the second winning opening 640 during the jackpot of the special symbol. Many balls enter in 640. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of balls held for the second winning opening 640 is maximum (four times).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the second symbol (S612), and if it is determined that it is a hit of the second symbol (S612: Yes), the display mode of the hit is set (S613). Next, it is determined whether or not it is in the time saving state (S614).

  Then, if it is determined in the process of S614 that the time saving state is established (S614: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S615). As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In this embodiment, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second winning opening 640 as much as possible during the jackpot of the special symbol, even when the normal symbol is hit, it is the same as when the normal symbol is detached. , And the number of times of opening of the motorized accessory 640a is set.

  In the process of S615, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S615: No), the opening period of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is set to one second, and the number of times of opening is set to two. Then, the process proceeds to step S619.

  When it is determined in the process of S614 that the time saving state is not set (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the second symbol, the opening period of the motorized jack 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 While setting to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of release is set to one (S617), and the process proceeds to the processing of S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the second symbol is dislocated (S612: No), the display mode at the time of disengaging is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether or not it is a time saving state (S619), and if it is a time saving state (S619: Yes), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds ( S620), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is not a short time state in the process of S619 (S619: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing is ended. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, at the time of high probability of the second symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short with "30 seconds → 3 seconds" compared with the low probability of the second symbol, Furthermore, since the release period of the second winning opening 640 becomes very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second winning hole 640.

  On the other hand, in the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (S602: Yes), whether or not the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). In addition, before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device 83, the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S620 or the processing of S621.

  In the process of S 622, when the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S 622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the lottery of the normal symbol becomes a hit, and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "o" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit It is set to be displayed. On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is out and the display mode is set by the processing of S 618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (displayed) in the second symbol display device 83 Are set to If the stop display is set by the process of S623, then the second symbol display updating process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 67) is executed, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is changed. The process is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

  Then, when the variable display under execution in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation processing is a hit of the ordinary symbol Is determined (S624). If the lottery result this time is a normal symbol hit (S 624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the motorized role object 640 a attached to the second winning opening 640 is set (S 625), and this processing is ended. When the opening / closing control start of the motorized workpiece 640a is set by the process of S625, the motored workpiece opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 67) is performed next. The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the motorized accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or S617 end. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S624 that the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). The through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67, and if there is a ball passing, the second hit is made. This is processing for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through gate 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. When it is determined that the ball has passed through gate 67 (S701: Yes), the value of normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of holdings of variable display in normal symbol) is obtained (S702). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  If the ball has not passed through gate 67 (S701: No), or if the ball has passed through gate 67, the value (M) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203f is not less than 4 (S703) : No), the process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through gate 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f The value (M) is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is the first of the vacant hold areas (hold first area to hold fourth area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 (S705). In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area. Finish.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The above-described NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout and emission control device 111 in the same manner, and the power disconnection occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 66, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Subsequently, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). If not stored (S905: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

  If the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S912. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S912). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process of the RAM (S913, S914), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), occurrence information of power supply interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S 907: Yes, while keeping the backed up data in the RAM 203, clear the power-off occurrence information (S 908). Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery is transmitted to restore the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of the drive power supply cutoff (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  In the process of S910, the rendering permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Then, the interruption is permitted (S911), and the process shifts to the main processing described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As a summary, each processing of S1001 to S1007 is executed as periodic processing of 4 millisecond cycle, and the counter updating processing of S1010 and S1011 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, while the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 58) is being executed, output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 The external output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, it determines the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 58), and if there is the winning detection information, corresponds to the winning ball number to the payout control device 111. Send an award ball command. Further, the ball number command for holding balls set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 58) and the start winning process (see FIG. 61) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning command set in the start winning process and the pre-reading process (see FIG. 62) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the stop type command and the like are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, if the special symbol is in the jackpot state, execution of the jackpot effect or variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether the specified winning opening 65a has a specified number of balls. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning hole 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, a motorized product opening / closing process is performed to control the opening / closing of the motorized product 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 (S1005). In the motorized product opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the motorized workpiece 640a is set in the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 63), the opening / closing control of the motorized workpiece 640a is started. In addition, the opening / closing control of the motorized accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S613 or the process of S617 in FIG. 63 in the normal symbol variation process end.

  Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S316 or the process of S318 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 60), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol Start at device 37. In this embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses from when the fluctuation is started. Simultaneously turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED; if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED At the same time, turn on the red LED.

  The main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main processing is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, each time the main processing is performed, a counter (not shown) is counted by one so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 100 when the counter reaches 100. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Also, in the first symbol display update process, the first symbol display device when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S315 or the process of S317 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 60) ends. The variation display being executed in 37 is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S315 or the processing of S317 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 60). The stop display (lighting display) is performed on the device 37.

  Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update processing, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the processing of S620 or the processing of S621 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 63), the variation display is performed in the second symbol display device 83 Start. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. Also, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set in the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 63), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83 In the display mode set by the process of S613 of normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 63), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit display) Do.

  After that, it is judged whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1009) ), If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described S1001 and subsequent steps are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process of this time (S1009: No), the initial time within the predetermined time is reached, ie, within the remaining time to the execution timing of the next main process. The value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

  First, updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S1010). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the first The initial value of the random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the stop type selection counter C3 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S1008, if the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 65 has been executed, so that the process at the time of the power-off after S1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is inhibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1014), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1008 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S1001. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S1001. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Controller 113>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 68 to 82, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 68, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S1320 (see FIG. 70) is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “temporary power failure”). It is determined whether or not it has been started during the execution of step S1202). As described later with reference to FIG. 70, when receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1317 in FIG. 70), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process of S1320. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1320 is being executed can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1202: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S1320 occurs. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. From the above, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S1320 after a momentary power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When it is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1202: Yes), the current start-up process is performed after the instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S1320, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1204, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1206). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1208, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-down process of S1320 is performed (see S1317 in FIG. 70). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1320 is performed, the process of S1208 when the power-off flag is turned on is that the current start-up process is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process of S1320 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1209), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210). The permission is set (S1211), and the process shifts to main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S1208 when the power-off flag is off is that, for example, the current startup processing is started after the power is completely shut off, and thus the processing of S1204 to S1206 is performed. It is a case where the processing is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), S1209 which is a clear process of the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1210, and an initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and interrupt permission is set Then (S1211), the process proceeds to the main processing. Thereafter, it is determined whether a status command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1212).

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1209 is that when the process of S1208 is reached via the processes of S1204 to S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1204. If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  In the process of S1214, a time setting process is executed (S1214). The time setting process (S1214) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the time setting process (S1214) which is one process in the start-up process (see FIG. 68) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this time setting process (S1214). In the time setting process (FIG. 69, S1214), the setting of the setting switch 291 is determined, it is determined whether or not the time effect is to be executed, and if the time effect is to be executed, the time information is acquired from the RTC 292 Then, based on the time information, a process of setting the time presentation period in the set time storage area 223 j is executed.

  In the time setting process (FIG. 69, S1214), first, time information is acquired from the RTC 292 (S1221). As the time information acquired here, the value of "hour, minute" is acquired. The RTC 292 is a clock means having a battery inside, and when assembling the pachinko machine 10, the same current time is initially set to the pachinko machine 10 with a predetermined jig. The capacity of the internal battery is about three and a half years of operation time. The RTC 292 also has a calendar function, and is configured to be able to determine the "date". Therefore, for example, on Christmas Day, it is configured to be able to control to change to a background image dedicated to Christmas, or to display a special character or the like such as Santa.

  Next, based on the acquired time information, the preparation period and the time presentation period are respectively calculated and set in the set time storage area 223 j (S 1222).

  In this embodiment, based on the acquired time information, the preparation period for 24 hours and the time effect period are calculated and set in the set time storage area 223j, but the invention is not limited thereto, but first, it is usually It is also possible to set 54 minutes to execute the game, count the period by counting down or counting up, and set the preparation period based on the elapse of 54 minutes. In addition, the time after 54 minutes may be set, and the time of the next period may be set when the time is reached. By configuring in this way, the required capacity of the storage area can be reduced. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be configured at a lower cost.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the process of S1301 this time is executed (S1301), and 1 millisecond If the above has not elapsed (S1301: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1312 without performing the process of S1302 to S1311. In the process of S1301, the process of determining whether 1 millisecond has elapsed is mainly the process concerning display (rendering) in S1302 to S1311, and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). On the other hand, it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1312, the variable display setting process of S1313, and the process of updating various counter values (not shown) in a short cycle. Since the process of S1312 is performed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent reception omission of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1313 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Setting based on the above can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1314 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 ( S1302). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to become the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power on notification process is executed (S1304). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1305 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S1305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect processing, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to the device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process of lighting a hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring and rendering process is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, the input whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. The frame button input monitoring and rendering process (S1307) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1309, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and further, a background image setting process is executed (S1311). Thereafter, the process proceeds to the process of S1312. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing of S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1312, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control apparatus 110 (S1312). The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of the command determination process (S1312 in FIG. 71) is performed, the variable display setting process is performed (S1313). In the fluctuation display setting process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute fluctuation presentation, a fluctuation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1313 ends, the process of synchronous effect management process (S1314) is executed. The synchronization effect management process (S1314) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1314 ends, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1317). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1317 (S1317: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S1319), and the power-off process is executed (S1320). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1321), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the occurrence information of the power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1317 (S1317: No), it is determined based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1318) and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1318: No), the process returns to S1301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1318: Yes), the processing is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, a command determination process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1312). This command determination process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 70) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 among unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control apparatus 110. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1401). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223e is turned on (S1402), and data of the corresponding winning information storage area is shifted (S1403). Thereafter, the advance notice selection process is executed (S1404), and the process proceeds to the process of S1419.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 72, the details of the advance notice selection process (S1404) will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing this advance notice selection process (S1404).

  In the advance notice selection process (S1404), first, the value of the effect counter 223g is acquired (S1501). It is determined whether the rendering mode set in the rendering mode storage area 223k is the rendering mode A (S1502). If it is determined that the effect mode A is set (S1502: Yes), a normal notice effect is selected based on the result of the determination result and the effect counter 223g (S1503). Thereafter, a display notice command indicating the selected notice effect is set (S1504).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1502, when the rendering mode A is not set (S1502: No), it is determined whether the rendering mode C is set (S1505). When the effect mode C is set (S1505: Yes), if the result of the determination is a hit, the third symbol display device 81 is a display for showing a notice of super fish school in which a group of fish flows from right to left A notice command is set (S1507).

  On the other hand, if the rendering mode C is not set in the process of S1505 (S1505: No), or if the result of the determination in S1506 is not a win (S1506: No), this process ends.

  As described above, it is possible to switch and configure the display advance notice command to be set based on the set effect mode. In addition, since the advance notice effect is also determined based on the value of the effect counter 223g at the start of fluctuation, as a result of the judgment, there is no need to perform processing for determining the display start timing etc. and reducing control load be able to. Further, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the advance notice is displayed is determined in advance by the variation pattern, and the display advance notice command indicating the timing is set, whereby the display control device 114 displays the advance notice at that timing. Set to be

  Here, the explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. After the advance notice selection process (FIG. 72, S1404) is executed, the process ends and returns to the main process. If it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1405). When the stop type command is received (S1405: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1406), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1407). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a variable display setting process (see FIG. 74) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1405: No), it is next determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1408). Then, when the ball holding ball number command is received (S1408: Yes), each holding ball number is extracted from the received command, and the corresponding special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b, special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c The number of holding balls is set to each (S1409).

  Here, the holding ball number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (start winning) or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Therefore, every time a start winning is detected, or each time a lottery for a special symbol is performed, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 by the processing of S1407. Can be adjusted to the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e of the main control unit 110, respectively. Therefore, due to the influence of noise etc., the values of special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of voice lamp control device 113 are special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of main controller 110, special symbol 2 Even if it deviates from the value of the reserve ball number counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserve ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 and the value of the special symbol 2 reserve ball number counter 223c at the time of detection of start winnings or lottery of special symbols. Can be corrected to match the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e of the main control unit 110. In addition, when the processing of S1407 is executed, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the values of the updated special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c is It is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number-of-held-balls number design according to the number of held balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the holding ball number command has not been received (S1408: No), it is next determined whether or not a special symbol winning command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1410). Then, when a winning command is received (S1410: Yes), a winning command reception process is executed (S1411). Thereafter, processing according to other commands is executed (S1419), and the processing returns to the main processing. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball reaches the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (start winning), the main controller 110 acquires the values of the counters C1 to C3 and The respective values of the acquired counters C1 to C3 are stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball number storage area 203b. Further, as soon as each value of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 is acquired in main controller 110, the inherent value of each counter C1 to C3 acquired separately from the big win lottery of the original special symbol The various information obtained when the lottery is performed is prefetched (predicted). Then, when the pre-reading ends in the main control device 110, a winning command including various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 73, a winning command reception process (S1411) which is a process in the command determination process (FIG. 71, S1312) will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a winning command reception process (S1411). In the winning command reception process, first, data is set in the winning information storage area corresponding to the received winning command (S1511), and the value of the effect counter 223g is acquired (S1512). Next, it is determined whether the eight effect flag 223i is on (S1513). If the eight effect flag 223i is on (S1514: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if the eight effect flag 223i is not on, the total number of reserved numbers of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c is 8 (that is, with the first special symbol) Whether or not the number of holding balls with the second special symbol is the maximum value) is determined (S1514).

  If the number of held pieces is eight (S1514: Yes), the eight effect drawing is performed based on the effect counter 223g to determine whether or not to perform the advance notice display mode to be executed for the eight holding balls ( S1519). Here, in the eight effect lottery, it is determined whether the value of the effect counter 223g (counter updated in the range of 0 to 198) acquired in the process of S1512 is any one of "0 to 49".

  When the result of the eight effect lottery executes eight effects (S1520: Yes), the eight effect flag 223i is turned on to set eight effects (S1522). On the other hand, when the result of eight effect lottery does not execute eight effects (S1520: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S1514, when the number of pending items is not eight (S1514: No), the normal pending presentation is selected based on the value of the obtained presentation counter 223g (S1515), and whether there is a change in the pending presentation It discriminates (S1516). Here, when the received winning command is a hit, if the value of the effect counter 223g is “0 to 99”, the normal holding effect (the display mode of the holding symbol corresponding to the received winning command is shown in FIG. 41 (a As shown in), PUSH is selected and changed to the symbol displayed), otherwise the normal hold effect is not selected (ie, no change in the hold effect (display mode of the hold symbol)).

  If there is a change in the hold effect (S1516: Yes), the corresponding hold effect flag 223h is set to ON (S1517), and the selected normal hold effect is set (S1518). On the other hand, when there is no change in the holding effect (S1516: No), this process is ended.

  Referring back to FIG. 71, the description will be continued. In the process of S1410, when it is determined that the special symbol winning command has not been received (S1410: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is executed. Then (S1419), the processing returns to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if it is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed control The command is set to be sent to the device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the holding effect to be displayed is set to be different depending on the difference in the number of holdings. When the number of held pieces reaches the maximum value, as shown in FIG. 42 (a), an effect mode different from the normal held effect (see FIG. 41 (a)) is displayed, so the player tries to increase the number of held pieces as much as possible. It is possible to play the game with motivation.

  Moreover, although it mentions later, it is changed by operating the frame button 22 to the holding symbol which alert | reports the yes / no determination result corresponding to the changed holding symbol in a normal holding production. Specifically, it is variably displayed by pressing the frame button 22 on the symbol pattern of the star when the result of the pass / fail judgment is a hit, and the symbol pattern of the triangle if the variation pattern to be selected is a super reach. Ru. In addition, in the eight effect, the notification mode is determined based on the result of determination of acceptance or rejection for one of the eight reserved symbols being displayed or the type of the variation pattern. For example, as a notification mode based on which the jackpot that is a big hit is stored, when the frame button 22 is pressed for each of the eight PUSH symbols to be changed and displayed, as shown in FIG. The letters "Big wins !!!!" are displayed on. FIG. 42 (b) shows a state in which up to two PUSH symbols are displayed variably.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that eight effects are to be executed for eight effects, an effect mode that is displayed according to the result of determination of the acceptance / rejection in the set pending storage and the selected variation pattern type. In the case where it is determined not to execute eight renditions by determining whether eight renditions are to be executed or not based on the fact that the number of held pieces is eight. The display of the reserved symbol display is variably displayed as shown in FIG. 42 (a). When the pending storage in which the success / failure determination result is a big hit is set in the pending storage, a notification mode (for example, "big hit !!!!") indicating the big hit is set. On the other hand, in the case where a hold indicating that the success or failure judgment result is a big hit is not stored, a notification mode (for example, "big hit determination ????") for expecting a big hit is set, and the frame button 22 is pressed. Before the holding ball is digested and a new holding ball is stored, it may be configured to change and set the notification mode set by the result of the judgment of the holding ball. In this case, if the newly established holding ball's success or failure judgment result is a big hit, it is configured to be newly set as a notification mode (for example, a big hit determination that suggests a big hit as a notification mode) It is also good. Thus, the player can enjoy the pleasure of determining the timing of pressing the frame button 22.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the variable display setting process (S1313) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process (S1313). This variation display setting process (S1313) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 70) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform variation effects, The display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. 74, S1313), first, it is judged whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1601). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S1601: No), since the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S1605. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S1601: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223e is turned off (S1602), and then fluctuation pattern selection processing is executed (S1603). The details of the variation pattern selection process (S1603) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 75, but the details of the variation pattern are determined according to the variation pattern command received from main controller 110 based on the current rendering mode. Processing is performed. With regard to the selection of the fluctuation pattern, rough contents such as fluctuation time and fluctuation type (reach, non reach etc.) are determined by the fluctuation pattern command from the main controller 110, and the effect mode set in the audio lamp control device 113 The content of the fluctuation mode (details of fluctuation pattern) to be actually displayed is determined by the value of the effect counter or the like.

  Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1604). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  Next, although not shown, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted. In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223f is shifted in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process moves to the processing of S1605.

  In the process of S1605, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223f provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1605). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is not on (that is, off) (S1605: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is on (S1605: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f is turned off (S1606), and the stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is Acquire (S1607). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1608), and the process shifts to the processing of S1609.

  In the process of S1609, a stop type command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1609). . The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled. After the process of S1609 is executed, this process ends.

  Next, referring to FIG. 75, variation pattern selection processing (S1603) which is one of the variation display setting processing (FIG. 74, S1313) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. Will be explained. FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection process (S1603).

  In the variation pattern selection process (S1603), first, the value of the effect counter 223g is acquired (S1611). It is determined whether the effect mode A (normal game period) is set in the effect mode storage area 223k (S1612). When it is determined that the effect mode A is set (S1612: Yes), the button effect selection processing is executed (S1613). Thereafter, this process ends. The details of the button effect selection process (S1613) will be described with reference to FIG. 75. However, a process of selecting a variation pattern dedicated to the normal game period is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1612 that the rendering mode A is not set (S1612: No), it is determined whether the rendering mode B (time rendering period) is set (S1614). If it is determined that the effect mode B is set (S1614: Yes), the change pattern is selected based on the value of the effect counter 223g and the content of the change pattern command from the change pattern selection table 222a of the corresponding time effect period. It selects and sets (S1615). Thereafter, this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1614, when it is determined that the rendering mode is not B, that is, it is the rendering mode C (time rendering extension period) (S1614: No), from the variation pattern selection table 222a of the corresponding time rendering extension period The variation pattern is selected and set based on the effect counter 223g and the content of the received variation pattern command (S1616). Thereafter, this process ends.

  As described above, since the dedicated variation pattern is selected based on the set effect mode, the contents of the effect to be displayed can be changed according to the period. Therefore, various effects of the game can be made, and the problem that the player gets bored with the game early can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 76, a button effect selection process (S1613) which is one process in the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 75, S1603) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. Will be explained. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the contents of the button effect selection process (S1613).

  In the button effect selection process (FIG. 76, S1613), first, the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the value of the effect counter 223g and the content of the received fluctuation pattern command from the corresponding fluctuation pattern selection table 222a dedicated to the normal game period It sets (S1621). It is determined whether the selected variation pattern is a button effect (variation pattern of composite display mode). If it is determined that the variation pattern of the composite display mode (see FIG. 43) (S1622: Yes), the stop symbol for the button effect is set as the reach stop symbol (S1623). Here, it is set so as to be a reach display mode in which the sub symbol is in the diagonal position. The button effect flag 223r is set to on (S1624). Thereafter, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1622 that the selected fluctuation pattern is not the fluctuation pattern of the combined display mode (S1622: No), this process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 77, a synchronization effect management process (S1314) which is one process in the main process (FIG. 70) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the synchronization effect management process (S1314). In this synchronization effect management process (S1314), time information is acquired from the RTC 292, and based on the time information, it is determined whether it is a normal game period, a time effect period, or a time effect extension period, and an effect indicating it Execute the process to set the mode.

  In the synchronization effect management process (FIG. 77, S1314), first, time information of "hour, minute" is acquired from the RTC 292 (S1701). It is determined whether the effect mode A (normal game period) is set in the effect mode storage area 223k (S1702). If it is determined that the effect mode A is set (S1702: Yes), it is determined whether the time data acquired in the process of S1701 is within the time effect period (S1703). When it is determined that it is within the time effect period, that is, when it is determined that it is the start timing of time effect (S1703: Yes), the start period flag 223o is set to ON (S1704). The effect mode B (time effect period) is set in the effect mode storage area 223k (S1705), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1703 that it is not a time presentation period, this process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1702 that the effect mode A is not set (S1702: No), it is determined whether the effect mode B (time effect period) is set (S1706). If it is determined that the effect mode B is set (S1706: Yes), the time data acquired in the process of S1701 is 3 seconds before the end of the time effect, that is, 3 of the end timing of the time effect period It is determined whether it is seconds ago (S1707). By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a prognostic effect of whether or not to execute an extension effect for 3 seconds.

  When it is determined that it is the end timing of the time effect period (S1707: Yes), the extension effect setting process is executed (S1708). Thereafter, this process ends. The extension effect setting process (S1708) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 78. However, the process of determining whether or not to set the time effect extension period is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect mode is not B, that is, if the effect mode C (time effect extension period) is determined (S1706: No), it is outside the time effect extension period, that is, the end timing of the time effect extension period It is determined whether or not (S1709). When it is determined that it is the end timing of the time rendering extension period (S1709: Yes), the rendering mode is set to A (S1710). Thereafter, this process ends.

  Next, referring to FIG. 78, an extension effect setting process (S1708), which is one process in the synchronization effect management process (S13 14 in FIG. 77) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. Explain. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the contents of the extension effect setting process (S1708).

  In the extension effect setting process (FIG. 78, S1708), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot game is in progress (S1721). When it is determined that the jackpot game is being played (S1721: Yes), the normal period flag 223m is set to ON (S1722), and the effect mode A (normal game period) is set (S1723). Thereafter, this process ends.

  As described above, when the jackpot game is in progress, the extension effect can not be executed, so by executing the process for setting the normal game period, the background image of the normal game period is set after the jackpot game. Can be controlled to

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1721 that the jackpot game is not in progress (S1721: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the time effect period (S1724). When it is determined that it is the end timing of the time effect period (S1724: Yes), it is determined whether re-change effect is set in the process of S1728 described later, that is, it is determined that extension effect is set. (S1725). When the extension effect is determined (S1725: Yes), the extension effect flag 223p is set to ON (S1725). The effect mode is set to C (S1727). Thereafter, this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1725 that the extension effect is not determined (S1725: No), the process proceeds to S1722. If it is determined in the process of S1724 that it is not the end timing of the time effect (S1724: No), the winning information storage area 223a stores the winning information to be a hit, or the variation judgment is a hit or not It is determined whether there is any (S1728). If the winning information to be the winning is stored, or if the variation judgment is the winning (S1728: Yes), the time until the variation to be winning ends is calculated and set as the extension effect time To do (S1729). The re-variation presentation is set (S1730). Here, as the re-variation effect, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), a display mode in which the display mode of the school of fish appears from the right is set. After the process of S1730 ends, this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the pending number display update process (S1306) which is one process of the main process (see FIG. 70) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment is described. Do. FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing the contents of the pending number display update process (S1306).

  In the number-of-helds display update process (FIG. 79, S1306), first, it is determined whether it is necessary to change the display of the held symbols (S1801). This determination is made based on the hold command acquired from the main control device 110. A hold command for display indicating the hold symbol display after the change is set (S1802). Thereafter, this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1801 that there is no change in the pending display (S1801: No), this process is ended.

  Next, referring to FIG. 80, the frame button input monitoring and effect process (S1307) which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. Will be explained. FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S1307).

  In the frame button input monitoring / rendering process (S1307 in FIG. 80), first, it is determined whether a valid period determined to be valid when the frame button 22 is pressed is set (S1811). If it is determined that the period is a valid period (S 1811: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S 1812). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1812: Yes), it is determined whether the eight effect flag 223i is set to ON (S1813). When it is determined that the eight effect flag 223i is on (S1813: Yes), the corresponding eight pending effect flag 223i is set to be off (S1814). In addition, eight effect flags are comprised so that a flag may be set with respect to each holding ball | bowl, The flag corresponding to the holding symbol displayed changing to notification holding symbol is set ON. Moreover, based on operation of the frame button 22, the notification holding symbol is set to OFF (when being displayed in a variable manner in the notification mode (in the present embodiment, character display)).

  After the processing of S1814, of the holding symbols for which eight effect flags 223i are set to ON, the notification mode of eight effects is set for the notification holding symbol whose change start order is the earliest (S1815) . Thereafter, this process ends. Note that this notification mode is preset when eight effects are set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is out of the effective period (S 1811: No), or when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed in the process of S 1812 (S 1812: No), this process ends. Do.

  When it is determined in the process of S1813 that the eight effect flag 223i is off (S1813: No), it is determined whether the hold effect flag 223h is on (S1816). When it is determined that the hold effect flag 223h is on (S1816: Yes), the corresponding hold effect flag 223h is set to be off (S1817). The corresponding normal holding effect of holding is executed (S1816). On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1816 that the hold effect flag 223h is off (S1816: No), since the variation pattern of the composite display mode is being executed, the button effect execution process is executed ( S1819). Thereafter, this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 81, a button effect execution process which is one process in the frame button input monitoring and effect process (FIG. 80, S1307) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. (S1819) will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the contents of the button effect execution process (S1819). In the button effect execution process (S1819), control of the button effect in the variation pattern of the combined display mode shown in FIGS. 43 to 44 is executed.

  In the button effect execution process (FIG. 81, S1819), first, it is determined whether the button effect flag 223r is on (S1831). The button effect flag 223r is a flag indicating that the variation pattern for displaying the combined display mode shown in FIG. 44 (b) is selected. The fluctuation pattern of the synthetic display mode also includes a fake fluctuation pattern in which the synthetic display mode shown in FIG. 44B is not displayed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the button effect flag 223r is on (S1831: Yes), it is determined whether it is a timing after the composite display mode (see FIG. 44B) is displayed (S1832). If it is determined that it is the timing after the composite display mode is displayed (S 1832: Yes), a display command indicating the composite display mode corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern is set (S 1843). Thereafter, this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1831 that the button effect flag 223r is off (S1831: No), the timing at which the informing symbol is variably displayed before the composite display mode is displayed (FIG. 43 (b) (See S1835). If it is determined that it is the timing before composite display (S1835: Yes), the button effect counter is incremented by 1 (S1836). Based on the selected fluctuation pattern and the value of the button effect counter, a display command indicating a pre-combination effect mode (informing mode) is set (S1837). Thereafter, this process ends. Here, characters such as "chance" and characters are displayed, and the player is notified of the result of the pass / fail judgment.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1835 that the pressing timing before the composite display mode is displayed, this process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, although a plurality of button effects are set, they are used selectively by determining each flag. By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure without increasing the number of frame buttons 22, and it is possible to configure inexpensively and easily.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 82, background image setting processing (S1311) which is one of the main processing (see FIG. 70) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. . FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the contents of this background image setting process (S1311).

  In the background image setting process (FIG. 82, S1311), first, it is determined whether the extension effect flag 223p is on (S1901). When the extension effect flag 223p is on, that is, when it is the start timing of the extension effect (S1901: Yes), the extension effect flag 223p is set to be off (S1902). A display background image command corresponding to the time rendering extension period is set (S1903). In the present embodiment, a background image in which the color of the background image in the time presentation period is changed to gold is set. This background image is a background image for notifying the player of a hit, since the time effect period is extended, that is, it is determined that the fluctuation to be a hit is started. Thereafter, this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1901 that the extension effect flag 223p is off (S1901: No), it is determined whether the start period flag 223o is on (S1904). If it is determined that the start period flag is on (S1904: Yes), the start period flag 223o is set off (S1905), and a display background change command corresponding to the time presentation period is set (S1906) . As described above, when the start period flag 223o is on, since it is the start timing of the time effect period, a background image dedicated to the time effect period (see FIG. 46A) is set. Thus, the background image can be changed in accordance with the start timing, so that the background image can be changed in synchronization with the other pachinko machine 10 of the same model.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1904 that the start period flag 223o is off (S1904: No), it is determined whether the normal period flag 223m is on (S1907). If it is determined that the normal period flag 223m is on (S1907: Yes), the normal period flag 223m is set off (S1908), and a display background command corresponding to the normal period is set (S1909). Thereafter, this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal period flag 223m is off (S1907: No), the present process ends.

Regarding Control Processing in Display Control Device 114
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 97. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing at power on.

  Specifically, the start of the main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is supplied from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to the hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction to start main processing.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 are temporarily stored in the NAND flash memory 234a after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 states that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, data of one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read out from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after specifying the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM can be operated at high speed by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs as in the present embodiment. Since it is a memory that can read out data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 immediately enters the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2001), and the display control device 114 is made to be able to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Launch

  Here, the boot process (S2001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S2001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine, and are stored in the third symbol display device 81. A character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program can be sufficiently stored, while the control is performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is slow especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a as the MPU 231. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. A process of transferring to and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the above-mentioned MPU 231 and character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c. The control program stored in the two program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount (S2101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2102). Thus, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S2102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2102, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. Among the control programs, the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2103). Specifically, the control program and part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored as data tables. It transfers to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after performing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S2001 in FIG. 83). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 83) (S2105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and this boot process is finished.

  As described above, when the boot process (S2001) is executed, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-described second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use it to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are released after the system reset is released from the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed to perform various controls. It is possible to maintain high processing performance, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition using the auxiliary effect part.

  On the other hand, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first are stored by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are NAND flash memory 234 a. Even in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 84, the control program of the predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, but not necessarily limited thereto, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S2102. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is used as an instruction pointer The process set in 231 a may be executed. Then, the processing of S2103 to S2105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the program storage area 233a A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is S2101. The processing of S2103 to S2105 may be executed after the processing is repeated a plurality of times including the processing of S2102.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 can not be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by using the boot program.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described where in the first program storage area 234d1 a part of the boot program to be executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored among the boot programs. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2103 to S2105 without performing the processes of S2101 and S2102. As a result, since the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a is unnecessary, the number of transfer processes of the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary rendering unit in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is finished, next, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as an initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image is drawn to the image controller 237 so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire third display screen 81. And instructs to execute display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color over the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 checks whether the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. Whether or not activation can be started normally can be determined easily and immediately.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a at power on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2003). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination When the power is turned on, the image controller 237 receives image data corresponding to the main image from the character ROM 234 when the power for the resident video RAM 235 is turned on. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. When all transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided in the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out information of a partial area of this register or built-in memory as needed, and detects writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

  At power-on, the image data transferred to the main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off. When transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2003, next, the power on change image is generated. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller follows the transfer instruction to transmit the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Then, the image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2004, the simple image display flag 233c is then performed. (S2005). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 95A) described later. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 is executed so as to transfer (see S3402 in FIG. 95A).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is a transfer instruction from the character ROM 234 of the resident video RAM 235 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It will remain on until it is finished. Thus, during this time, a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on) shown in FIG. 47 is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 85 (b)). A determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 85B) and a simplified display setting process (see S2309 in FIG. 85B) are performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is third By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed, without fear that the operation has stopped.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. This can be confirmed immediately, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  The display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 also transfers the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 along with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol Since the player starts playing the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) to the first winning opening 64, and the start instruction of the fluctuation effect is from the main control unit 110 by the voice lamp control device In the case of via the display 113, that is, when the display fluctuation pattern command is received, a power fluctuation image, not shown, may be displayed immediately during the fluctuation effect period to perform a simple fluctuation effect. it can. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Also, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, so it takes time to transfer the data, so that the time for which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on becomes longer after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S2005, the interrupt permission is set (S2006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 85 (a), the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 85 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2201), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 85 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 85 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list (see FIG. 57) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), it is first determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2301: No), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so it is not the power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the variation display data table corresponding to the demonstration display data table or the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed to execute the process. This is because command determination processing is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area within that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the aspect and the type of stop of the fluctuation effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 can be grasped quickly, and the effect image according to the aspect It is possible to control the drawing of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 86 to 91.

  In the display setting process (S2303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2302), etc., an image of one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 Concretely identify the contents of Further, according to the status of the process, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233 d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94.

  After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S2304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S2303) or the simple display setting processing (S2309) While specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be processed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2305). In this transfer setting process, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set the instructions. Also, while the simplified image display flag 233c is off, based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 for normal use. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 is notified of continuous notification even when a continuous notification command (not shown) is received from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the effect and the image data of the back image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is set. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S2306). In this drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing the respective sprites determined in the task process (S2304), and a transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2305) The drawing list shown in FIG. 57 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2107). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by processing of S2107, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol, for example. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the updating process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type table and the stop type counter corresponding to the stop type (large per cap A, large per cap B) indicated by the display stop type command are compared The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, the simple command determination process (S2308) is executed to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, and then the simple display setting process (S2309) is executed, and the process of S2304 is performed. Transition to

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 to 68, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2302) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

  In this command determination process (FIG. 86, S2302), first, as shown in FIG. 86, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2401). (S2401: No) ends the command determination process and returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S2303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2402). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S2403).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2404: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed. Then (S2405), the process returns to the process of S2401.

  Here, the details of the fluctuation pattern command processing (S2405) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87 (a) is a flowchart showing fluctuation pattern command processing. The variation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, the display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S2501). Here, the display data table buffer 233 d is configured to be able to set a plurality of display data tables, and it is possible to synchronize the set display data table and transfer and process a pointer. Therefore, even when different displays are performed corresponding to a plurality of background modes, it is possible to switch to a plurality of display contents by setting one of the plurality of display data table buffers as active and switching it.

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time is displayed in the display data table buffer. Set to 233d.

  Assuming that the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, the fluctuation effect having fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is the main control device When indicated by 110, while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying the fluctuation effect according to the set fluctuation display data table, the next display fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 As another variable display is suddenly started, the player may feel discomfort.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time to the display data table buffer 233 d as in the present embodiment, the fluctuation is actually longer than the display data table set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is ended, the main display device 110 for the next display Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can easily feel the third symbol display device 81 3 You can keep watching the pattern fluctuation.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is determined, and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502). It is determined whether it is a fluctuation pattern of the composite display mode (is it a fluctuation pattern of button effect) (S2503). If it is determined that the variation pattern of the combined display mode is determined (S2503: Yes), the reach symbol corresponding to the variation pattern of the combined display mode is set (S2504). Thereafter, the process of S2505 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2503 that the fluctuation pattern of the combined display mode is not (S2503: No), the process of S2505 is executed.

  Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table judgment flag corresponding to the set fluctuation display data table is turned on, and the other fluctuation display data tables are displayed. The corresponding data table determination flag is set to off (S2505). In the display setting process, the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d easily corresponds to which fluctuation pattern by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2506. It can be judged.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2506), and the pointer 233f is set to 0. It initializes (S2507). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S2508), the variation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2508, the pointer 233f is set from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. The drawing contents specified in the address shown are extracted, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, they are set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the processing of S2505. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the image storage area of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to 236a, and controls the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect defined in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the clock counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2507, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table is ended. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2406), If there is a display variation type command (S2406: Yes), a stop type command processing is executed (S2407), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S2407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command process. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (large jack A, big jack B before) indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S2601), and the stop type table and V interrupt processing are performed. By comparing the value of the stop type counter updated every time (refer to FIG. 85 (b)) is executed, the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set. (S2602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is It is set to off (S2603). Thereafter, the process returns to the process of S2401 in FIG.

  Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation based on the data table The offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602 is described. In the above-described task processing (S2304), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2603 and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. And the address in which the image data corresponding to this specified 3rd design was stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235 d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Returning to FIG. 86, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2406 that there is no display stop type command (S2406: No), then it is determined whether there is a display advance display command among the unprocessed commands (S2408). If it is determined that the display advance command is received (S2408: Yes), the advance command process is executed (S2409).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 88, the details of the advance notice command processing (S2409) will be described. FIG. 88 is a flow chart showing the contents of this advance notice command processing (FIG. S2409).

  In the advance notice command process, first, the display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S2701). Here, the display data table buffer 233 d is configured to be able to set a plurality of display data tables, and it is possible to synchronize the set display data table and transfer and process a pointer. Therefore, even when different displays are performed corresponding to a plurality of background modes, it is possible to switch to a plurality of display contents by setting one of the plurality of display data table buffers as active and switching it.

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time is displayed in the display data table buffer. Set to 233d.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2702). Then, among the data table determination flags of the variable display data table corresponding to each notice pattern, the set data table determination flag is turned on, and the other data table determination flags are set to be off (S2703). In the display setting process, the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d easily corresponds to which fluctuation pattern by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2703. It can be judged.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2704), and the pointer 233f is set to 0. It initializes (S2705). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalization display flag are set to OFF (S2706), the advance notice command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Returning to FIG. 86, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2408 that there is no display advance command (S2408: No), it is determined whether there is a display hold command among the unprocessed commands. If it is determined that the display hold command is received (S2410: Yes), the hold command process is executed.

  Here, the hold command process (S2411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hold command process (S2411).

  In the hold command process (FIG. 89, S2411), first, it is determined whether the received command is a command indicating the number of hold (S2801). When it is determined that the command indicates the number of held pieces (S2801: Yes), the held number of held pieces indicated by the received held command for display and the held display data corresponding to the held symbol by the pattern (pattern, color, etc.) Is set (S2802). Thereafter, this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2801 that the received command is not a command indicating the number of pending (S2801: No), it is determined whether the received command is a command of normal holding effect (S2803). If it is determined that the command is a normal hold effect command (S2803: Yes), the corresponding hold symbol is changed to a normal hold effect symbol and set in the display data table (S2804). Thereafter, this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2803 that the received command is not a command indicating a normal hold effect (S2803: No), it is determined whether the received command is a command of eight effects (S2805). If it is determined that it is a command of eight effects (S2805: Yes), display data to be changed to a notice symbol of eight effects is set in the display data table (S2806), and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2805 that the command is not eight effects, setting of other hold display is executed (S2807). Thereafter, this process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 86, the description will be continued. In the process of S2410, when it is determined that the display hold command is not received (S2410: No), it is determined whether the display effect command is received (S2412). If it is determined that the display effect command has been received (S2412: Yes), effect command processing is executed (S2413).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 90, the details of the effect command processing (S2413) will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect command process (S2413).

  In the effect command processing (FIG. 90, S2413), first, it is determined whether a re-variance effect (see FIG. 47B) in the time effect extension period is set (S2901). Here, the re-variation effect is notified to the display control device 114 by a command when it is set in the process of S1730 of the extension effect setting process (S1708 in FIG. 78) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. When it is determined that the re-change effect is set (S2901: Yes), the display data table corresponding to the re-change effect is set in the display data table buffer (S2902). Thereafter, the process proceeds to the process of S2909.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2901 that the re-variation effect is not set (S2901: No), it is determined whether it is a pseudo extension effect (S2903). This pseudo-extension effect is a precursor effect that is displayed 3 seconds before the end of the time effect period, and the effect pattern is displayed with shaking (see FIG. 47A). If it is determined that the pseudo extension effect is set (S2903: Yes), the display data table corresponding to the pseudo extension effect is set in the display data table buffer (S2904). Thereafter, the process proceeds to the process of S2909.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2903 that the pseudo extension effect is not set (S2903: No), it is determined whether eight effects are set (S2905). If it is determined that eight effects are set (S2905: Yes), a display data table corresponding to eight effects is set in the display data table buffer (S2906). Thereafter, the process proceeds to the process of S2909.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2905 that eight effects are not set (S2905: No), it is determined whether a normal hold effect is set (S2907). If it is determined that the normal hold effect is set (S2907: Yes), the display data table corresponding to the normal hold effect is set in the display data table buffer (S2908). Thereafter, the process proceeds to the process of S2909. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2907 that the normal hold effect is not set (S2907: No), this process is ended.

  In the process of S2909, the transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is determined, and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2909). Then, among the data table determination flags of the display data table corresponding to each display pattern, the set data table determination flag is turned on, and the other data table determination flags are set off (S2910).

  Next, based on the display time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2911), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S2912). Thereafter, this process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 86, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2412 that there is no display effect command (S2412: No), it is determined whether a back image change command is received (S2414). If it is determined that the back image change command has been received (S2414: Yes), back image change command processing is executed (S2415).

  Here, the rear image change command processing (S2415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the contents of the rear image change command processing (S2415).

  In the rear surface image change command processing (FIG. 91, S2415), the rear surface image change flag is set to ON (S3001). The back image determination flag corresponding to the changed back image type indicated by the command is set to ON (S3002). Thereafter, this process ends.

  Here, returning to FIG. 86, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2414 that the rear image change command is not received (S2414: No), it is determined whether there is an error command (S2416). If it is determined that an error command has been received (S2416: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2417).

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S2417) will be described with reference to FIG. 91 (b). FIG. 91 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. The error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S3101). Then, among error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S3102). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3101, the type of the generated error is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S3102, and the error type is handled. The process is executed to display a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S3002, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, since the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2416 that there is no error command (S2416: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2419), and the process returns to S2401.

  In the process of S2401 executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is judged again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes ), The processing of S2402 to S2419 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2401 to S2419 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination End the process.

  In the simplified command determination process (S2308) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 85B), the same process as the command determination process is performed. However, in the simplified command determination process, from the unprocessed command stored in the command buffer area, a command necessary to display the power-on image (not shown), that is, a display variation pattern command and a display stop type command Is extracted and the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 87 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 87 (b)), which are processing corresponding to the respective commands, are executed. Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (refer to FIG. 87A) executed in this case, in the processing of S2301, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image upon power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image necessary for the setting are stored in the power-on main motion image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2302, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the process of clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2303) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 92, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3201), and if the new command flag is not on, ie, off (S3201: No), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process to be executed first, and the processes of S3202 to S3204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3205. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and the new command flag is set to off (S3202). The processing corresponding to the new command is executed by the processing of

  In the process of S3203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S3203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S3204).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for expanding the image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, with reference to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set Warning image data for displaying a warning image of an error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3301).

  In task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various required parameters.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3204), or when it is determined in the process of S3203 that the error occurrence flag is not on, ie, off (S3203: No), the process proceeds to S3205.

  At S3205, pointer update processing is executed (S3205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. In this pointer update process, transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233 f for specifying the address to be done.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233 f (S 3401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233 f is updated so that only one is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined at the address "0001H" and thereafter, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so each address Substantial data can be read out from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S3301, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information Is determined (S3402). As a result, if it is the End information (S3402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f is updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, beyond the address where the entity data is written.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3403). If it is a demonstration display data table (S3403: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S3404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S3405), and this processing ends And return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3303 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S3403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (S3403: S3406), this processing ends, and returns to the display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, when the display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, the variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address at which the End information is described Since the drawing contents of are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3302, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the end information (S3402: No), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 92, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3206). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents expanded in the process of S3206 together with the warning image etc. expanded earlier, and the display coordinates for each sprite Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S3207), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after subtraction is 0 or less (S3208). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3108: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S3208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to finish the variable display and to perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the finalized display flag is on or not. (S3209).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S3209: No), the finalized display is not yet performed, and the finalized display is displayed, so the finalized display data table is first displayed in the display data table buffer 233d The setting is made (S3210), and then the contents are cleared by writing the null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3211). Then, time data corresponding to the rendering time in the finalized display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3213). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S3214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S3215) Return to the V interrupt processing.

  Thereby, when the variation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As such, the drawing contents can be set. In addition, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the determined display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d to the determined display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 does not burden much. A variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  In addition, the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fluctuation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuation effect changes in accordance with the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago, and in the fluctuation display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table is The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is described until the predetermined time passes since it is started. In the task processing (S2304), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S3215, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3209, if the finalized display flag is not on but off (S3209: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S3216). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S3216: Yes), this means that the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less as the finalized display effect ends, so the demonstration display data table is displayed data table The contents are set in the buffer 233 d (S 3217), and then the null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233 e to clear the contents (S 3218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3220), and a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration effect is being performed in the on state is set on (S3221), this processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

  In the process of S3216, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3216: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the completion of the definite display effect, which means that the demonstration effect is ended, so the display setting process is ended as it is And return to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process performed in the next V interruption process. The demonstration effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the simplified display setting process (S2309) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interruption process (see FIG. 85B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on-time fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on time fluctuation image is over. A process of setting, in the display data table buffer 233d, a display data table which specifies that the image (not shown) of the image (not shown) is to be displayed in a stopped state is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 95 and FIG. 96, details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S2305) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 95A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3501: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S3502) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 95 (b).

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the process of S3501, that is, if it is off (S3501: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is a resident video from the character ROM 234 It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3503), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 95 (b), a resident image transfer setting process (S3502) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 95 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not transfer instruction of untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S3601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3501: Yes) Furthermore, it is determined whether the transfer process of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3602). In the process of S3602, after the transfer instruction of the image data is issued to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S3602 (S3602: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3602: Yes), the process proceeds to S3603. Also, as a result of the process of S3501, even when a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3601: No), the process proceeds to S3603.

  In the process of S3603, it is determined whether all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S3603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3603: No) A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3604), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

  As a result, transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the data described in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. In the transfer data information, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data for residence is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here) The start address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the process of S3603, if all resident target image data have been transferred (S3603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3605), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended. Accordingly, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 85B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 85B) and the simple display setting process (see S2309 in FIG. 85B). Since determination processing (see FIGS. 86 to 91) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 92 to 94) are performed, drawing of an image at normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 96) (see S3401: No in FIG. 95A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all residency to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image already transferred in the main process. Object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 is used. The image drawing process can be performed in Thus, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, image data for frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message in the resident video RAM 235, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made to reside immediately after the display is decided by the display etc., even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings The responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96, a normal image transfer setting process (S3503) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3503).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3205) of the display setting process (S2303) executed earlier is used. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3701). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S3702), and if it is transfer data information (S3702: Yes), character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information The start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of, and the start address of the transfer destination (video RAM for normal use 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3703, the transfer start flag is set in the work RAM 233. The transfer start flag indicates that there is image data to be transferred in the on state, and the process proceeds to step S3705.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data in the process of S3702 (S3702: No), the process of S3703 and S3704 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3705. In the process of S3705, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer instruction is newly set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of the image data is completed (S3705), and the transfer instruction is set. If it is (S3705: Yes), it is further determined based on the transfer instruction whether transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed (S3706).

  In the process of S3606, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, if it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S3606 (S3706: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this normal image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3706: Yes), the process proceeds to S3707. Also, as a result of the process of S3705, even when the transfer instruction of the image data is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3705: No), the process proceeds to S3707.

  In the process of S3707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S3707: Yes), since there is image data to be transferred, the transfer start flag Is turned off (S3708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3703 is set as the transfer object image data, and then the process proceeds to the process of S3709. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3707: No), this process ends.

  In the process of S3709, it is determined whether transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3709). The determination in the process of S3709 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite as the transfer target is the normal video If it is determined that the stored state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S3709 (S3709: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, so that the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3709 (S3709: No), a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3710). As a result, transfer data information of transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, it is possible to transfer the image data of the transfer target image from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, transfer) The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3610, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3711), and the normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233i sets the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process previously executed, and as a result, the display stop type command is executed. If it is determined that the indicated stop type information is a stop type for a big hit, it is possible to transfer the image data used in the fanfare effect from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used for the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233 d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. At the same time, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to send the image controller 237 the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233 f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233 e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. Can.

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, whereby the predetermined is performed according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 97, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2306) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) From the color information, the filter specification information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 57 is generated (S3801). That is, in the process of S3701, based on the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2304), the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite. Then, with respect to the specified storage RAM type and address, the necessary parameters for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites to be placed on the front side from the sprites to be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, and then details for each sprite in the sprite order after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as proper drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , The final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233 j are transmitted to the image controller (S 3802). Here, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 1 including the information for expanding the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236 b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing development of the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236 c as drawing object buffer information.

  The image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands it by overwriting in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and drawing of an image according to the drawing list is performed.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from the frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing object buffer information, and the image information together with the drive signal is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously processed in parallel. Can.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3702, the drawing object buffer flag 233j is updated (S3703). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The update of the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is performed by inverting the value, that is, setting “1” when the value is “0”, and setting “0” when the value is “1”. To be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed. Every time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 85B) is performed, it is performed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. The second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of a minute is read. Accordingly, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately specifying, it is possible to perform display processing of an image of one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing of an image of one frame.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 and the display control apparatus 114 are provided separately, you may integrate each apparatus 113,114 instead, and may provide them as one apparatus.

  In the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113, and when the command is received by the audio lamp control unit 113, it is transmitted to the display control unit 114 in the audio lamp control unit 113. The command to be determined is determined, and thereafter, the command is configured to be transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, when the command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the display control unit 114 and the command is received by the display control unit 114, the display control unit 114 determines the command to be transmitted to the audio lamp control unit 113. After that, the display control device 114 may transmit the command to the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, in this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether the resident video RAM 235 for transfer destination or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 for transfer destination or the normal video RAM 236.

  In this case, it is determined that the image controller 237 accesses the resident video RAM 235 (that is, it is in use) to determine whether the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing (that is, using) the normal video RAM 236. ) May be provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

  Alternatively, the MPU 231 monitors a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235, or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 by the MPU 231, It may be checked whether the video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts access to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 or ends the access, the MPU 231 notifies the MPU 231 of the information from the image controller 237 as needed. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the drive state of the image controller 237 or a notification from the image controller 237 whether the scan is in a blank period or not. If the scan state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each video RAM 235, 236 is not in use. Thus, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not the third symbol display device 81 is not in use, so that the determination can be easily performed.

  Also, in this case, the MPU 231 transfers data that is not Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. When the information exists, the process of reading out the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be started according to the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since a predetermined address is defined, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to a display data table or the like by transferring image data according to transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, drawing of the sprite is performed. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for the above can always be stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  The process of reading out image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in a display main process or a loop of the main process executed by the MPU 231. As a result, in the MPU 231, transfer processing of image data can be executed using time when important processing in the display control apparatus 114 such as command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing is not performed. In addition, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are processes that are executed prior to the display main process and the like, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interrupt process or the V interrupt process. Transfer processing can be performed.

  In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage the video RAMs using the addresses held by the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236, but is commonly used by the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236. In the address system, a different address area may be allocated to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly designate the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or regular video RAM 236) to be accessed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, but merely designates the address, and The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or for the regular video RAM 236. That is, when designating the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply designated. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the instruction for performing the specification. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as an information indicating the storage destination of the data of the sprite, without using the storage RAM type, simply using the address set in the common address system. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the construction of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) connected to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. It may be connected directly to 237. In addition, a bridge circuit is provided to convert the input / output specification of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specification of the mask ROM, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 It is also good.

  By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the premise of using a general mask ROM as the character ROM is used as it is, and the NAND flash memory 234a is used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be configured to be able to directly access the character ROM 234.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and is configured by a large capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage unit, for example, a hard disk It may be done. Although such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 causes the image to be displayed without any problem at the time when it is desired to display by using the configuration described in the above embodiment. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, the character ROM 234 is provided with the NOR type ROM 234d, and the MPU 231 stores a part of the boot program to be executed first after releasing the system reset in the first program storage area 234d1. The first program storage area is provided in a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium that can perform read operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the MPU 231 first cancels the system reset in that area. A part of the boot program to be executed may be stored. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234 d, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM) or the like is provided in the character ROM 234 and a first program storage area is provided thereon. It may store part of the boot program to be executed first.

  In the above embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program to be executed first in the area after releasing the system reset in the MPU 231 Is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the internal bus (bus line 240) is a memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium that can be read faster than the NAND flash memory 234a. The first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program to be executed first after the system reset release in the MPU 231 may be stored in the memory. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234 d, an FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM) or the like may be provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area may be provided thereon. A part of the boot program to be executed first after system reset release may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, when it is detected in the ROM controller 234b that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is supplied from the power supply 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then, When it is detected that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated "0000H" in the ROM controller 234b, data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c, and the internal bus (bus line You may output to MPU231 via 240). In this case, when the MPU 231 designates the address "0000H" to the internal bus (bus line 240) after releasing the system reset, whether the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is already set in the buffer RAM 234c, Since the character ROM 234 is in the process of being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address "0000H" is designated by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the display main processing in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect part or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can.

  When ROM controller 234 b detects that the address designated by internal bus (bus line 240) designates a control program stored in first program storage area 234 d 1, first program storage area 234 d 1 is detected. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be directly read out from the memory and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", so that the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect part or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can. In this case, the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may not be set in the buffer RAM 234c. Thus, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  Although the case where the resident video RAM 235 is provided by connecting to the image controller 237 has been described in the above embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and an internal bus (bus It may be provided directly connected to the line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. When the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video is not necessary even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not directly connectable to the resident video RAM 235. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

  Although the above embodiment describes the case where the display control device 114 is provided with one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236, the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more may be provided. A video RAM may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, image data corresponding to images according to various modes may be made resident, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In the above embodiment, although the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by the DRAM of one port type (one input / output port) is described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. A type of RAM may be used. Thus, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed simultaneously. For example, while the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn, it is read from the character ROM 234 The process of writing the processed image data into the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The contents may be divided and the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in the respective areas. When a resident area and a normal area are configured by one RAM, the input / output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by read or write processing by one of the resident area and the normal area. It is desirable to use a multiport RAM.

  The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In this case, at least image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at least for residence in response to a received command received from the main control unit 110 or the audio lamp control unit 113 or other input from the outside. Preferably, it is resident in the video RAM 235.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is partially transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident is described, but all image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 You may In this case, since the image data stored in the nonresident character ROM 234 does not exist in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. May be

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The main controller 110 or the audio lamp controller 113 If the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is largely different based on the command received from the image, the image data to be made resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated based on a predetermined timing. Good. In this case, while the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period. Also, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is kept updated in the resident video RAM 235 without being updated even when the other resident images are updated. You may leave it. In addition, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out image data to be newly resident, and the read image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. It may be transferred while not in use (ie, during a period in which image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer instruction (transfer). Image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 according to data information), and transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use (ie, while image data corresponding to the transition image is not read) You may do it.

  When the resident video RAM 235 is updated, image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is transferred using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. 3 It may be displayed on the symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident and transfer the read out image data through the buffer RAM 237a. It is also good. Alternatively, the image controller 237, which has received an instruction to transfer image data to be resident from the MPU 231, accesses the character ROM 234, reads image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the content of the resident video RAM 235 while the transition image is displayed, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  In the above embodiment, after all image data to be resident is made resident in the resident video RAM 235, a RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal or not is stored when power failure is eliminated. Before the transfer of the main image data at power on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is started in the display main process or the main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control unit 114 after turning on, the RAM judgment value is confirmed, If the RAM determination value is a normal value, this means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be normally stored, and thus the image data transfer to the resident video RAM 235 is not performed. It may be configured to In this case, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be made non-execution by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even when the system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power failure and execution of the display main process or main process is started by the MPU 231, the data of the resident video RAM 235 is stored normally. In this case, it is possible to prevent the image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to shorten the time required for the power failure recovery. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, it is necessary to transfer the image data if the data of the resident video RAM 235 normally remains due to a momentary stop or the like. Since time can be shortened, a normal effect image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Alternatively, instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  In the above embodiment, although the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided in the image controller 237 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the buffer RAM 237a may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured alone and connected directly to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Furthermore, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the internal bus (bus line 240) with many data signal exchanges. Transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by

  In the above embodiment, the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a has been described as one block of the NAND flash memory 234a. However, the storage capacity is not necessarily limited to this and may be appropriately set. For example, in the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a buffer period (blank period) during scanning on the blank area which is a scanning area other than the display area where the actual image is displayed A data capacity sufficient to complete the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 may be used as the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a. Thereby, transfer from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 generated in this blank period. .

  Although the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided is described in the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the stored image data is transferred from the other buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. It may be configured. In addition, while an area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another image data is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Since processing can be performed, the time taken for the processing can be shortened.

  In the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after power-on. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. Thereby, using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on. can do. Since image data is not read out from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the use state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 after the power on of the power-on main image and the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image. Although the case of transferring to 235 b has been described, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power on. Thus, using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the third symbol display device 81 displays the image at power-on, while using the character ROM 234. The image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Since image data is not read out from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the use state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. Since image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while transferring image data corresponding to the image data, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. It may be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. In addition, image data corresponding to the main image at power on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power on, and power is turned on using the image data corresponding to the main image stored in the normal video RAM 236. When image data is not read out from the resident video RAM 235 while transferring image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the hour main image, etc., Image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. Thus, transfer of image data can be completed more quickly without intervention of the buffer RAM 237a.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 through the buffer RAM 237a, the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power activation fluctuation. Although the case of transferring to the image area 235 b has been described, while image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235. Directly transfer image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and power-on fluctuation image from character ROM 234 directly to the power-on main image area 235a and power-on fluctuation image area 235b of resident video RAM 235 without passing through buffer RAM 237a. It is also good. Also, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on, and the power-on main image and power stored in the normal video RAM 236 While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuation image, the resident video RAM 235 If the image data is not read out from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. Thus, transfer of image data can be completed more quickly without intervention of the buffer RAM 237a.

  In the above embodiment, when the player operates the frame button 22, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a back image change command and a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the back image change command and the frame button. Although the case where the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of the super reach are changed based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the contents of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, according to the change of the gaming state. A rear image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thereby, the display control device 114 can change the back image or the effect mode of the super reach according to the game state based on the back image change command or the game state command. In addition, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10, and change the back image or the effect mode of the super reach according to the gaming state. Then, image data corresponding to at least a partial range of the rear image after the change or the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the presentation mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 From the resident area, the back image can be displayed immediately using the image data resident in the back image area 235c.

  In addition, the display control device 114 may change the rear surface image in accordance with the specifications of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the back image after the change is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. You may Here, when the image data of the back image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original back image is stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new back image is stored in the sub area, or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original back image is stored The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined such that a new back image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, there is no need to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. An increase in load can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, and when the voice lamp control device 113 detects a vibration error, an error command is sent to the display control device 114. Although the case where the warning image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 The controller 110 may detect a vibration error, and the main controller 110 may transmit an error command notifying the error to either the voice lamp controller 113 or the display controller 114. Then, when an error command is sent to the audio lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, and sends an error command for further notifying the display control device 114 of the error. May be

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may be configured to detect the presence or absence of the vibration error. Then, when a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and further, the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, whereby the error occurrence flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 69). The warning image setting process (see FIG. 70 (a)) may be performed when it is determined to display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 immediately. In this case, since it becomes unnecessary to transmit and receive the error command from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

  Moreover, although the case where the vibration sensor was attached to the back surface of the game board 13 was described in the said embodiment, it replaces with the vibration sensor or with the vibration sensor, a magnet sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13 It is also good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to suppress that the flow of the ball is changed by the magnetic field such as a magnet and the ball is intentionally entered into the ball entrance. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, if the main controller 110 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is An error command to be transmitted may be sent from the main control unit 110 to the display control unit 114 via the audio lamp control unit 113 or directly. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field An error command that indicates an error may be transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Then, the image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 81 is resident in the error message pictorial area 235 f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113 The display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 when receiving an error command from the main control device 110 or the audio lamp control device 113 to transmit the magnetic field error. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, the display control device 114 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113. The warning image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error occurrence flag and setting the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on. Thereby, the display control device 114 receives the error command from the main control device 110 or the audio lamp control device 113, or recognizes the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor. Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 234a, using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235, an error message image for notifying a magnetic field error without delay is shown in FIG. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the third symbol display device 81, so that the player is not It can be suppressed.

  When the drawing content required to change the color tone of a part or all of one presentation is defined by the additional data table or the display data table, in the additional data table or the display data table, 1 in the third symbol display device 81 The type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed at that time corresponding to the address in which the time for which the image for the frame is displayed (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) is represented as one unit, and the change in the sprite It may define color information specifying a color tone. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452 d and the color tone after the change in the sprite. If color information to be displayed is specified, color information of the corresponding sprite type specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed. The drawing list may be created in place of the color information specified by the additional drawing content of the data table. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  In addition, when the drawing data necessary for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect is defined by the display data table, in the display data table, the image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 In correspondence with the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) for displaying is displayed as one unit, at that time, the type of sprite to be replaced, the type of sprite to be newly displayed, and the new It may define the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, the MPU 231 displays the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the address indicated by the pointer 233f. When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d, various sprites specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233 f Among them, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the type of sprite to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table includes the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing content defined in the display data table. It may include transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data which is required when drawing an image according to the additional drawing content defined in the display data table. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, etc.) for identifying effects that can be additionally displayed. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines an effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates the drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. You may configure it.

  Thus, the image controller 237 can transfer image data of a sprite used in drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, effects to be additionally displayed can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 easily and reliably. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing drawing of the image based on the additional drawing content. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing content. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that causes the player to select the super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table. Although the case of specifying only the drawing content corresponding to the super reach selected by the above has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table May be This makes it possible to easily identify the drawing content of the super reach selected by the player. Further, since it is not necessary to define drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress an increase in the data size of the display data table.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. The additional drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed may be defined in the additional data table. In this case, an additional data table buffer may be provided in the work RAM 233, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. . Further, the additional data table is defined not only for the additional drawing content but also including transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for drawing an image performed according to the additional drawing content. Good. This makes it possible to specify the rendering content of the effect to be additionally displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the rendering, so from the additional data table and the transfer data table for addition The processing load required for the specification can be reduced as compared with the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are specified.

  In the above embodiment, the display control device 114 has described the case of preparing the display data table for each fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A display data table is prepared for each element such as "fluctuation start", "high speed fluctuation", "notice effect", "normal reach", "super reach", and the display data table is prepared according to the fluctuation pattern indicated in the display fluctuation pattern command. After identifying the elements necessary for the fluctuation production, the display data tables corresponding to the sheets necessary for the fluctuation production specified are put together into one, and the final periodic display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is generated. You may do so. For "variation start", "high-speed fluctuation", "normal reach", etc., a display common to each fluctuation pattern is often performed. Therefore, the data table can be efficiently provided by elementizing the fluctuation effect in this way and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element.

  In the above embodiment, in the display data table and the transfer data table, the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are specified from the address indicated by the pointer 233f using the common pointer 233f has been described. Alternatively, a pointer may be prepared.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every display interval of an image of one frame for ending the drawing processing (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interruption signal to the MPU 231 every time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image of one frame. Since the driving of the third symbol display device 81 is always performed so that an image of one frame is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), a V interrupt signal is generated for each display of an image of one frame. By sending, it is possible to keep accurate without having to time its time interval.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer to which the drawn image is to be expanded based on the drawing object buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information expanded from the other frame buffer earlier. Has been described and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the image buffer 237 is a frame buffer to which the drawn image should be expanded each time the drawing list is received. May be alternately selected, and the previously developed image information may be read out from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Also, each time the image controller 237 transmits the image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 and the frame buffer to which the drawn image should be expanded. The frame buffer to be used may be switched.

  In the above embodiment, after the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main display unit 110 is notified via the audio lamp control device 113 until the finalized display effect is finished. When neither the fluctuation pattern command (display fluctuation pattern command) nor the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received, the case of setting the demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect to the display data table buffer 233 d Although this has been described, the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233 d again. Also, in this case, until the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113, the finalized display effect is Each time the process is ended, the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. Thus, the finalized display effect can be continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the variation pattern command or the demonstration command is received from the main control device 110.

  In the above embodiment, a case was described where the demonstration effect was to change the back image and to stop and display the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers from "0" to "9". The present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol including the main symbol with a number or the main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semitransparent state. In addition, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. In addition, a character or a back image that is completely different from the third pattern or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

  In the above embodiment, in the display control means 114, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image after power-on from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and power on. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b and displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81 at power-on after the transfer is completed, transferring the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display control means 114 first transfers only image data corresponding to the main image at power on after power on from the character ROM 234 to the power on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 at power on after power transfer is completed. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier after the power is turned on, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be checked in the operation check in the player, the person in charge of the hall, or the factory at the time of manufacture. It is possible to immediately confirm that the operation has started without any problems by turning on the power.

  In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor the completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b. Thereby, when the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b and the display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 after that, the display fluctuation pattern command is received. Based on the above, it is possible to display a simple variation display on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. It is desirable that the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b be performed immediately after displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81 at power-on. As a result, it is possible to more quickly perform the fluctuation display by the power-on fluctuation image.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table should be transferred to the contents of the image to be drawn at that time (drawing contents) or to that time, corresponding to the time that represents 20 milliseconds as one unit. Although the case of defining the information (transfer data information) of the image data has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the display content is defined at predetermined time intervals. The predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since an image of one frame is displayed every second, the display data table may define display contents every 1/30 seconds.

  Further, in the display data table, as a sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals, an address of the character ROM 234 where image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored instead of instructing the sprite type itself. May be defined. The display control device 114 reads the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. I manage the address of. Therefore, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval in the display data table, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. There is no need to manage both the information specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the stored image data determination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and for each sprite, whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored. Although the case has been described, in place of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, when instructing transfer of image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and the predetermined image data It may be determined whether or not it has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and if it is not stored, an instruction to transfer image data of that predetermined sprite type may be set. When the MPU 231 sets a transfer instruction of image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In the above embodiment, when transferring image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. In the normal video RAM 236, if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored, the case where the MPU 231 performs the process of disabling the transfer process has been described. The process may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data determination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and it is determined whether the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. It may be stored. Also, the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in a work RAM provided in the image controller 237. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in this case, the MPU 231 sends an image to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. Alternatively, transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  Although the above embodiment has described the case where only the image data corresponding to “rear surface A” among the plurality of rear surface images is made to reside in the rear surface image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessarily limited thereto. Image data corresponding to two or more back images may be made to reside in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the back image used in some super reach may be made to reside in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, transfer processing of image data from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed by making the back image of super reach expected to have a high or high frequency of occurrence resident in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. Can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the transfer instruction of the image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 transmits the transfer instruction at a predetermined time defined by the display pointer. Although the case of controlling the image controller 237 to transfer the image data instructed in step from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The display data is displayed at the top of the display data table. The MPU 231 describes information on the type of sprite required in the table, and the MPU 231 transfers the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. Controller 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the type of sprite to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of that image type is The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer data to the video RAM 236.

  In the above embodiment, in the back surface C that is the back image of the "island stage", the case where the color tone of a part of the image changes with time is described, but the color tone of the entire image changes with time Good. In addition, not only images that scroll with time or changes in color tone as back images, but instead of such back images, an object (for example, a person) that appears over time It may be moving or changing.

  In the above embodiment, information on the various counters (the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2) acquired at the start winning prize notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the main control unit 110 is the number of holding balls. Although the case where it is included in the command has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the information of the various counters (the first random number counter C1 and the first per type counter C2) acquired at the start winning combination is not limited to this. The control device 113 may be notified.

  In the above embodiment, the case of displaying a high-speed variation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player can not visually recognize is displayed when performing variation effects. Alternatively, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced in size so as not to be visually recognized, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow-noise-like images in which a large number of white points are displayed randomly.

  In the above embodiment, although the case where one first winning opening 64 is arranged on the game board 13 is started when the lottery of the big hit of the special symbol is started when the ball enters the ball, but it is not necessarily limited thereto. Instead of the above, a plurality of (for example, two) first ball entrances may be disposed on the game board 13 in which ball entry is independently detected and a jackpot lottery is started. In this case, the holding ball number command transmitted by the main control unit 110 to the sound lamp control unit 113 when there is a hold at each first entrance indicates which first entrance is the hold. Information may be included. In addition, even if the fluctuation pattern command that the main controller 110 transmits to the voice lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started, information indicating which of the first ball entry is the fluctuation effect reserved by the first ball entrance is included. Good. Thereby, in the voice lamp control device 113, a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first entrance, and when the reserved ball number command is received, the first ball entry indicated in the reserved ball number command If you set the number of holding balls in the number of holding balls counter for the mouth and receive the fluctuation pattern command, if you decrease the number of holding balls counter for the first entrance indicated in the fluctuation pattern command by 1, the first ball entrance The number of holding balls can be counted every time.

  In the above embodiment, each time the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control unit 110 (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the holding ball number command is Although the case of transmitting from the control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is increased in the main control device 110, the holding number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223 b by one when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. As a result, the number of times the main controller 110 transmits the number-of-holds command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the number-of-holds command can be reduced. The control load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the winnings to the first winning opening 64 and the passage of the through gate 67 are respectively held up to four times, but the maximum number of holding balls is not limited to four. The number of times may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). In addition, the number of balls in the variable display based on the winning on the first winning opening 64 differs by a number or in a part of the third symbol display device 81 by the number of balls. A light emitting member such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first symbol display device 37 so as to indicate the number of holding balls by means of the light emitting member. It may be configured.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbols as identification information are scrolled in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a design along a predetermined path such as direction or L-shape. In addition, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of symbols, and, for example, one or more characters may be displayed in various ways along with the symbols or in addition to the symbols, or may be displayed in various ways. It also includes the effect display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

Third Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 98 to 104, a pachinko machine 10 according to a third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, display control of the rotation operation unit 600 and the third symbol display device 81 described in the first embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 98 (a) is a schematic view showing a display mode when a main symbol is displayed on the spherical liquid crystal device 670 of the rotation operation unit 600. FIG. In the spherical liquid crystal device 670, a plurality of pixels each having a size of 1 mm is arranged to form a display area. The display area Pb of the spherical liquid crystal device 670 shown in FIG. 98 (a) and the display area Pa shown in the third symbol display device 81 are display areas having the same size.

  FIG. 98B is an enlarged view of the display area Pa and the display area Pb. The display area Pa is configured by 2 columns × 2 columns of 1.5 mm square pixels, and is configured by a total of 4 pixels. Further, the display area Pb is configured of 3 × 3 pixels of 1 mm square, and is configured of a total of 9 pixels. As described above, the third symbol display device 81 is configured by pixels of 1.5 times the size of the spherical liquid crystal device 670.

  The spherical liquid crystal device 670 has a display area arranged to overlap the front side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and is configured to be able to display mutually related display effects.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 98 to 102, an example of a display mode displayed in association with the third symbol display device 81 and the spherical liquid crystal device 670 will be described. FIG. 98 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the third symbol is displayed only with spherical liquid crystal and is scrolled while being enlarged from the upper right direction toward the lower right direction. When the main symbol is displayed up to the end of the display area of the spherical liquid crystal device 670, as shown in FIG. 99 (a), the third symbol moves to the boundary portion of the third symbol display device 81 with the spherical liquid crystal device 670. Is displayed. In this case, the third symbol display device 81 is set and displayed with the same display data as the main symbol display data displayed immediately before in the spherical liquid crystal device 670.

  With this configuration, the third symbol display device 81 has a pixel size 1.5 times that of the spherical liquid crystal device 670, so the third symbol size is 1.5 times the size It will be displayed. As a result, the ball liquid crystal device 670 can be displayed to the third symbol display device 81 so as to be gradually enlarged and scroll-displayed to the player. Thereby, the process which expands and sets the main symbol can be reduced, and the control load of the display control apparatus 114 can be reduced.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99 (b), the third symbol is scrolled while being enlarged by 1.5 times. Further, even when scroll display is performed in the display area of the spherical liquid crystal device 670, the display is enlarged and displayed 1.5 times at a time, and is variably displayed. By configuring in this way, even if the display is performed without changing the enlargement setting from the spherical liquid crystal device 670 to the third symbol display device 81, the ratio of the enlargement display by the pixel and the change are not made, and the player feels strange. Problems can be suppressed.

  FIGS. 100 (a) to 100 (b) are diagrams showing a state in which enlarged scroll display is performed while being rotated in the display area of the spherical liquid crystal device 670. FIG. Also in this case, each time it is moved and displayed, it is enlarged 1.5 times and displayed. FIGS. 101 (a) to (b) and 102 (a) show a state in which the right side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is scrolled from right to left after being rotated and displayed by the spherical liquid crystal device 670. FIG. Here, each time it is moved and displayed, it is enlarged 1.5 times and displayed. As shown in FIG. 102 (b), a table showing the sizes of symbols actually displayed at the set enlargement ratio of the third symbol display device 81 (main liquid crystal) and the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub liquid crystal) It is.

  In the sub-liquid crystal, the actual size is different by 1.5 times between the design set at the enlargement ratio of c1 and the design set at the enlargement ratio of c1 on the main liquid crystal.

  In the present embodiment, when the scroll display is performed in the same display device, it is configured to be gradually enlarged and displayed at the same magnification, but the present invention is not limited thereto. It may be set to be close to 1.5 times (ratio of pixel size) at the boundary between the liquid crystal and the sub liquid crystal. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the discomfort and display the switching between the main liquid crystal and the sub liquid crystal. Alternatively, the scroll display may be performed while reducing from the main liquid crystal to the sub liquid crystal. In this case, as in the enlarged display, the reduction ratio may be gradually changed at the same reduction ratio or the same ratio, and may be configured to match the pixel reduction ratio at the switching timing. Moreover, in this embodiment, although the main symbol was demonstrated to the example, it may be not only it but another symbol, a character, a character, etc.

  The electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a block diagram of the display control device 114 in the third embodiment.

  In the third embodiment, a sub display data table buffer 233 m, a sub pointer 233 n, and a sub clock counter 233 i are added to the second embodiment. Here, the main liquid crystal 81 is configured similarly to the main liquid crystal so that different display modes can be displayed simultaneously with the main liquid crystal. Therefore, the detailed description is omitted because it is the same as the description already described in the second embodiment.

  Next, control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the third embodiment, only the command determination process is changed, and for the other processes, the same processes as those in the second embodiment are performed, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The command determination process (not shown) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the third embodiment is the variation pattern command process (FIG. 87, FIG. 87) in the command determination process (FIG. 86, S2302) in the second embodiment. The difference is that S2302) is changed to variation pattern command processing 2 (FIG. 104, S2450). The other configurations are the same, so the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 104, the variation pattern command processing 2 (S2450) in the third embodiment is the processing of S2519 to S2523 with respect to the variation pattern command processing (FIGS. 87 (a) and S2405) in the second embodiment. Has been added.

  If it is determined in the process of S2513 that the button effect is not set (S2513: No), it is determined whether or not the display effect using the sub liquid crystal (spherical liquid crystal device 670) is a fluctuation pattern to be set. If it is a fluctuation pattern in which the sub liquid crystal is not used, the process proceeds to the process of S2515.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2519 that there is an effect using the sub liquid crystal (S2519: Yes), a display data table for the sub liquid crystal is set (S2520). The sub data table determination flag corresponding to the set display data table for sub liquid crystal is set to on (S 2521). Based on the data table, time data is set to the sub clock counter (S2522). The subpointer is initialized and set (S 2523), and the process proceeds to the processing of S 2515.

  With this configuration, it is possible to display the display mode independently of the sub liquid crystal and the main liquid crystal. Thus, various display effects can be provided to the player.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 105 to 148, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, the second embodiment described above includes the configuration of the sorting unit 1064, the processing order of the balls winning in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and the display control of the third symbol display device 81. The other configuration is the same as that of the second embodiment. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In addition, if the difference with the second embodiment in the display control of the fourth embodiment is described in detail, the additional display effect and the special continuation effect, which will be described later, are added to the eight pending effects. The point of adding the effect using the frame button 22 is different from the point of being able to change the time effect period described later in the time effect.

  FIG. 105 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 105, below the variable display device unit 80 provided on the front surface of the game board 13, a distribution unit 1064 to which a ball can enter is disposed. The balls entering the sorting unit 1064 are configured to be alternately distributed to a first winning opening 964a or a left second winning opening 964b described later.

  In addition, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment of the present invention, as a winning opening (so-called, second winning opening) where the lottery of the special symbol 2 is executed by winning, the second right winning opening 640 ( A second winning opening disposed on the lower right side of the game board 13 and a left second winning opening 964b (second winning opening disposed in the distribution unit 1064) are provided.

  Here, the configuration of distribution unit 1064 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 106A and 106B show the internal structure of the distribution unit 1064. In practice, a cover body formed of a transparent resin is disposed on the front side, and the cover body is colored in a spiral pattern on its surface so that the inside is difficult to visually recognize. Also, the sorting unit 1064 has a decorative LED (shown) attached, and emits light when the pachinko machine 10 is playing a big hit game or when playing a normal game, and the game board 13 is refreshed It is directing for. The light emitted when performing such an effect is reflected on the surface of the cover body, making it difficult to visually recognize the inside of the sorting unit 1064 while playing a game with the pachinko machine 10, and the game is played. In the absence state, the inside of the distribution unit 1064 is configured to be easily visible. By this configuration, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts using the principle of the ball distribution mechanism and to easily perform visual inspection of the inside of the distribution unit 1064 by the store clerk in a state where a game is not performed. ing.

  In the upper part of the sorting unit 1064, there is provided a passage opening through which game balls can enter, and a transmission type ball entry sensor 1064a is disposed which makes it possible to detect that the game ball has passed through the passage openings. . The balls having passed through the passage opening are alternately distributed by the distributing member 900 into a first winning hole 964a and a left second winning hole 964b disposed below the ball.

  The balls distributed by the distributing member 900 roll on the first guiding member 900z1 and the second guiding member 900z2 erected in the distributing unit 1064 and are guided to the respective winning openings. Thus, by providing the guiding members 900z1 and 900z2 between the distributing member 900 configured to be rotatable to the left and right and the winning openings 964a and 964b, the distributing member 900 to be pivoted is configured to receive each winning opening It becomes possible to prevent contact with 964a and 964b. Furthermore, the distribution member 900 can be miniaturized.

  Desirably, as the size of the distributing member 900, the accommodating portion 900a of the distributing member 900 is sized so as not to accommodate two balls (the length of the wall surface of the accommodating portion 900a is less than 5.5 mm). good. By this configuration, it is possible to prevent the plurality of balls stored in the storage portion 900 a from being balanced and inhibiting the rotation of the distribution member 900. Also, in order to prevent the one storage portion 900a from successively receiving a plurality of gaming balls, a loosely inclined portion may be provided which temporarily receives the ball entering the sorting unit 1064 and allows the gentle slope to flow down. By using such a configuration, a ball (balls connected in a row) continuously entering the distribution unit 1064 flows down the gently inclined portion, thereby generating a gap between the ball and the ball, It becomes possible to prevent that one accommodation part 900a receives a ball continuously.

  The distributing member 900 is attached to the base body provided on the back side of the distributing unit 1064 so as to be pivotable to the left and right via the pivot portion 900 d, and the housing ball 900 a of the distributing member 900 is loaded with gaming balls. Alternatively, it is configured to receive at 900c. The distributing member 900 is configured to be symmetrical about the pivotal support portion 900d, and is pivotally fixed so that the boundary wall between the accommodating portion 900a and the accommodating portion 900c is in a vertical state (directly above) by the weight of the distributing member 900. It is done. When the gaming ball is received by the housing portion 900a, the distribution member 900 rotates counterclockwise in a front view by the weight of the gaming ball and guides the gaming ball to the first winning opening 964a.

  In the distribution unit 1064, limiting members 900y1 and 900y2 are provided so as to be rotatable about 45 degrees around the rotation range of the distribution member 900 in the lateral direction. A magnet 900 b is provided at the boundary between the housing portion 900 a and the housing portion 900 b.

  A magnet (base-side magnet) 901 is disposed on the center line of the passage opening on the base body provided on the back side of the distribution unit 1064. The magnet 900 b of the distribution member 900 and the base-side magnet 901 are configured to be mutually repelled in polarity. In detail, the base-side magnet 901 is formed of a rod-like magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S-pole or N-pole) at its tip. The base-side magnet 901 is disposed and fixed so that its tip end faces the distribution member 900 side.

  The magnet 900 b is also formed of a rod-shaped magnet as the base-side magnet 901, and is fixed to the distribution member 900 so that the tip end faces the base-side magnet 901. When the distributing member 900 rotates and the boundary wall between the accommodating portion 900a and the accommodating portion 900c is right above, the base side magnet 901 and the magnet 900b of the distributing member 900 are closest to each other (the end portions face each other) It becomes a position. Here, since the magnets are arranged so as to have the same polarity, they repel each other, and do not stop at the position where the boundary wall of the distributing member 900 is directed straight up, to the position rotated left or right. It will be maintained.

  As a result, the distributing member 900 causes the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 to repel each other when the magnet 900b provided on the boundary wall is at a position on the center line of the passage opening (position directly above) by its own weight. By pivoting to the left or right of the distributing member 900, one of the accommodating portion 900a and the accommodating portion 900c is directed to the ball receiving side (the upper side of the gaming machine) entering the distributing unit 1064. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging due to the entering ball coming into contact with the boundary wall between the accommodation portion 900a and the accommodation portion 900c.

  In addition, the repelling of the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 causes the accommodating portion 900a to receive the gaming ball and rotate left by about 45 degrees to guide the gaming ball to the first winning opening 964a, for example. It can prevent that 900 rotates to the right (the accommodating part 900a faces upward). As a result, after guiding the gaming ball to the first winning opening 964a, the housing portion 900c is directed upward, and the ball that has entered the distribution unit 1064 next is received by the housing portion 900c, and the weight of the ball is received. Thus, the distributing member 900 is rotated about 90 degrees to the right to guide the gaming ball to the second winning opening 964b. In this manner, the distributing member 900 can alternately guide the balls entering the distributing unit 1064 to the first winning opening 964a and the left second winning opening 964b. Therefore, the game balls can be distributed equally to the first winning opening 964a and the left second winning opening 964b, and a lottery game caused by the ball entering the first winning opening 964a (described later) It becomes possible to efficiently execute the first lottery game) and the lottery game (second lottery game) caused by the ball entering the left second winning opening 964b.

  Next, the operation of the distributing member 900 when a ball enters the distributing unit 1064 will be described. FIG. 106 (a) shows a state in which the accommodating portion 900a of the distributing member 900 is positioned to face the passage opening of the distributing unit 1064 (on the upper side of the gaming machine). In this state, the magnet 900b is located on the right side of the base magnet 901, and a position where the rotational force of the distributing member 900 in the left direction by its own weight and the repulsive force between the magnet 900b and the base magnet 901 is balanced. It is maintaining. In this case, when the ball passes through the passage opening, the ball is accommodated in the accommodating portion 900a, and the distributing member 900 is rotated counterclockwise by its own weight to roll on the guiding portion 900z1 to the first winning opening 964a It is When a ball enters the first winning opening 964a, a winning ball (for example, three pieces) is paid out, and a first lottery game is executed.

  After the balls are distributed to the first winning opening 964a by the distribution member 900, as shown in FIG. 106 (b), the distribution member 900 is maintained at the position where the housing portion 900c faces upward. Thereafter, when the ball passes through the passage opening, the ball is accommodated in the accommodating portion 900c, and the gaming ball is distributed to the left second winning opening 964b. When a ball enters the left second winning opening 964b, a winning ball (for example, three pieces) is paid out, and a second lottery game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to distribute the first winning opening 964a and the left second winning opening 964b alternately.

  The configuration of the distribution member 900 is not limited to the above-described one. For example, the distribution member 900 may be rotated at a constant interval using an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid. When adopting such a configuration, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on with the position where the gaming ball can be guided to one of the winning openings (for example, the first winning opening 964a) as the origin position, the origin position is selected. It is preferable to return to the origin position when it is detected that the lottery game has not been performed for a long time. By doing this, it is possible to provide the player with a fair game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the distribution destination of the distribution member 900 is in the two directions of the first winning opening 964a and the left second winning opening 964b, but may be distributed in three directions or more. In such a case, it is preferable that the through gate 67 which is the cause of the second symbol (normal symbol) lottery and the general winning opening 63 which is the cause of the payout of the winning balls be provided at the distribution destination. By doing this, it becomes possible to consolidate the devices responsible for the game (lottery and winning balls) of the pachinko machine 10 in one place, and a large area that can be used for decoration and effect on the game board 13 is secured. It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of winning balls when entering the first winning opening 964a and the left second winning opening 964b may be the same, but may be different. Also, although the distribution member 900 is configured to distribute equally to each distribution destination, the distribution ratio may be changed.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment can store up to eight lottery games caused by entering the ball in the order of entering the ball (four first lottery games and four second lottery games). (Details will be described later). Therefore, as described above, the balls entering the distribution unit 1064 alternately enter the first winning opening 964a and the left second winning opening 964b, thereby evenly storing two lottery games. It is possible to prevent the situation where only one lottery game is stored and the maximum number of memories (eight) of the lottery game is not reached.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is configured to perform the second lottery game even when entering the right second winning hole 640. That is, during the normal game, a left-handed game (a game in which a ball is shot by aiming at the left side in the game area provided on the game board 13) is performed to aim the sorting unit 1064, and the first lottery game and the first lottery game (2) A game with a lottery game is received alternately and right turn game (a game in which a ball is aimed at the right side in the game area provided on the game board 13) By aiming at the right second winning opening 640, it is possible to play the game so as to always receive the provision of the second lottery game.

  Next, effect control displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 107 is a time chart for illustrating the effect control relating to the on-hold symbol effect described later. As shown in FIG. 107, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is controlled to perform a plurality of reserved symbol effects based on the increase and decrease of the number of balls held.

  Specifically, on condition that the number of holding balls is equal to or more than a predetermined number, a holding symbol effect different from that of normal (the holding effect performed when the number of holding balls is equal to or less than a predetermined number) is performed. Although the details of the reserved symbol effect will be described later, in this way, the player can see a special effect by performing a special effect when the number of balls held becomes a predetermined number or more. , The game continues to be played so that the number of holding balls is equal to or more than a predetermined number or the upper limit value.

  First, increase and decrease of the number of holding balls shown in FIG. 107 will be described. The number of holding balls is the number storing information related to the lottery game performed with the entry of the first winning opening 964a or the left second winning opening 964b, and in the present embodiment, the number of holding balls is The maximum is set to eight (four in the first lottery game and four in the second lottery game). Although the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is provided with two second winning openings as described above, in the present description, the game during the left strike is highly likely to have eight balls held. Description will be made using the state. Therefore, the description will be made using the left second winning opening 964b among the two second winning openings.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a fluctuation state (variation time) of a predetermined time is provided for identifiably displaying the result of the lottery game (big hit or removal). The attraction of the game is enhanced by providing the player with an effect suggesting the result of the lottery game using this fluctuation time (for example, dynamic display (variation display displayed on the third symbol display device 81)) . In addition, a plurality of fluctuation times described above are set according to the result of the lottery game, for example, 5 seconds when the result of the lottery game is out, 30 seconds in the case of reach out, and 60 seconds in the case of big hit ing. This is to ask the player whether or not the result of the lottery game currently being played is a big hit, and the longer the fluctuation time, the longer it is possible to perform the effect.

  The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is designed not to be able to play a plurality of lottery games at the same time, and while one lottery game is being performed, the first winning opening 964a or the left second winning opening 964b When a ball enters a ball, it has a function (hold function) to store a lottery game caused by the ball entering after the lottery game currently being played is finished. The number storing the lottery game is the number of holding balls.

  That is, the increase or decrease in the number of holding balls shown in FIG. 107 is the number of holding balls when the balls enter the first winning opening 964a, the left second winning opening 965b or the right second winning opening 640 during the lottery game. The number of holding balls decreases at the timing when the lottery game ends and the new lottery game is started, and the maximum number of holding balls is eight. The number of holding balls is displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 using the holding symbol (see FIG. 108 (b)), and the lottery result of the lottery game individually stored (consulting judgment result) A pending symbol effect (details will be described later) is performed to change the display mode of the pending symbol based on the information on the).

  Period A shown in FIG. 107 represents a period until the number of balls to be held reaches eight, and during this period, a normal holding effect is performed as an effect of the holding symbol. The normal holding effect is the same as the contents described in the second embodiment described above, and therefore the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, when the number of holding balls reaches eight, eight holding effects are performed (start of period B). The eight reserved effects are reserved symbol effects performed using the eight reserved symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds (see FIG. 110). Period B is a period from the start of eight holding effects to the end of eight holding effects (at the time when the last lottery game played among the holding balls used for eight holding effects is started) is there. That is, the period B is continued until the eighth lottery game is started after the number of holding balls reaches eight.

  When the number of holding balls increases in period B (a new lottery game is stored), an additional winning effect is performed. The additional prize effect is a pending symbol effect to be performed when a lottery game is newly stored (additional winning) when a pending symbol effect using a plurality of pending symbols such as eight pending effects is being performed. Unlike the normal holding effect, it is an effect of changing the holding symbol so that the holding symbol effect using a plurality of holding symbols is continuously performed (see FIG. 111 (b)). By performing this additional prize effect, the player can continue to play the game even while eight on-hold effects are being performed in order to experience the on-hold symbol effect different from normal. Therefore, the player's willingness to play the game can be increased, and the problem that the player gets bored with the game early can be reduced.

  Next, when the number of holding balls is 5 or more at the end of the period B, special continuation effect is performed using all the holding symbols displayed at that time (start of the period C). That is, the special continuation effect is a reserved symbol effect which is performed only when at least five or more lottery games are newly stored in the period B. In this special continuation effect, the starting condition is more difficult than the above-described eight pending effects, and the provided pending symbol effects are also valuable effects for the player. A valuable effect means, for example, that a premium effect which is displayed only in a small part of the result of the lottery game is displayed for sure, or the points the player has accumulated regardless of the result of the lottery game It is conceivable to display a large amount of information that can be provided. The period C is a period from when the special continuation effect is started to when the special continuation effect is ended (when the last lottery game to be performed among the holding balls used for the special continuation effect is started). Also during the period C, the additional prize effect is executed.

  When the period C in which the special continuation rendition is performed is ended, the period A starts again. Thus, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has a plurality of holding symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 on condition that the number of holding balls becomes a predetermined number (eight). Perform multiple hold symbol effects (8 hold effects) using. And when the number of held symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (five) at the time when the plurality of held symbol effects are finished, the plurality of held currently displayed at that time The second plural holding symbol effect (special continuation effect) is performed using the symbol. In addition, for the on-hold symbol newly generated while a plurality of on-hold symbol effects using a plurality of on-hold symbols are being performed, an additional winning effect different from the normal on-hold effect is performed.

  By this configuration, it is possible to urge the player to play a game so that the predetermined number or more of holding symbols are always displayed.

  Next, display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 108 to FIG. FIG. 108 (a) is a view schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, a reserved symbol (special figure 1 reserved symbol) corresponding to a prize in the first winning opening 964 and a reserved symbol (special figure 2 reserved symbol) corresponding to a prize in the left second prize opening 964b The winning combinations are displayed from the left of the screen and displayed (up to eight) in the sub display area Ds. Due to the structure of the distribution unit 1064 described above, the special figure 1 reserved symbol and the special figure 2 reserved symbol are alternately displayed in the left-handed state.

  In addition, although the special figure 1 reservation symbol and the special figure 2 reservation symbol are made into an unidentifiable display mode in this embodiment, it is good also as a display mode which can identify each. In addition, a reserved symbol may be separately displayed corresponding to the special symbol currently displayed on the main display area Dm at a predetermined position of the sub display area Ds. By configuring in this way, the player can grasp which of the special symbol 1 reserved symbol and the special symbol 2 reserved symbol the game using the reserved symbol is being performed (is it to be performed) This makes it possible to raise interest in the progress of the game. The other parts are the same as those of the second embodiment described above, and therefore the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 108 (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. In FIG. 108 (b), seven reserved symbols are displayed in the sub display area Ds. In the present embodiment, as described above, the retention storage of the special view 1 and the retention storage of the special view 2 are alternately stored, but they can not be identified by the display of the retention symbol. By displaying the holding symbol in this manner, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp whether the lottery game variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the special view 1 or based on the special view 2. The player can play the game while expecting what kind of benefit is provided when the jackpot becomes.

  In addition, you may distinguishably display the aspect of the holding symbol displayed by the holding storage of special drawing 1, and the holding storage of special drawing 2. FIG. Further, it may be identifiably displayed whether the lottery game currently fluctuating is based on the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make the player grasp the privilege in the case of a big hit in advance, and it is possible to give an expectation to the effects during the change.

  FIG. 109 is a view exemplifying a display screen showing a normal hold effect during period A of FIG. In FIG. 109 (a), the fourth holding symbol from the left is variably displayed as a “push” symbol (notice holding symbol), and the player presses (operates) the frame button 22 (FIG. 109). It is displayed variably to the "△" symbol shown in (b). The detailed contents are the same as those of the second embodiment described above and thus will not be described. In the present embodiment, the variable display content of the holding symbol (".DELTA." Symbol) is determined based on the result of the lottery game corresponding to the holding symbol that is variably displayed, but is not limited to this and is variably displayed. You may determine based on the result of the lottery game corresponding to the holding symbol currently displayed before and behind the holding symbol. When determining in this manner, the display content after the variable display may be a display content that allows the player to expect that there is a chance in the vicinity of the hold symbol that is variably displayed, as in the “arrow” symbol.

  In addition, it may be configured to be variably displayed again at a time after the variably displayed holding symbol. By doing in this way, even if the content of the variable display is a content that can not have a sense of expectation, there is a possibility that it will be changed to a content that can be variably displayed and have a sense of expectation. It is possible for the player to have an expectation until the is executed.

  FIG. 110 is a view exemplifying a display screen showing eight pending effects in period B of FIG. 107. FIG. 110 (a) shows a state in which eight holding symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 are changed to notification holding symbols, and the player presses the frame button 22 ( By performing the operation), the notification hold symbol displayed on the left side is changed in order (see FIG. 110 (b)). The detailed contents are the same as those of the second embodiment described above and thus will not be described. In this embodiment, the notification hold symbol is changed sequentially from the left each time the frame button 22 is pressed once, but when the frame button is pressed once, a plurality of notification hold symbols are variably displayed or variably displayed. The order may be set randomly. By doing this, it is possible to provide game characteristics to the player's operation (depression of the frame button 22) for changing the notification holding symbol.

  FIG. 111 is a diagram showing a display screen showing eight pending effects and additional effects during period B in FIG. 107. FIG. 111 (a) shows a state after all the notification suspension symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 are varied by the operation of the frame button 22. FIG. In the present embodiment, when a notification is made to confirm that there is a pending storage in which the success / failure determination result is a big hit among the eight pending storages, using "eight wins !!!!" It is set to be displayed, and the display of "big hit !!!?" Shown in the figure informs that there is a possibility that there is a pending storage in which the result of the pass / fail judgment will be a big hit among the eight pending storages. It is

  FIG. 111 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen showing a state in which three pending storages are digested and two pending storages are newly added from the state shown in FIG. 111 (a). As illustrated, in FIG. 111 (a), although "Hello! !!!?" Was displayed using eight holding symbols, since three holding memories were digested, it corresponds to digested holding memories. The holding symbol ("Don't hit") that was displayed has disappeared from the display screen. Moreover, the holding symbol displayed corresponding to the two holding | maintenance memory newly generate | occur | produced during this is displayed on two subdisplay area Ds as a notification holding symbol.

  As described above, with regard to the new holding memory generated while the holding symbol effect by the eight holding effects is being performed, the additional winnings that show that the eight holding effects are continuing rather than the normal holding symbol effect The presentation will be performed. Specifically, a notification hold symbol ("push" symbol) is displayed as a hold symbol corresponding to the new hold storage (see FIG. 111 (b)). As for the notification suspension symbol, the display mode of the suspension symbol is changed by the operation of the frame button 22 as in the case of the eight suspension effect described above. Specifically, for example, when there is a pending storage in which a yes / no determination result is a big hit in any of the two pending saved storages, the notification pending symbol corresponding to the pending storage is displayed in the frame button 22 When changing it by the operation, the last "?" Of the character string "see jack !!!?" (See FIG. 111 (a)) displayed in the eight-reserve effect is changed to "!" Change itself to "!" In addition, when the two newly stored pending is a failure of the success or failure judgment result, without changing the "big hit !!!?" Character string displayed in the pending eight production, notification hold symbol Changes to "?" By doing this, it is possible to associate the hold symbol corresponding to the new hold storage generated during the eight hold effects with the eight hold effects as well, and the player can hold the eight hold effects as well. In order to generate a holding ball, it is possible to continue the firing of the game ball and play the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the notification mode ("?" Or "!") Of the rightmost character (character corresponding to the reserved symbol to be digested last) among the character strings displayed by the eight reserved effects. Because it is configured to suggest the result of the determination of success or failure, even in the additional prize effect, the effect of changing one character using the holding symbol corresponding to one holding memory is performed, but in the hold 8 effect In the case of adopting a notification mode that suggests a yes / no determination result by using a plurality of characters, a plurality of characters may be changed using a holding symbol corresponding to one holding storage in the additional prize effect, or plural A plurality of characters may be changed using the holding symbol corresponding to the holding storage of.

  In the present embodiment, the display mode of the hold symbol is displayed by displaying the character string of eight characters by the hold eight effect, that is, variable display is performed to change the number of characters corresponding to the number of hold symbols. The present invention is not limited thereto, and a plurality of holding symbols may be combined by eight holding effects to be variably displayed so as to be one notification mode.

  In addition, in the eight reserved effects of the present embodiment, the notification mode indicating the result of the determination of the success or failure is displayed by the character corresponding to the reserved symbol to be digested last among the eight reserved symbols. Not all of the last saved symbols, but all of the characters on the right side of the character string displayed by the eight-hold effect (the characters corresponding to the last symbols saved in the second half among the eight reserved symbols) Alternatively, the notification mode may be displayed using any of them.

  FIG. 112 is a view exemplifying a display screen showing the special continuation effect in period C of FIG. FIG. 112 (a) shows a state in which the holding symbol corresponding to the last holding memory is digested among the eight holding memories used for the eight holding effect, that is, the third symbol display device 81 The five “?” Displayed in the sub display area Ds of are displayed by the additional winning effect described above. In this state, when there are five or more pending storages, "PLEASE PLEASE !!" is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device. When the player presses (operates) the frame button 22, the mode of the holding symbol displayed as "?????" changes again. Specifically, for example, when there is a determination result that the success or failure determination result is a big hit in any of the pending storage corresponding to the pending symbol displayed as “?????” in FIG. 112 (a) As shown in FIG. 112 (b), it is changed to five letters of "Congratulations". In this way, when the number of pending storage (the number of pending symbols displayed) at the end of the display of the pending symbol by eight pending effects is more than a predetermined number (five in this embodiment), it is more special. Since the reserved symbol effect is performed, it is possible to urge the player to continuously launch the game ball.

  In addition, in this embodiment, since special continuation presentation is performed using a plurality of suspension symbols displayed as "?" By additional prize production, for example, the character which shows that the big hit is decided by additional prize production is It is preferable to set a small ratio to be displayed, and set many characters to be displayed to indicate that the jackpot has been determined by the special continuation effect. By doing this, it is displayed that the determination result to be a big hit is included in the contingency determination results stored on hold in the special continuation effect performed after the additional winning effect (see FIG. 112 (b)). It is possible to increase the frequency with which the player can do so, and the player can be motivated to watch the special continuation effect.

  In addition, in the special continuation effect, in addition to the character string (message) based on the judgment result of the propriety judgment result stored on hold, information for acquiring a large amount of points stored by the player is displayed, or An effect of providing a privilege of displaying the gaming state (certain change or normal) of the player may be performed. By doing this, it is possible to urge the player to continuously launch the game ball in order to receive a benefit other than the result of the determination of success or failure.

  Note that at the timing when it is determined whether or not the special continuation effect is to be performed (the boundary between the period B and the period C in FIG. 107), the number of pending storages (five in this embodiment) serving as a condition for performing the special continuation effect In the case of being stored on hold, a highlighting character (“!”, “Holiday”, etc.) emphasizing the character string (“Congratulations”) changed by the special continuation effect, with the holding symbol corresponding to the surplus holding memory. Change to By doing this, it is possible to perform an effect without giving a sense of incongruity, without changing the display content displayed by the special continuation effect even if the number of surplus storages is indefinite.

  Moreover, when performing special continuation presentation, it may be made to be performed after changing temporarily the holding symbol currently displayed as "?????" to a notification holding symbol. By doing in this way, it can be emphasized that the special continuation effect is a pending symbol effect using a plurality of pending symbols.

  In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned additional winning presentation is performed even while the special continuation presentation is being performed, but the contents of the presentation are omitted because they are the same as the contents described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the normal holding symbol is changed to the notification holding symbol prompting the player to operate the frame button 22, and then the notification holding symbol is changed based on the frame button 22 operation. , Based on the result of the determination of the status contained in the eight pending storage, it is made to display the pending symbol (result display pending symbol) that makes one meaning by a plurality of pending symbols, but there is no limitation to this, for example The characters ("large", "I", "Ri", etc.) displayed by varying the notification holding symbol may be displayed in another part of the third symbol display device 81. By configuring in this manner, even if the hold symbol used for the eight hold effect is digested by the progress of the game, the character string displayed as a result of the eight hold effect can be maintained. In this case, the character string displayed in another place may be erased at a timing at which all the retention symbols used for the eight retention effects are digested.

  In addition, as the dynamic display of the third symbol, when an effect to be stopped temporarily during the fluctuation time and then restarted (so-called, a pseudo continuous effect or a development effect to super reach) is performed, It is good to change the hold symbol which has become a result display hold symbol by operation to a notification hold symbol, and to make eight hold effects again. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to perform the holding symbol effect corresponding to the dynamic display effect of the third symbol that shows one lottery game in a plurality of lottery games.

  As described above, when performing effects to re-execute the on-hold symbol effect interlockingly with the dynamic display of the third symbol, the display contents by the first result display on-hold symbol are included in the result of the pass / fail judgment included in eight on-hold memories. On the other hand, the expectation level of the jackpot is low, and the holding symbol display corresponding to the result of the judgment is performed in the eight holdings performed again, or the result display displayed in the eight holdings performed again in advance It is good to set the display content by a hold symbol to a thing with a higher degree of expectation than the display content by the first result display hold symbol. By doing in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation where the display content is changed to a display with a lower degree of expectation than the reserved symbol effect of the place as a result of reworking the reserved symbol effect.

  Also, eight reserved symbols may be used to display a character string that suggests that the third symbol such as "Keisuk !!!!" or "Motnight !!" is to be restarted. . By doing this, it becomes possible to notify the player of the game content other than the result of the determination of the qualification included in the eight pending storages using the pending symbol, and providing a gaming machine rich in gaming characteristics. It becomes possible.

  Furthermore, there is an effect that the third symbol currently displayed dynamically at that time is restarted, with the result of determination of success or failure included in the eight pending storages, the result of lottery of the third symbol dynamically displayed at that time, and Among the judgment results as to whether or not there is a “chance !!!!” or “chance” that the player may be given an advantageous state based on any one result or a combination of two or more results. It may be displayed as an abstract string such as "Marine chan!" By doing this, it is possible to provide a gaming machine rich in gaming characteristics.

  In the present embodiment, the condition for performing eight reserved effects is assumed to be the case where eight reserved memories are stored, but a predetermined number may be stored, or seven may be stored.

  Also, in this embodiment, the holding symbol is changed to the notification holding symbol as a notification for prompting the player to operate the frame button 22 while pointing to the holding symbol changing due to the holding symbol effect, but the display of the holding symbol Another display may be performed without changing the aspect.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the notification display symbol is always displayed in the same display mode ("push" symbol) regardless of the result of the determination of the on-off result stored, and the result display reservation symbol displayed by operating the frame button 22 The contents of the display mode ("big hit !!!!") of are changed based on the result of the pass / fail judgment stored on hold. As a result, the player can see the effect suggesting the result of the on-off judgment stored for the first time by operating the frame button 22. Therefore, the player can actively participate in the game. It is possible to prevent getting bored early. Note that a plurality of notification hold symbols may be provided on the basis of the hold determination result. By doing this, it becomes possible to easily provide multiple levels of expectation by combining the display mode of the notification suspension symbol and the display mode of the result display suspension symbol.

  Next, details of the composite display effect described above in the second embodiment will be described using FIGS. 113 to 117. FIG. In addition, description is abbreviate | omitted about the location which overlaps with 2nd Embodiment mentioned above. FIG. 113 is a time chart for illustrating the flow of combined display effect. A series of flows of the variable display in which the combined display effect is used will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses from the start of the variation of the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a frame button effect preparation period (for example, 10 seconds) starts, and the frame button The player is notified that the effect of operating 22 is started (see FIG. 114 (a)). Then, after the third symbol is in the reach display mode, the frame button operation effective period (for example, 10 seconds) is set, and a display for causing the player to operate the frame button 22 is performed, and the frame button 22 within the frame button operation effective period. Detects the situation where the key is pressed (operated) (see FIG. 114 (b)). When the frame button operation under the predetermined condition is performed within the frame button operation effective period after the frame button operation effective period has elapsed, the processing shifts to PUSH effect which is a combined display effect (see FIG. 115 (b)).

  On the other hand, when the frame button operation of the predetermined condition is not performed within the frame button operation effective period, the process shifts to a normal effect period in which normal super reach effect is performed (see FIG. 115 (c)). When the current change is a reach loss, the third symbol comes off and stops in a mode without being shifted to the combined display effect regardless of the contents of the frame button operation within the frame button operation effective period.

  The PUSH effect is divided into a first half part (period of FIG. 113 (d)) and a second half part (period of FIG. 113 (e)), and a game for collecting "push" symbols displayed on the display screen in the first half part Perform (Figure 116 (a)), display the "push" symbol synthesized and displayed corresponding to the "push" symbol collected in the second half part (Figure 116 (b)), and press the frame button 22 (operation) Change the "push" symbol into a number symbol by doing. After that, the combination of the number symbols displayed on the display screen is temporarily stopped, and the symbols are determined after a predetermined time has elapsed.

  As shown in FIG. 113, the combined display effect in the present embodiment has the same variation time as the other predetermined super reach effects. Furthermore, the image data from the start of the change of the third symbol to the development of super reach (image data used in the period of FIGS. 113 (a) and (b)) and the change of the third symbol from temporary stop to determination Image data (image data used in the period of FIG. 113 (f)) is configured so as to be able to divert image data of other predetermined super reach effects. By doing this, it is not necessary to prepare image data to be used from the start of fluctuation to symbol determination for each super reach effect, and it becomes possible to reduce the amount of image data. Moreover, it is comprised so that reach out production can also be performed using the image data used in the period of (a), (b), (f) shown in FIG.

  FIG. 114 (a) is a view exemplifying the display screen in the period of (a) shown in FIG. The main display screen is displayed during a frame button effect preparation period for notifying the player in advance that the effect of operating the frame button 22 is performed, and the player forgets to operate the frame button 22. Is a display to prevent

  FIG. 114 (b) is a view exemplifying the display screen of the period (b) shown in FIG. 113. This display screen is displayed during a frame button operation effective period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is effective, a display prompting to hit the frame button 22 continuously, a continuous hitting mission achievement condition "50" and the current A status display (“1/50”) indicating the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed “1” is displayed. In the present embodiment, the frame button 22 is kept pressed for a predetermined time to increase the number of pressing times. In addition, you may display the remaining time of a frame button operation effective period (continuous hitting mission period).

  FIG. 115 (a) is a view exemplifying a display screen of the period (c) shown in FIG. This display screen is a screen displayed during the normal effect period in which transition to a continuous hitting mission can not be achieved during the frame button operation effective period, and the contents thereof are shown in FIG. 43 (a) of the second embodiment described above. Since it is the same as in FIG.

  FIG. 115 (b) is a view exemplifying a display screen of the period (d) shown in FIG. About the display content of this display screen, since it is the same as FIG.43 (b) of 2nd Embodiment mentioned above, description is abbreviate | omitted. Although not shown, values (number of acquisitions, acquisition points, expected big hit) based on the "push" symbol acquired during this period (for example, 15 seconds) are displayed in a color or text in a predetermined area of the display screen .

  FIG. 116 (a) is a view exemplifying a display screen of the second half period of (d) shown in FIG. About the display content of this display screen, since it is the same as FIG. 44 (a) of 2nd Embodiment mentioned above, description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In addition, although six "push" symbols are stop-displayed in this figure, the number of "push" symbols to be stop-displayed is different because the stop mode of the symbol row is different. As described above, the number of "push" symbols displayed in the stop mode indicates the expectation of the jackpot in the variable display, and the larger the number of "push" symbols displayed in the stop display, the higher the expectation level of the jackpot. Is preset. That is, a plurality of fluctuation patterns for performing composite display effects in which the number of "push" symbols to be stopped is different is provided, and the "push" is displayed to be stopped rather than a fluctuation pattern in which the number of "push" symbols to be stopped is small. The variation pattern with a large number of symbols is set so that the percentage of success or failure judgment results being a big hit is larger.

  FIG. 116 (b) is a view exemplifying a display screen of the period (e) shown in FIG. 113. About the display content of this display screen, since it is the same as FIG. 44 (b) of 2nd Embodiment mentioned above, description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the blank symbol is changed to the “push” symbol, and the effect of combining and displaying the “push” symbol is performed. However, the blank symbol is changed to various characters and made to correspond to the characters You may comprise so that a sentence (message) may be synthetically displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to combine the characters displayed by the player at the timing when the blank symbol is changed to various characters, and to predict the sentences to be composite-displayed, in the later game. It is possible to give a sense of expectation. Moreover, when using such a configuration, it is preferable to combine and display sentences using a part of displayed characters, instead of combining and displaying all the displayed various characters. By doing this, it is possible to make the player predict sentences of various patterns. In addition, when the aspect (color, size, etc.) of the characters that are always used is made different from other characters in order to make it possible to identify the characters that are always used, the player can be displayed in a composite display. It is possible to give a hint of the text to be created, and it is possible to more enjoy predicting the text to be created in the composite display.

  FIG. 117 is a display screen of the period (f) shown in FIG. On the main display screen, when the player presses the frame button 22, the combined display symbol is stopped at the combination of the third symbol (main symbol) indicating the result of the pass / fail judgment. In this figure, the result of the judgment is stopped by the combination of "777" indicating that the jackpot is a big hit, and is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed. Incidentally, during the period of (f) shown in FIG. 113, it is displayed in the state of temporarily stopping at “777” (a slight shaking state), and completely stopped at the timing when the period of (f) shown in FIG. It will be in a state of

  As described above, in the present embodiment, as the fluctuation pattern having the same fluctuation time, the fluctuation pattern for performing the push effect and the fluctuation pattern for not performing the push effect (normal super reach fluctuation pattern) It is configured to set either the fluctuation pattern for performing the push effect or the fluctuation pattern for not performing the push effect, based on the result of determining the achievement condition of. That is, since the push effect is included as the fluctuation pattern, it is easy to easily replace the subsequent effects according to the result of the consecutive hitting mission. In addition, since the player who wants to experience the push effect needs to achieve the consecutive hitting mission, the player will actively participate in the game, and the motivation of the game can be enhanced.

  Next, details of the time presentation described above in the second embodiment will be described using FIGS. 118 to 121. FIG. In addition, description is abbreviate | omitted about the location which overlaps with 2nd Embodiment mentioned above. In addition, in this embodiment, it has a function which can set the period which performs time rendition. By providing this function, while performing conventional time rendition (synchronization rendition) which was performing rendition with a sense of unity by synchronizing renditions executed with a plurality of pachinko machines 10, time rendition intentionally ( The period in which the synchronization effect is performed is made different (extended), and it is possible to provide the player with an effect with unexpectedness.

  FIG. 118 is a time chart for illustrating the flow of time presentation. A series of flows relating to time presentation will be described with reference to FIG.

  In this embodiment, it has a function capable of setting a period for performing time effect (details will be described later), and in FIG. 118 (a), the first time effect is performed for 5 minutes after the power is turned on. In FIG. 118 (b), the first time effect is set to be performed for 8 minutes after the power is turned on. Further, the eight-minute time rendition shown in FIG. 118 (b) is divided into the first five minutes and the remaining three minutes, and the first five minutes is set as the rendition mode B which is a time rendition period, and the remaining five minutes are set. Three minutes is set as the effect mode D which is a special time effect period. By setting in this way, during the first 5 minutes in which time effect is performed, effects are performed as the same time effect period (effect mode B) in the case where the time effect period is 5 minutes and in the case where it is 8 minutes. Is possible. Then, when rendering mode B ends (when 5 minutes of time rendering elapses), a turning effect of whether to shift to rendering mode C or rendering mode D is included, and rendering mode C if transition conditions are satisfied. And control to shift to the effect mode D.

  In the time effect of the second embodiment described above, the condition that does not shift from the effect mode B to the effect mode A which is the normal game period, that is, the condition to shift to the effect mode C is in the hold storage at the end of the effect mode B The determination result includes the determination result of the jackpot, and among the gaming machines in which the rendering mode B is executed, the number of gaming machines transitioning to the rendering mode D is extremely small, and the rendering mode C is There is a problem that the transition to the will itself informs that there is a big hit in the suspension storage, and the player will not be interested in the variable display of the third symbol.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in addition to the technology described in the second embodiment described above, the condition to shift to the effect mode D as the condition not to shift to the effect mode A which is the normal gaming period from the effect mode B. That is, since the case where the period during which the time effect is performed is set to eight minutes in advance is added, it is possible to increase the number of gaming machines transitioning from the effect mode B to other than the effect mode A. In addition, by unifying the contents of the effects in the effect mode C and the effect mode D, when the player switches from the effect mode B to the effect mode (C or D) other than the effect mode A, the player will immediately hit the jackpot. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation.

  FIG. 119 (a) is a view exemplifying the display screen during the time effect period shown in FIG. 118, and shows a state in which 2 minutes have passed since the time effect was started. The “remaining 180 seconds” displayed on the upper right of the screen is the number of seconds remaining until 5 minutes have elapsed since the start of the time presentation. That is, the same display is performed whether 5 minutes is selected as the time effect period or 8 minutes is selected. The other contents are the same as those in FIG. 46 of the second embodiment described above, and thus the description will be omitted.

  FIG. 119 (b) is a view exemplifying the display screen during the time effect period shown in FIG. 118, and shows a state (remaining 3 seconds) in which 4 minutes and 57 seconds have passed since the time effect was started. . In addition, since it becomes the same display mode as FIG. 46 (b) of 2nd Embodiment mentioned above also when 5 minutes are chosen as a time production period, and when 8 minutes are chosen, about the content of a display The description is omitted.

  FIG. 120A is a view exemplifying the display screen at the end of the time effect period shown in FIG. 118, and shows a state in which 5 minutes have elapsed since the time effect was started. In addition, since it becomes the same display mode as FIG. 47 (a) of 2nd Embodiment mentioned above also when 5 minutes are chosen as a time production period, and when 8 minutes are chosen, about the content of a display The description is omitted.

  FIG. 120 (b) is a view exemplifying the display screen during the time effect extension period or the special extension effect period shown in FIG. 118. If it is during the time effect extension period, the super fish school time will continue until the fluctuation display that becomes the big hit ends, and if it is during the special extension effect period, the super fish school time will continue for 3 minutes. Therefore, when the number of remaining seconds is displayed, the player can easily grasp whether the current super fish school time is in the time effect extension period or in the special extension effect period, so the main screen "Remaining? Second" is displayed on the upper right of. By displaying in this manner, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that it may become a big hit each time the variable display performed during the super fish school time is performed. The other display contents are the same as those in FIG. 47 (b) of the second embodiment described above, and thus the description of the display contents is omitted.

  Figure 121 is a special symbol in the pending storage or change stored at that time among the time effect period end or special extension effect period end shown in FIG. It is the figure which illustrated the display screen when not set. As described above, since the image when the super fish school time ends is made common regardless of the state after the end of the time effect period or after the end of the special extension effect period, the volume of the image data can be reduced. it can. The display contents are the same as those in FIG. 48 of the second embodiment described above, and thus the description of the display contents is omitted.

  In addition, in the time production in this embodiment, during the time production period (during production mode B), without giving a production that suggests transition to production mode C or production mode D at the end of the time production period, until the end If the player is expected to have an expectation, but the acceptance judgment is performed based on the information stored on hold immediately before the end of the time effect period, and if the acceptance decision result is a pending storage with a big hit, that is, the time effect period If it is determined that the game shifts to a time rendering extension period (rendering mode C) after the end and it is determined that a jackpot will be made, a rendering may be provided to indicate that effect.

  In addition, when a time effect of 5 minutes or more is set in advance, that is, when transitioning to a special extension effect period (effect mode D) after the end of the time effect period, an effect may be provided to indicate that effect. In this case, the content of the suggested effect is a content that suggests that the content is continued for 5 minutes or more, and it is preferable that the suggested content can not be determined whether to shift to the rendering mode C or to the rendering mode D. For that purpose, when the timing to execute the suggestion effect is near the end of the time effect period, that is, the fluctuation stop timing of the third symbol whose acceptance determination result corresponds to the pending storage of the big hit passes the time effect period (for example, the big hit When the fluctuation time is one minute, it is preferable that the remaining time of the time presentation period is within 59 seconds.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment
Next, the electrical configuration of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 125. FIG. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment in that the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main control unit 110 and part of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the audio lamp control unit 113. And a part of the ROM 234 (representation) in the display control device 114 is changed (added) and that it is clearly indicated that the RTC 292 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113; The points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 122 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment.

  This block diagram is different from the block diagram (FIG. 49) showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment described above in that it is clearly shown that the RTC 292 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113. Since the other points are the same, the description will be omitted. As described above, this RTC 292 is used as a clocking means for performing time presentation.

  Another modification is that ROM 202 and RAM 203 in main controller 110, part of ROM 222 and RAM 223 in audio lamp controller 113, and part of ROM 234 in display controller 114 are changed (added). And will be described later with reference to FIGS. 123 to 148. Since the other parts are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof is omitted.

  The contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main control device 110 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the main control unit 110, and FIG. 123 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the main control unit 110. .

  The ROM 202 in the present embodiment is the same as the ROM 202 in the main control device 110 of the second embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  In addition to the RAM 203 in the second embodiment, the RAM 203 in the present embodiment has at least a change execution flag 203i and a change order storage area 203j.

  The fluctuation execution flag 203i is a flag used to determine whether the fluctuation is executed in the special view 1 or the fluctuation in the special view 2. This fluctuation execution flag 203i is set in the fluctuation execution determination processing (S4004 in FIG. 127) executed in the special symbol fluctuation processing 2 (S120 in FIG. 126) (see S4105 and S4107 in FIG. 127). And it is referred in order to distinguish fluctuation execution in special design fluctuation processing 2 (S120 in Figure 126) (refer to S4005 and S4010 in Figure 126), when fluctuation execution decision processing (S4004 in Figure 127) is executed, it is off (See S4101 in FIG. 127).

  The variation order storage area 203j is an area for storing a winning order for each reserve data stored in the special symbol 1 reserve ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserve sphere storage area 203b. Eight storage areas are set in the fluctuation order storage area 203j, and are stored in the storage areas in the order of winning. In addition, the storage area is also shifted based on the start of variation of the special symbol. The fluctuation order storage area j stores the winning order in the start winning process 2 (S121 in FIG. 130) (see S4407 and S4414 in FIG. 130). Then, it is referred to in the variation execution determination process (4004 in FIG. 126) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (S120 in FIG. 126) (see S4102 to S4104 and S4106 in FIG. 127).

  Next, contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition to the ROM 222 in the second embodiment described above, the ROM 222 in the present embodiment has at least a presentation time selection table 222 b (see FIG. 124A). The RAM 223 in the present embodiment includes, in addition to the RAM 223 in the second embodiment, a special continuation effect flag 223t, an additional effect flag 223u, eight effect counters 223v, a special continuation effect counter 223w, and an identification number storage area 223x. It has at least the effect time storage area 223y and the activation flag 223α (see FIG. 124 (b)).

  The presentation time selection table 222b is a table that is referred to when selecting a period in which synchronous presentation (time presentation) is performed, and is used in the presentation time setting process (S4904 in FIG. 145). The effect time selection table 222b has a plurality of data in which the period (time effect period) in which the synchronous effect (time effect) is performed is different, and corresponds to the identification number stored in the identification number storage area 223x described later By selecting a time presentation period, different time presentation periods are selected. Therefore, for example, by giving the same identification number to adjacent gaming machines, it is possible to start synchronous rendering at the same timing.

  In this embodiment, all of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 are selected by selecting a predetermined time presentation period from among the plurality of time presentation periods included in the presentation time selection table 222b based on the assigned identification number. The synchronization effect is performed at the same timing, the effect with a sense of unity is performed, or the timing at which the synchronization effect is intentionally performed only for some of the pachinko machines 10 among the plurality of pachinko machines 10 is different, surprisingness It is possible to execute a certain effect.

  The special continuation effect flag 223t is turned on when the condition for performing the special continuation effect is satisfied in the setting processing of eight during effect (S4806 in FIG. 143). And, when the value of the special continuation effect counter which it mentions later becomes 0, it becomes off (S4809 in Figure 143). When the special continuation effect flag is turned on, the special continuation effect is performed on the held symbol (S4605 in FIG. 136).

  The additional effect flag 223u is turned on (S4802 in FIG. 143) when the condition for performing the additional effect is satisfied in the eight-effect setting process (S1353 in FIG. 143). Then, when the value of the eight continuation effect counter, which will be described later, becomes 0, the number of held pieces stored is 4 or less, and when the value of the special continuation effect counter becomes 0 (see FIG. 143). S4810, S4812). When the additional effect flag 223u is turned on, an additional effect is performed on the held symbol (S4607 in FIG. 136).

  In the eight effect counter 223v, when the eight effect flag 223i is turned on, 8 is set in the value of the counter (S1553 in FIG. 139). Then, when the fluctuation start flag 223e is on in the fluctuation display setting process 2 (S1352 in FIG. 140), the value of the counter is decremented by 1 (S1654 in FIG. 140). The eight effect counter 223v defines a period during which eight effects are performed, and in the case of this embodiment, the value of the counter is set to 8, and when a new change is started, the value is decremented by one. By determining that the value of the counter becomes 0, it is determined whether or not all of the hold symbols (eight pieces) corresponding to eight pieces have been digested.

  In the present embodiment, effects (eight effects) are performed using eight holding symbols, but when performing effects using other than eight (for example, seven) holding symbols, this counter Set the value to 7

  In the special continuation effect counter 223w, when the special continuation effect flag 223t is turned on in the eight in-effect setting process, 5 is set as the value of the counter (S4807 in FIG. 143). Then, when the fluctuation start flag 223e is on in the fluctuation display setting process 2, the value of the counter is decremented by 1 (S1655 in FIG. 140). The special continuation effect counter 223 w is for defining a period during which the special continuation effect is performed, and in the case of this embodiment, the value of the counter is set to 5 and the value is decremented by 1 when a new change is started. By determining that the value of the counter becomes 0, it is determined whether or not all the retained symbols (five pieces) corresponding to the special continuation effect have been digested.

  In the present embodiment, although the effect (special continuation effect) is performed using five suspension symbols, the effect (special continuation effect) is performed using the suspension symbols other than five (for example, six) The value of this counter may be set to 6.

  The identification number storage area 223x stores the identification number input in the identification number input process (S1851 in FIG. 135) executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S1351 in FIG. 134) (S4506 in FIG. 135). ). Then, the identification number stored in the start-up process 2 is cleared (S1209 in FIG. 131). The identification number storage area 223x stores the identification number input by the operator in the identification number input process for setting the period (time) in which the time effect (synchronization effect) is performed using the RTC 292. It is used. When the operator does not input the identification number, the initial value stored in the identification number storage area 223x in the initial setting process (S1210 in FIG. 131) of the RAM 223 is used.

  In the present embodiment, an identification number can be assigned to each gaming machine by operating the frame button 22 for a predetermined time after power activation. Then, time effect (synchronization effect) using the RTC 292 is performed by reading from the effect time selection table 222 b stored in the ROM 222 the effect time (time when synchronous effect is performed) corresponding to the assigned identification number. It is possible to set the period.

  When the effect time is read from the effect time selection table 222b, it is read based on two parameters of the identification number stored in the identification number storage area 223x and the time data (date, day of week, etc.) acquired from the RTC 292 You should do it. By doing this, even if the identification number is the same, it is possible to change the period in which the synchronization effect is performed by changing the date, and it is possible to reduce the work of giving the identification number.

  The effect time storage area 223 y stores the effect time selected in the effect time setting process (S 4905 in FIG. 145). Then, the effect time stored in the start-up process 2 is cleared (S4504 in FIG. 135). The effect time storage area 223y is used to store effect time which is a period for performing synchronous effect based on the RTC 292, and synchronous effect (time effect) is based on the effect time stored in the memory area. It will be done.

  The start flag 223α is set to ON by the time setting process 2 executed in the start process 2 of the voice lamp control device (S1262 in FIG. 132). Then, by the identification number input processing, a predetermined time (20 minutes) has elapsed since the activation flag was turned on, or when the identification number input operation is performed, it is set to be off (S4504 in FIG. 135). The activation flag 223α is used to perform processing (identification number input processing) that enables operation only during a predetermined time after the power of the gaming machine is activated, and the activation flag 223α is turned on. The identification number can be entered only when the

  Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the effect time selection table 222b stored in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 125 (a) schematically shows the effect time selection table 222b, and FIG. 125 (b) schematically shows the time table of effect time selected by the effect time selection table 222b. It is.

  The presentation time selection table 222 b is used to set specific presentation time data out of a plurality of presentation time data stored in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113, and in the present embodiment, The specific effect time data is set by using, as parameters, an identification number that can be set and input by the operator and day of the week data that is time information acquired from the RTC 292.

  Further, in the day data, items of event 1 and event 2 are provided separately from the day of the week from day to day of the year. This is an item for special days such as holidays and anniversaries. The day of the year corresponding to the event 1 or the event 2 is set to use the event item prior to the item on the day of the week (day to Saturday).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 125 (b), the timetable of each effect time will be described. FIG. 125 (b) shows a timetable of each effect time selected by the effect time selection table 222b. The presentation time is set to different timetables from “I” to “XI”. “A”, “B”, and “D” described on the timetable are effect modes set in that period, and respectively indicate effect mode A, effect mode B, and effect mode D . The numbers below are the hours (minutes) that indicate the period.

  Among the effects modes, the effect mode A is a period during which normal effects are performed, and the effect mode B and the effect mode D are periods during which time effects (synchronous effects) are performed. In particular, the effect mode D is set to have a lower transition frequency than the effect mode B. During the effect mode D, effects are provided in which information that may be advantageous to the player is provided. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game while expecting that there is a possibility of shifting to the effect mode D by starting the time effect (synchronization effect).

  In addition, the effect mode C is a effect mode that shifts only when there is a jackpot in the holding memory when the effect mode B and the effect mode D are ended, that is, whether the effect mode shifts according to the game lottery result or not Although the description is omitted in FIG. 125 (b), since both are changed, both of the presentation mode A and the presentation mode C are actually set after the presentation mode B and the presentation mode D. It is set so that the rendering mode is selected appropriately according to the result.

  In the present embodiment, “I” to “VIII” are selected as effect times selected using the normal items (day to Saturday) of the day data, and the special items (event 1, event 2) of the day data "X" and "XI" are each distributed as presentation time selected when using).

  Here, the presentation time "I" will be described. The presentation time “I” is a time table in which the presentation mode B (time presentation (synchronous presentation)) is executed for 5 minutes after the presentation mode A (normal period) is executed for 55 minutes, and this is repeated.

  Next, the presentation time "II" will be described. In the presentation time "II", after the presentation mode A (normal period) is executed for 55 minutes, the presentation mode B (time presentation (synchronization presentation)) is 5 minutes, and the presentation mode D (time presentation (synchronization presentation)) is 3 A minute, that is, time rendering (synchronization rendering) is performed for a total of 8 minutes. Then, after performing the effect mode A for 52 minutes, the effect mode B is performed again for 5 minutes.

  The effect time "I" and the effect time "II" are set so that the time for which the time effect (synchronous effect) is performed is different. Similarly, the presentation time “I” to “VIII” are set so that the time period in which the time presentation (synchronization presentation) is performed is different (there is a part that is the same in part). However, regardless of which rendering time is selected, the timing at which time rendering (synchronous rendering) is started is set to be the same. Between the presentation time “I” and the presentation time “II” described above, the duration of the presentation mode A is made different so that the time presentation (synchronous presentation) is started 55 minutes after and 115 minutes after the start. . By configuring in this way, even if various rendering times are selected, by matching the timing at which time rendering (synchronization rendering) is started (timing to switch from rendering mode A to rendering mode B) A certain effect can be performed. In addition, since the player can not grasp whether the current time effect is set to 5 minutes or 8 minutes at the timing when the time effect is started, is the time effect extended? It is possible to see the time presentation while enjoying whether or not it is possible, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, there are presentation times "X" and "XI" which are presentation times selected only when referring to special items such as "event 1" and "event 2" as day data. . As shown in FIG. 125 (b), the two presentation times "X" and "XI" are set to be clearly different from the other presentation times, and in the presentation time "X", the time presentation ( Synchronous rendering occupies half the time of the whole, and in the rendering time "XI", all the time is regarded as time rendering (synchronous rendering).

  In this way, when using a normal item (day to Saturday) as day data, the player is as unnoticeable as possible about the difference in the period during which the time effect is performed (the player is not aware when the time effect is started) However, when special items (event 1 and event 2) are used as day-of-week data, a rendering time is set which can clarify the period in which the time rendering is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the rendering time is set as described above, but another method may be used as a setting method of the rendering time. For example, the presentation time corresponding to the identification number may be selected without using the day data in the presentation time selection table. When such a configuration is used, the time information acquired from the RTC 292 is referred to, and when it is determined that the date has changed, the content of the presentation time provided corresponding to the identification number should be changed. Thus, the same effect as that of the present embodiment can be achieved.

  In the present embodiment, when the operator does not set the identification number, the identification number “I” stored as an initial value in the identification number storage area 223x of the RAM 223 is used, but the time information acquired from the RTC 292 is If it is determined by reference that the date has changed, the identification number stored as an initial value in the identification number area 223x may be changed. By doing this, it is possible to change the period during which the time effect is performed without performing the input operation of the identification number, and the work of the operator can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the synchronous rendering is performed by referring to the time information acquired from the RTC 292. However, any configuration may be used in place of the RTC 292, as long as a period for performing the synchronous rendering can be set. You may use.

  As another configuration, for example, there is provided a timer for measuring an elapsed time since the power is turned on, and a configuration which can be set to enter into a predetermined period in which synchronous effect can be performed after a predetermined time has elapsed, It is conceivable that the user inputs predetermined information by operating the key, and enters into a predetermined period in which the synchronization effect can be performed based on the input predetermined information.

  Specifically, in order to synchronously display on the other pachinko machine 10 the presentation mode (the presentation mode stored on hold) scheduled to be executed on the specific pachinko machine 10, the display mode of the particular pachinko machine 10 The third symbol display device 81 outputs, as a password that can be input to the pachinko machine 10, presentation information including information indicating the presentation aspect stored on hold. The player inputs the password to the other pachinko machine 10, and the other pachinko machine 10 sets a specific presentation mode based on the presentation information included in the input password. Then, by causing the player to execute the effect mode set at an arbitrary timing, it becomes possible to synchronize with the effect mode to be executed by the specific pachinko machine 10.

  When such a configuration is used, it is preferable to use the RTC 292 to include information indicating the time at which the effect mode stored on hold in the effect information described above is actually executed. By doing this, it becomes possible to enjoy the effect mode synchronized with the specific pachinko machine 10 and the other pachinko machines 10 only by inputting the password to the other pachinko machines 10 at that time.

  Further, it is preferable that the effect information displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not a password but a two-dimensional information code that is information that can be acquired by an external device (mobile terminal). With this configuration, it is possible to execute the effect mode synchronized between the pachinko machines that are separated by acquiring the effect information by the portable terminal and transmitting the effect information to a distant player by communication.

  In addition, what is made to synchronize in this way is not restricted to the presentation mode currently stored on hold, It may be a presentation mode during the jackpot. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 (following pachinko machine) that synchronizes with the rendering mode of the pachinko machine 10 (main pachinko machine) that is the origin of synchronization, the synchronous pachinko machine performs synchronization production only when it is not playing a game The display area of the third symbol display device 81 may be divided and displayed even during the special symbol game.

  By using such a configuration, the player can set the predetermined period in which the synchronous effect can be performed, so that, for example, the player can freely experience the synchronous effect, and it is possible to alleviate the boredom of the game. It becomes.

Regarding Control Processing Executed by Main Controller in Fourth Embodiment
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 130. The present fourth embodiment is different from the above-described second embodiment in the order in which the holding balls of the special symbol 1 and the holding balls of the special symbol 2 are digested. That is, although 2nd Embodiment mentioned above was performing control which digests the retention ball of special symbol 2 preferentially to the retention ball of special symbol 1, this embodiment is the retention ball of special symbol 1, and the special ball Control to digest the holding ball of the symbol 2 in order of winning is performed. Since the other points are the same, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 126, special symbol variation processing 2 (S120) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 2 (S120). The special symbol variation process 2 (S120) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in the device 81.

  In the special symbol variation process 2, first, it is determined whether or not the present is currently in the middle of a special symbol (S4001). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S4001: Yes), the present processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S4001: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S4002), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is If it is not changing (S4002: No), the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding N1 of the fluctuation display in the special symbol) and the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (the fluctuation display of the special symbol The number of holding times N2) is acquired (S4003). Next, it is determined which of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special figure 1) the holding ball or the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to special figure 2) the holding ball to execute the fluctuation, and the fluctuation execution A change execution determination process is performed to set the flag 203i (S4004). The change execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The fluctuation execution flag 203i set by the fluctuation execution judgment process (S4004) judges whether the fluctuation is executed in the special figure 1 (S4005), and the fluctuation is not performed in the special figure 1 (S4005: No), the fluctuation It is determined whether the execution flag 203i is the fluctuation execution of the special figure 2 (S4010), and if the fluctuation execution of the special figure 2 is not performed (S4010: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation execution flag 203i is fluctuation execution in the special figure 1 (S4005: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S4006), and the special symbol changed by calculation A holding ball number command indicating the value of the 1 holding ball number counter 203d is set (S4007). The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 67) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b of the RAM 223 Store.

  After setting the holding ball number command in the process of S4007, the data stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is shifted (S4008). In the processing of S4008, processing is performed to shift data stored in the first holding area to the fourth holding area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S4009). In addition, the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4005, if the variation execution flag 203i is not variation execution of the special figure 1 (S4005: No), it is determined whether the variation execution flag 203i is variation execution of the special figure 2 (S4010), variation execution flag If 203i is the variation execution of special figure 2 (S4010: Yes), processing similar to the processing about a reserve ball of special figure 1 mentioned above is performed about a reserve ball of special figure 2.

  Specifically, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e is decremented by 1 (S 4011), and the holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e changed by the calculation is set (S4012). The special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223 is updated by the holding ball number command set here. After setting the holding ball number command by the process of S4012, shift the data stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b (S4013), and start special display for the variable display in the first symbol display device 37 2) The variation start process is executed (S4014). In addition, the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4002, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S4002: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S4015). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time If has not passed (S4015: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S4016), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4015, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S4015: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S4017). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S4009) described later with reference to FIG. 128 or a special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (S4014) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol 1 fluctuation start process or the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process is executed, based on values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b The stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set. More specifically, in the case of the first special symbol jackpot, it is determined whether to be the jackpot A or jackpot B according to the value of the first hit classification counter C2, the jackpot of the second special symbol In this case, it is determined whether to be the big hit A or the big hit B according to the value of the first hit type counter C2.

  In the present embodiment, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37 in the case of the big hit A, and the red LED is turned on in the case of the big hit B. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released, when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what makes it light only for several seconds after the stop of a fluctuation | variation.

  After the process of S4017 is finished, when the variable display under execution in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the display of the special symbol performed by the special symbol change start process (this lottery result) is a special It is determined whether it is a jackpot of symbols (S4018). Then, if the current lottery result is the big hit of the special symbol (S4018: Yes), the start of the big hit is set (S4019), and the process proceeds to the process of S4022.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4018, if the current lottery result is the deviation of the special symbol (S4018: No), it is determined whether the value of the time counter 203g is greater than 0 (S4020). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S4020: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S4021), and the process proceeds to S4022. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 0 (S4020: No), the process of S4021 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S4022.

  In the processing of S4022 executed after the processing of S4019, S4020, or S4021, the lighting of the LED which is the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the processing of S4017 and the third symbol display device 81 A stop command is set in order to tune the fluctuating stop (S4022).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the change execution determination process (S4004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the change execution determination process (S4004). This variation execution determination process (S4004) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 126) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol The effect pattern (the change effect pattern) of the change effect performed by the display device 81 is set to the value of the various counters stored in either execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. It is a process for determining whether to execute based on.

  In the fluctuation execution determination process, the fluctuation execution flag 203i is first set to 0 to perform initialization (S4101), and data of the fluctuation order storage area 203j is acquired (S4102). Thereafter, the data in the change order storage area 203j is shifted (S4103). In the process of S4103, the data stored in the first to eighth areas of the variation order storage area 203j is shifted in order toward the execution area. More specifically, first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → pending third area, fifth area → fourth area, sixth area → The data in each area is shifted in the fifth area, the seventh area, the sixth area, and the eighth area, the seventh area, and so on. After shifting the data, it is determined whether the data in the execution area is the special view 1 (S4104).

  If it is determined in the process of S4104 that the data in the execution area is the special view 1 (S4104: Yes), the fluctuation execution flag 203i is set to the fluctuation execution in the special view 1 (S4105), and this process is ended. , Return to the special symbol variation processing 2.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the data of the execution area is not the special view 1 (S4104: No), it is determined whether the data of the execution area is the special view 2 (S4106). If it is determined in the process of S4106 that the data of the execution area is the special figure 2 (S4106: Yes), the fluctuation execution flag 203i is set to the fluctuation execution in the special figure 2 (S4107), and this process is ended. , Return to the special symbol variation processing 2.

  If it is determined in the process of S4106 that the data of the execution area is not the special figure 2 (S4106: No), there is no holding ball to be subjected to fluctuation execution, so this processing is ended with the fluctuation execution flag 203i kept in the initial state. , Return to special symbol variation processing.

  Next, the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S4009) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S4009). This special symbol 1 change start process (S4009) is a process executed in the special symbol change process 2 (see FIG. 126) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), and the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a It is the process for determining the production pattern (the fluctuation production pattern) of the fluctuation production performed with the 1st design display 37 and the 3rd design display 81 based on the value of the various counters stored in the execution area of.

  In the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process, first, the first hit random number counter C1 of the first special symbol stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection Each value of the counter C3 is acquired (S4201), and it is determined whether or not the probability change is in progress (S4202). Specifically, when the probability variation counter 203g is larger than 0, it is determined that the probability variation is in progress, and when the probability variation counter 203g is 0, it is determined that the probability variation is not in progress. If it is determined in the process of S4202 that a definite change is in progress (S4202: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot determination value at the high probability of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (S4203), and the process of S4205 Move to Here, the lottery result of the special symbol is stored in the value of the first random number counter C1 updated in the process of S103 and the jackpot determination value (FIG. 52A) at the high probability of the first random number table 202a. The determination is made by comparing the current values (hit values) one by one (S 4203). If the value of the first random number counter C1 is in the range of "0 to 9", it is determined to be a big hit, and if it is in the range of "10 to 399", it is determined to be out of place (see FIG. 52 (a)) .

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation is not definite (S4202: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot determination value and the small hitting determination value at the low probability of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (S4204), and the processing of S4205 Move to Here, the lottery result of the special symbol is stored in the value of the first random number counter C1 updated in the process of S103 and the jackpot determination value (FIG. 52A) at the high probability of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. The determination is made by comparing one by one with the current value (hit value) (S4204). If the value of the first random number counter C1 is “7”, it is determined that the jackpot is large, and if it is in the range of “0 to 6” or “8 to 399”, it is determined that it is out of FIG. )reference).

  Next, a prize information command including the lottery result is set (S4205), and the process proceeds to S4206. In the process of S4206, it is determined whether or not the lottery result acquired in the process of S4203 or S4204 is a big hit. When it is determined that the lottery result acquired in the process of S4203 or S4204 is a big hit (S4206: Yes), the selection table 202b1 for special figure 1 based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S4201. Further, the display mode is set (S4207), and the process proceeds to the process of S4208.

  More specifically, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is compared with the random number value stored in the big hit type selection table 202b, and the big hit (big hit A, big hit B) of the two types of special symbols Among them, it is determined which is the jackpot type. As described above, if the value of the first collision type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 59", it is determined that the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot), if it is in the range of "60 to 99", the jackpot It is determined that it is B (16R normal jackpot) (see FIG. 52 (b)).

  In the process of S4207, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set in accordance with the determined jackpot type (big jack A, jack B). Further, in order to cause the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S4208). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S4208, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops until it stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol fluctuation is defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 53A to 53D). Specifically, if it is a big hit time, if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 50", normal reach (30 seconds), if it is in the range of "51 to 179", super reach (60 seconds) If it is in the range of "180 to 198", it becomes a variation pattern of special reach (90 seconds) (see FIG. 53 (b)).

  In the process of S4206, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S4206: No), the display mode of the out is set (S4209). In the process of S4209, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and the display mode corresponding to the symbol is set, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a The type of stop to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the symbol. For example, as the type of stop, "reach before and after out of reach", "reach other than before and after out of reach", and "complete out of reach" are defined.

  Next, the outlier fluctuation pattern is determined (S4210). Determined on the basis of the selection table for normal (in the case where the counter 203 for probability change is 0) based on the (normal) selection table 202d2 and in the case for probability change (when the counter 203g for probability change is greater than 0) It is determined. Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the dislocated symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S4208 and S4210, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and symbol fluctuation such as normal reach or super reach is performed based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determine the time of change of The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol fluctuation is defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 53A to 53D). Specifically, if the value is completely out at the time of out-of-range variation, if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 98", if it is in the range of "99 to 198" If it is a reach, if the value of fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149", if it is in the range of normal reach (30 seconds) and if it is in the range of "150 to 197", super reach (60 Seconds), and if it is "198", it becomes special reach (90 seconds).

  When the processing of S4208 and S4210 is finished, next, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined in the processing of S4208 and S4210 is set (S4211). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S4208 and S4210 is set (S4212). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are sent to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 67). Will be sent. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S4212 ends, the processing returns to the special symbol variation processing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (S4014) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (S4014). The special symbol 2 change start process (S4014) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 59) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is It is a process for determining an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area.

  In this special symbol 2 change start process, similarly to the special symbol 1 change start process (S4009), the first special symbol random number counter C1 of the second special symbol and the special symbol big hit random number table 202a are determined by the process of S4301. Get the lottery result based on. Since the same processing as the processing of S4009 is performed on the data of the execution area in the holding ball storage area of the second special symbol except the processing of S4307 and S4309, the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The process of S4307 is executed when the lottery result acquired in the process of S4303 or S4304 is a jackpot (S4306: Yes). In the process of S4307, the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot is determined based on the selection table 202e2 for special drawing 2 (FIG. 54C) (S4307). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S4307, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops until it stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol fluctuation is defined in the time variation pattern selection table 202e (refer to FIGS. 54 (a) to (c)). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter Regardless of the value of CS1 (in the entire range of values), a fluctuation pattern of B (0.5 seconds) per unit time is obtained (see FIG. 54 (c)).

  Further, the process of S4309 is executed when the lottery result acquired in the process of S4303 or S4304 is out (S4306: No). In the process of S4309, the outlier fluctuation pattern is determined based on the special figure 2 short time fluctuation pattern table 202e2 (FIG. 54C) (S4309). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S4309, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops until it stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol fluctuation is defined in the time variation pattern selection table 202e (refer to FIGS. 54 (a) to (c)). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter Regardless of the value of CS1 (in the entire range of values), the variation pattern of the short time deviation B (0.5 seconds) is obtained (see FIG. 54 (c)).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 130, start winning process 2 (S121) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 2 (S121). The start winning process 2 (S121) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), and it is determined whether or not the first start hole 63a has a winning (start winning), and there is a start winning, It is a process for performing hold processing of values indicated by various random number counters.

  When the start winning process 2 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first start hole 63a (start winning) (S4401). Here, the entry of the first starting opening 63a is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first starting opening 63a (S4401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S4402) . Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S4403).

  And if there is no winning in the first starting opening 63a (S4401: No) or if there is a winning in the first starting opening 63a, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 If not (S4403: No), the process proceeds to S4408. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first starting opening 63a (S4401: Yes), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S4403: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S4404). And the ball holding number command which shows the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is set (S4405).

  The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 67) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b of the RAM 223 Store.

  After setting the ball holding ball number command by the process of S4405, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is a special symbol The special figure 1 is stored in the first area of the variation order storage area 203j (S4407), and the process proceeds to the processing of S4408. In the process of S4407, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball counter 203d or the special symbol 2 holding ball counter 203e is referred to, and if the total value is 1, the first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the second area is set, if the value is 3, the third area is set, and if the value is 4, the fourth area is set to the first area. The start opening changes the first special symbol as in this embodiment by determining the value set in the change order storage area 203j in the change execution determination process (S4004) described above, and the second special Even when there are two types of fluctuations with those changing the design, the fluctuation can be started in the order of winning on the starting opening.

  In the process of S4408, it is determined whether or not the ball has won in the second starting opening 63b (starting combination) (S4408). If it is determined that the ball has won in the second starting opening 63b (S4408: Yes), the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is subjected to the same processing as when winning in the first starting opening 63a.

  More specifically, the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (number of holding N2 of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S4409), and if the value is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) ( S4410: Yes, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 (S4411), and a holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is set (S4412). Then, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b (S4413), and the first area of the fluctuation order storage area 203j Special figure 2 is set up (S4414), and it shifts to processing of S4415. The determination of the first area in S4414 is performed in the same manner as the process of S4407.

  If there is no winning in the second starting opening 63b (S4408: No), or if there is a winning in the second starting opening 63b, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is not less than 4 (S4410: No), the prefetch process is executed (S4415), and this process is ended as it is.

<Control Process Performed by the Audio Lamp Controller in the Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 131 to 146, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. The fourth embodiment is different from the above-described second embodiment in the contents of eight hold effects, a combined display effect, and a time effect (synchronization effect). The other parts are the same, and the same parts are given the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 131, start-up processing 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the start-up process 2. The start-up process 2 is a process performed when the sound lamp control device 113 is powered on, as in the second embodiment described above. In the start-up process 2, the processes of S1201 to S1211 are executed as in the second embodiment. Thereafter, the time setting process 2 (S1251 in FIG. 132) is executed, and the process proceeds to the main process 2.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 132, time setting processing 2 (S1251) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing time setting processing 2 (S1251). This time setting process 2 (S1251) is a process executed in the start-up process 2, and based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292, sets the time (time) at power on (power on) and starts the power. This is a process for setting the activation flag 223α for performing a process that is performed only for a predetermined time from time to on.

  In the time setting process 2, as in the second embodiment described above, time information is acquired from the RTC 292 which is clocking means (S1221). Thereafter, based on the acquired time information, the activation time is set in the set time storage area 223j (S1261), and the activation flag 223α is set to ON (S1262).

  By executing this process and setting the activation flag 223α to ON, it is possible to perform a process (identification number input process (see FIG. 135)) which can be operated only for a predetermined time after the power is turned on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 133, main processing 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing main processing 2. The main process 2 is executed after the start-up process 2 of the audio lamp control device 113 is completed. The main process 2 executes the processes of S1301 to S1306 as in the second embodiment described above. Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring and effect process 2 is executed (S1351). The frame button input monitoring and rendering process (S1351) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  After the frame button input monitoring and rendering process 2 (S1351) is executed, the processes of S1308 to S1312 are executed as in the second embodiment described above. Thereafter, the variable display setting process 2 (S1352) is executed. The variable display setting process 2 (S1352) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. After the variable display setting process 2 (S1352) is executed, the eight effect setting process (S1353) and the synchronous effect management process 2 (S1354) are sequentially performed. Then, after that, the processing of S1317 to S1321 is executed as in the second embodiment described above. The eight effect setting process (S1353) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 144 for the synchronous effect management process 2 (S1354), and FIG.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 134, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 (S1351) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing a frame button input monitoring and rendering process 2. The frame button input monitoring / rendering process 2 (S1351) is executed in the main process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and the frame button input monitoring / rendering process of the second embodiment described above In addition to the same contents as S1307) in FIG. 80, this process is a process for inputting an identification number used to set a period (time effect period) for performing synchronization effect described later.

  In the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2, first, identification number input processing (S1851) is executed.

  Here, this identification number input processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing identification number input processing (S1851).

  In the identification number input process (S1851), first, it is determined whether or not symbol variation is in progress (S4501). If it is determined that the symbol is changing (S4501: Yes), the present process is completed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the symbol is not changing (S4501: No), it is determined whether the activation flag 223α is set to ON (S4502). When the activation flag 223α is not set to ON (S4501: Yes), this process is completed.

  On the other hand, when the activation flag 223α is set to ON (S4501: No), it is determined whether 20 minutes have passed since the activation (S4503). This determination is made by comparing the activation time (S1261 in FIG. 132) set in the set time storage area with the current time information acquired from the RTC 292. Then, if 20 minutes have elapsed since the start, the start flag is set to OFF (S4504), and this process is completed. On the other hand, if 20 minutes have not elapsed from the time of activation, it is determined whether or not there is an identification number input operation (S4504).

  Here, the identification number input operation will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute a predetermined input operation using the frame button 22, and after the power is turned on, within a predetermined time (within 20 minutes in the present embodiment), and the third In the case where the symbol variation is not performed on the display screen of the symbol display device 81 (for example, during the demonstration screen display), when the frame button 22 is pressed once, the identification number input screen is displayed. By inputting “desired input” displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 after inputting a desired identification number on the identification number input screen, it is possible to execute the input of the identification number. In addition, as a method of inputting the identification number, a plurality of input numbers may be displayed on the display screen, and any of them may be selected, or a plurality of numbers from 0 to 9 displayed on the display screen may be used. A method of inputting an identification number by selection may be used. Further, “random” is displayed on the display screen, and a predetermined identification number is automatically selected from a plurality of identification numbers by selecting “random”. It may be a method.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the predetermined time after power on is set to 20 minutes, but even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is activated at the same time, it is possible to input the identification number to all the pachinko machines 10 The time may be set as appropriate.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the period during which the identification number can be input is a predetermined time after power activation, but this is intended to prevent the player in the game from entering the identification number. As long as the purpose can be achieved, other methods may be adopted, for example, by pressing a switch provided at a position where the player can not operate (for example, the back of the gaming machine). The third symbol display device 81 is configured to display the identification number input operation screen on the display screen, or it is determined that the time information clocked by the RTC 292 is outside business hours, and only the time outside business hours The identification number input operation screen may be displayed. Even if such a configuration is adopted, it is possible to prevent the player from inputting the identification number.

  Referring back to FIG. 135, the description will be continued. If the identification number input operation has not been performed in S4505, this processing ends. That is, if the identification number input operation is not performed in a state where the predetermined time has not elapsed since the power was turned on, there is a possibility that the identification number input operation may be performed until the predetermined time elapses. This determination is repeated until e.

  On the other hand, when the identification number input operation is performed (S4505: Yes), the input identification number is stored in the identification number storage area 223x (S4506), and the activation flag 223α is set to off (S4504). Finish.

  In the identification number input process described above, the identification number, which is a parameter necessary for setting a period (time effect period) in which the synchronization effect to be described later is performed, is limited within a predetermined time after power on. The period during which synchronous rendering is performed is changed based on the identification number set by this processing. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily input the identification number to the store side and to prevent the player from easily entering the identification number. Therefore, the store side intentionally assigns the same identification number to each other. When it is intended to perform synchronous rendering related to each other, it is possible to reliably perform desired synchronous rendering without the player changing the identification number set by the store.

  Here, returning to FIG. 134, the description will be continued. After the identification number input process (S1851) is executed, the processes from S1811 to S1813 are performed in the same manner as the process performed in the second embodiment described above, and the hold effect flag is set to ON in S1813. If not, eight hold presentation processing (see S1852 in FIG. 136) described later is executed, and then button presentation processing (see S1853 in FIG. 137) described later is executed. On the other hand, when the hold effect flag is set to ON, the processes of S1814 and S1815 are executed as in the process performed in the second embodiment described above.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the eight hold effect process (S1852) will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the eight hold effect process (S1852). In the eight hold effect process (S1852), eight effects performed when eight balls are stored, special continuation effects continuously performed thereafter, and eight effect and special continuation effects are performed. It is processing to execute the effect when the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) while the additional effect to be carried out is being performed, and the holding symbol is “push” symbol (notice holding symbol) It is processing to perform an effect corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 operated when displayed.

  In the eight hold effect process (S1852), first, it is determined whether the eight effect flag 223i is set to ON (S4601). If the eight effect flag 223i is not set to ON (S4601: No), it is then determined whether the special continuation effect flag 223t is set to ON (S4602). If the special continuation effect flag 223t is not set to on (S4602: No), it is then determined whether the additional effect flag is set to on (S4603). If the additional effect flag is not set to ON (S4603: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the eight effect flag 223i is set to ON (S4601: Yes), the corresponding eight pending effects are executed (S4604), and the process proceeds to the processing of S4603. In addition, it is in the middle of eight effects, and the notification display symbol is not displayed, that is, the notification display symbol ("push" symbol shown in FIG. 110 (a)) is already displayed by operating the frame button 22. When the frame button 22 is operated at the timing after changing to the symbol (“big hit !!!?” Symbol shown in FIG. 111 (a)), the effect is not executed on the holding symbol, but it is expected by voice A so-called 煽 production is performed which expresses a degree or changes the color of a reserved symbol (for example, "big hit !!!?") Which has already been changed by eight effects.

  When the special continuation effect flag 223t is set to ON in S4602 (S4602: Yes), the corresponding special continuation effect of suspension is executed (S4605), and the process proceeds to S4603. In the special continuation effect (while the special continuation effect flag 223t is on), when the operation input of the frame button 22 is already performed after the holding symbol is changed by the operation of the frame button 22, the above-described Similar to the eight effects, the turning effect is performed based on the operation of the frame button.

  When the additional effect flag 223u is set to ON at S4603 (S4603: Yes), the corresponding additional effect flag for holding is set to OFF (S4606), and the corresponding additional effect for holding is executed (S4606) S4607).

  As described above, in the eight hold effect (S1852) executed during the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 (S1351 in FIG. 134), various flags (eight effects at the timing when the frame button 22 is operated) Since the effects to be executed are made different based on the setting status of the flag 223i, the special continuation effect flag 223t, and the additional effect flag 223u), the player can experience various effects simply by performing the same operation. It becomes.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the button effect process (S1853) will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing button effect processing (S1853). This button effect process (S1853) is a process for setting a display effect when the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) during composite display effect, and based on the button continuous hitting mission displayed in FIG. 114 (b). The processing corresponds to the pressing (operation) of the frame button 22 and the pressing (operation) of the frame button 22 based on the “push” symbol displayed in FIG. 116 (b).

  In the button effect process (S1853), first, it is determined whether the button effect flag 223r is set to ON (S4701). When the button effect flag 223r is not set to ON (S4701: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when the button effect flag 223r is set to ON (S4701: Yes), next, whether or not the stop effect for button effect (“push” symbol in FIG. 116 (b)) is stopped or not It discriminates (S4702).

  Here, the button effect flag 223r will be described. The button effect flag 223r is a flag set to on by button effect selection processing 2 (see FIG. 142) described later, and is turned on when the selected change pattern is a change pattern corresponding to the composite display effect. It is set.

  In S4702, if the button effect stop symbol is after stop (S4702: Yes), a display command indicating a combined effect mode corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern is set (S4703). In other words, it is determined that pressing (operation) of the frame button 22 this time operates the "Push" symbol displayed in FIG. 116 (b), and changes the "Push" symbol to a number symbol. Set the display command.

  On the other hand, when the button effect stop symbol is not after stop (S4702: No), it is determined whether the button operation effective period has elapsed (S4705). The button operation effective period is a period indicated by (b) in FIG. 113, and is measured by a counter (not shown). Here, if the button operation valid period has elapsed (S4705: Yes), it is determined whether the button pressing condition is achieved (S4706). In the present embodiment, pressing the button 50 times is the button pressing condition (see FIG. 114B).

  If the button pressing condition is not achieved (S4706: No), the button effect flag is set to OFF (S4704), and the process ends. On the other hand, when the button pressing condition is achieved (S4706: Yes), this processing is ended as it is. That is, when the button pressing condition is not achieved when the button operation effective period has elapsed, it is a normal effect period after the period of (b) in FIG. 113 ends without continuing the composite display effect. In order to shift to c), the button effect flag is set to OFF so that the button effect process is not performed.

  Here, the process returns to S4705 and continues the description. If the button operation effective period has not elapsed in S4705 (S4705: No), the number of button presses is stored (S4707), and this processing ends.

  As described above, although the button effect process has been described, in the present process, when the combined display effect is selected by the button effect selection process 2 (see FIG. 142), the button operation effective period before stopping the button effect stop pattern It is determined whether or not the button pressing has been performed a sufficient number of times to achieve the button pressing condition (during the button continuous hitting mission), and further, the button pressing is performed after the stop effect for button effect ("push" symbol) is stopped. When being done, processing is performed to set a display command for changing the stop effect for button effect to a number pattern. In addition, when the button pressing condition can not be achieved, a normal effect pattern (see FIG. 115 (a)) is displayed without stopping the stop effect for button effect in order to set the button effect flag to OFF. It will be

  Referring to FIG. 138, notice selection processing 2 (S1454) executed in command determination processing (S1312) in main processing 2 (see FIG. 133) executed by MPU 221 in audio lamp control device 113. Will be described. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the advance notice selection process 2 (S1454). The advance notice selection process 2 (S1454) is a process of setting the notice for display command based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292 and the effect mode set by the synchronization effect management process 2 (see FIG. 144) described later.

  In the advance notice selection process 2 (S1454), first, the processes of S1501 to S1507 are executed as in the advance notice selection process executed in the second embodiment described above. Here, if it is determined in the process of S1505 that the effect mode C is not set, it is determined whether the effect mode D is set (S1541). When the effect mode D is not set (S1541: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the effect mode D is set (S1541: Yes), the game state notice effect is selected based on the result of the judgment and the effect counter (S1542), and the notice command for display showing the selected notice effect. Is set (S1543). Then, the process ends.

  Here, the display notice command to be set when the effect mode D is set will be described. In the effect mode D, effects are set only when the period during which synchronous effect (time effect) is performed is longer than normal (five minutes) by the effect time setting process (see FIG. 145) (eight minutes). It is a mode. In such an effect mode D, a notice effect which can be advantageous for the player is performed so that the player is satisfied with entering the effect mode D. For example, there is no connection with a notice effect to notify that the current game situation is in a certain change, a notice effect that does not appear in another effect mode, or a direct game result, but the player has saved it There may be a notice effect including information capable of acquiring a large amount of points (points for raising the level of the character) and information capable of acquiring a bonus video (display of information readable by a mobile phone).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 139, winning command reception process 2 (the main process 2 (see FIG. 133) performed by MPU 221 in voice lamp control device 113 (S1312) is executed. S1461) will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing winning command reception processing 2 (S1461). The winning command reception process 2 (S1461) is a process performed when the winning command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received.

  In the prize command reception process 2 (S1461), first, the processes of S1511 and S1512 are executed as in the prize command reception process (S1411 of FIG. 73) executed in the second embodiment described above, and an additional effect It is determined whether the flag is set to on (S1551). When the additional effect flag is not set to ON (S1551: No), the processes of S1514 to S1522 are executed as in the second embodiment described above.

  On the other hand, when the additional effect flag is set to ON (S1551: Yes), the additional effect is set (S1552), and the present process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the variation display setting process 2 (S1352) executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 133) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 2 (S1352).

  In the variable display setting process 2 (S1352), the processes of S1601 and S1602 are performed in the same manner as the variable display setting process (S1313 of FIG. 74) executed in the second embodiment described above. Then, variation pattern selection processing 2 is executed (S1651).

  Here, fluctuation pattern selection processing 2 (S1651) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1651). This variation pattern selection process 2 (S1651) is based on the current effect mode and the value of the acquired effect counter, as in the variation pattern selection process (S1603 of FIG. 75) executed in the second embodiment described above. Is a process of selecting and setting a fluctuation pattern.

  In the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1651), first, the processes of S1611 and S1612 are executed as in the variation pattern selection process (S1603) executed in the second embodiment described above. When the effect mode A is set in S1612 (S1612: Yes), the button effect selection process 2 is executed (S1661). The button effect selection process 2 will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the rendering mode A is not set in S1612, S1614 and S1615 are executed as in the variation pattern selection process (S1603) executed in the second embodiment described above. Then, if the rendering mode B is not set in S1614 (S1614: No), it is then determined whether the rendering mode C is set (S1662).

  If it is determined that the effect mode C is set (S1662: Yes), the change pattern is selected and set from the change pattern selection table of the corresponding time effect extension period. On the other hand, when the rendering mode C is not set (S1662: No), the current rendering mode is D, so a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table of the special extension rendering period corresponding to the rendering mode D Set

  Here, with reference to FIG. 142, button effect selection processing 2 (S1661) will be described. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing button effect selection processing 2 (S1661).

  In the button effect selection process 2, first, the processes of S1621 and S1622 are executed as in the second embodiment described above. Then, in the process of S1622, when the fluctuation pattern selected from the fluctuation pattern selection table is a button effect, the number of times the button is pressed is set (S1671). The button pressing number is the number of pressing required to achieve the button continuous hitting mission (refer to FIG. 114 (b)) performed during the combined display effect, and is set to 50 in the present embodiment. . In the present embodiment, the number of times the button is pressed is set to 50 and is set as the achievement condition of the mission during composite display effect, but as the mission imposed during the composite display effect (condition setting for reaching Push effect), the number of button presses is increased or decreased. Alternatively, the frame button may be operated at a predetermined timing.

  Then, after the processes of S1623 and S1624 are performed as in the second embodiment described above, the present process ends.

  As described above, in addition to the processing of the button effect selection process (S1613 in FIG. 76) performed in the above-described second embodiment, the button effect selection process 2 is a push effect performed during the composite display effect. The button press frequency is set as the condition setting for reaching. By performing this condition setting, even if the button effect is selected as the variation pattern, the player operates the frame button 22 and shifts to the push effect unless the set condition (50 button presses) is achieved. Since there is no such thing, the player actively operates the frame button 22 to see a special effect and can participate in the gaming machine, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be enjoyed.

  Also, when the player feels that he wants to see a normal effect, it is better not to press the button. It is possible to select a later effect depending on the player's mood.

  Although the number of times the button is pressed is set to 50 in the present embodiment, the number of times the button is pressed may be changeable each time the button effect is selected as the variation pattern. In addition, even if the button pressing frequency set as the condition setting is achieved, it does not shift to the push effect without fail. For example, when the lottery result of the game is a big hit, it shifts to the push effect without fail, but the lottery result of the game is lost In the case, it is possible to shift to the push effect only with a predetermined probability (30%). By doing this, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the jackpot only by shifting to the push effect, and the player can more actively participate in the game using the operation of the frame button 22.

  Also, by making it possible to change the number of times the button is set as the condition setting, it is possible to change the push result for the player because the lottery result is lost, or the condition has not been achieved. It can be difficult to grasp whether the transition has not occurred. Also, by setting the number of times the button is pressed, which is set as the condition setting, to one, it is possible to provide a surprising effect.

  In addition, when setting the number of times of button pressing, for example, it is preferable to provide the number of times set only when the lottery result of the game is a big hit. By this configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize that the game result is a big hit at the display timing of the effect different from usual, so that the game effect will be watched carefully. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Also, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 116 (a), the blank symbol is changed to a "push" symbol, and the effect of compositely displaying the "push" symbol is performed, but the blank symbol is changed to various characters. It may be configured to change and display sentences (messages) corresponding to the characters in combination. With such a configuration, it is possible to combine the characters displayed by the player at the timing when the blank symbol is changed to various characters, and to predict the sentences to be composite-displayed, in the later game. It is possible to give a sense of expectation. Moreover, when using such a configuration, it is preferable to combine and display sentences using a part of displayed characters, instead of combining and displaying all the displayed various characters. By doing this, it is possible to make the player predict sentences of various patterns. In addition, when the aspect (color, size, etc.) of the characters that are always used is made different from other characters in order to make it possible to identify the characters that are always used, the player can be displayed in a composite display. It is possible to give a hint of the text to be created, and it is possible to more enjoy predicting the text to be created in the composite display.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 143, an eight-provision-effects setting process (S1353) executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 133) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing an eight-done effect setting process (S1353). The eight effect setting process (S1353) is a process of performing various settings relating to a reserved symbol effect (see FIGS. 110 to 112) performed based on the number of reserved symbols (the number of reserved memories).

  In the eight effect setting process (S1353), first, it is determined whether the eight effect flag 223i is set to ON (S4801). When the eight effect flag 223i is set to on (S4801: Yes), the additional effect flag 223u is set to on (S4802). As described above, the additional effect flag 223 u is a flag that is used when determining whether or not the additional winning effect is to be performed. Then, it is determined whether the value of the eight effect counter 223v is larger than 0 (S4803). The eight effect counter 223v is a counter for counting the number of times of symbol variation after the eight effects using the reserved symbols are executed as described above, and if the value is greater than 0, the eight effects continue Represents the

  When the value of the eight effect counter 223v is larger than 0, that is, in the state where eight effects are continuing (S4803: Yes), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the eight effect counter 223v is not larger than 0, that is, when the value of the eight effect counter 223v is 0 (S4803: No), the eight effect flag 223i is set to off (S4804) Next, it is determined whether the number of held items is greater than four (S4805).

  If the number of held pieces is more than 4 (S4805: Yes), the special continuation effect flag 223t is set to ON (S4806), then 5 is set to the value of the special continuation effect counter 223w (S4807), and this processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, when the number of holdings is not more than 4 (in the case of 4 or less) (S4805: No), the additional effect flag 223u is set to OFF (S4811), and this processing is ended.

  Return to S4801 and continue the explanation. If the eight effect flag 223i is not on (S4801: No), it is determined whether the special continuation effect flag 223t is set to on (S4808). When the special continuation effect flag 223t is not set to ON (S4808: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when the special continuation effect flag 223t is set to ON (S4808: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the special continuation effect counter 223w is larger than 0 (S4809).

  If the value of the special continuation effect counter 223w is larger than 0 (S4809: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, when the value of the special continuation effect counter 223w is not larger than 0 (when the value of the special continuation effect counter 223w is 0) (S4809: No), the special continuation effect flag 223t is set to OFF (S4810) The additional effect flag 223u is set to off (S4811). Then, the process ends.

  As described above, in the process of setting eight items during production, it is determined based on the number of reserved symbols (number of reserved memories) whether to perform eight effects, special continuation effects, and additional winning effects. The various flags to be referenced are set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 144, synchronization effect management processing 2 (S1354) executed in the main processing 2 (see FIG. 133) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the synchronization effect management process 2 (S1354). The synchronization effect management process 2 (S1354) is a process of setting the effect mode (A to D) based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292, and the synchronization effect management process executed in the second embodiment described above One effect mode to be set is added to (S1314).

  In synchronization effect management process 2 (S1354), an effect time setting process (S1751) is first executed. In the effect time setting process (S1751), the time setting process 2 (S1251 in FIG. 132) executed in the start-up process 2 (FIG. 131) executed after the power is turned on by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. Using the activation flag 223α set to ON and the identification number stored in the identification number storage area in the identification number input process (S1851 in FIG. 135) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. , It is the processing which sets up production time.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 145, the rendering time setting process (S1751) will be described. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing effect time setting processing (S1751).

  In the presentation time setting process, first. It is determined whether the rendering time has already been set (S4901). If the effect time has already been set (S4901: YES), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the effect time is not set (S4901: No), it is then determined whether the start flag is set to ON (S4902). If the activation flag is set to ON (S4902: YES), this process ends. On the other hand, when the start flag is not set to ON (S4902: No), the process proceeds to S4903 described later.

  That is, in S4902, it is possible to determine that the period in which the identification number can be assigned to the pachinko machine 10 has elapsed, based on the state of the activation flag 223α, and to assign the identification number to the pachinko machine 10 After a certain period has passed, the presentation time is set. In the identification number input process (S1851 in FIG. 135), when the activation flag is turned off without the identification number being input, the identification number stored in the identification number storage area 223x as an initial setting is used.

  After it is determined in S4902 that the activation flag is not set to ON, the identification number stored in the identification number storage area 223x is acquired (S4903), and the effect time corresponding to the identification number is selected for the effect time selection table Select from (222b). Then, the selected effect time is stored in the effect time storage area 223y (S4905), and this processing is ended.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 125, the presentation time selection table (222b) used in S4904 is the day of the week created based on the identification number stored in the identification number storage area 223x and the time information acquired from the RTC 292. The presentation time is configured to be selectable with reference to the data. By using such a presentation time selection table 222b, it is not necessary to change the identification number every day if you want to change the presentation time every day because the time for which the presentation time is provided is changed only by changing the day of the week. It is possible to reduce the change work.

  Moreover, although two event days are set other than normal day-of-week data based on the time information acquired from RTC292, if it is a parameter that can be created based on the time information acquired not only by this but according to RTC292 Other parameters may be referenced. Other parameters may be considered, such as a parameter for separating even dates from odd days, a parameter for identifying holidays, and a parameter for identifying dates having the same month and day.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the rendering time is set with reference to two parameters of the day of the week data and the identification number, but the rendering time may be set by referring to three or more parameters. By doing this, more complicated combinations can be easily provided.

  In the present embodiment, as an operator can input an identification number as a parameter that can be set, synchronous rendering (time can be performed at the same timing for a plurality of predetermined units (for example, adjacent pachinko machines 10). Although the effect can be performed, other parameters that can be set by the operator may be provided.

Moreover, although the parameter (day data) based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292 is used as the parameter set by the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, other parameters may be provided. For example, it is preferable to set a parameter based on the game information (the number of times of big hit and the number of payouts) of the previous day of the pachinko machine 10. It is good to do. By configuring in this way,
In addition to the frame button 22 as a means for the operator to set and input parameters, an input means such as a touch panel type input means or a selection button (cross button) for selecting information displayed on the display screen is pachinko You may provide in the machine 10. By providing such input means, complicated setting inputs can be easily operated. In addition, such input means may be used for the display effect of the pachinko machine 10.

  Referring back to FIG. 144, the description will be continued. After the rendering time setting process (S1751 in FIG. 145) is performed, the processes in S1701 to S1705 are performed in the same manner as the synchronous rendering management process (S1314 in FIG. 77) executed in the second embodiment described above. finish. On the other hand, when the rendering mode is not set to the rendering mode A in S1702, it is determined whether the rendering mode is set to the rendering mode B or the rendering mode D (S1752).

  If it is determined that the rendering mode B or the rendering mode D is not set (S1752: No), the processing of S1709 and S1710 is performed as in the second embodiment described above, and the present processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the effect mode B or the effect mode D (S1752: Yes), it is determined whether the time information (data) acquired from the RTC 292 is time information for which 4 minutes and 57 seconds have elapsed since the start of the time effect. (S1753).

  As the determination of S1753, the elapsed time may be calculated by comparing the time when the time effect is started with the current time, or four minutes in advance in the time table of the effect time (see FIG. 125 (b)). The timing after the second may be set, and it may be determined whether the timing (time) has passed. Furthermore, without acquiring time information from the RTC 292, a timer may be provided to start timing from the timing at which the time effect is started, and a configuration may be used to clock 4 minutes and 57 seconds using the timer.

  If the time information acquired from the RTC 292 has not passed 4 minutes and 57 seconds since the start of the time presentation (S1753: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the time information acquired from the RTC 292 has passed 4 minutes and 57 seconds since the start of the time presentation (S1753: Yes), it is determined whether the current time presentation period is 5 minutes (S1754).

  If the time effect period is 5 minutes (S1754: Yes), that is, if the effect mode is the effect mode C, the process of S1708 is performed as in the second embodiment described above, and the process ends. On the other hand, when the time effect period is not 5 minutes (S1754: No), that is, when the effect mode is the effect mode D, the extension effect setting process 2 is executed (S1755), and the present process is ended.

  Next, the extension effect setting process 2 (S1755) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the extension effect setting process 2 (S1755). The extension effect setting process 2 is a process that is executed when the time effect period is not 5 minutes, that is, when the time effect period is 8 minutes, in order to extend the time effect period of 5 minutes. It is a process for performing necessary settings.

  In the extension effect setting process 2 (S1755), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (S5001). When it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S5001: Yes), the normal period flag 223m is set to ON (S5002), the rendering mode is set to the rendering mode A (S5003), and then this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (S5001: No), it is determined whether the time effect period (synchronization effect period) has ended (S5004). If the time effect period has not ended (S5004: No), it is then determined whether five minutes have elapsed since the start of the time effect (S5005). If 5 minutes have not elapsed since the start of the time effect (S5005: No), the re-variation effect is set (S5008), and this process is ended.

  That is, S5008 is determined in S1753 of FIG. 144 that 4 minutes and 57 seconds have elapsed since the start of the time effect, and 5 minutes have passed since the time effect was started in S5005 of FIG. 146. This process is performed when it is determined that the time is not determined, and is a process of setting a re-variation effect performed between 4 minutes and 57 seconds to 5 minutes after the time effect is started.

  The re-variation effect is the same as that of the second embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that five minutes have elapsed since the start of the time effect at S5005 (S5005: Yes), the extension effect flag is set to ON (S5006), and then the effect mode is the effect mode D Is set (S5007), and the process ends.

  Return to S5004 and continue the explanation. If it is determined in S5004 that the time effect period has ended (S5004: Yes), the normal period flag 223m is set to ON (S5009), and then the effect mode is set to effect mode A (S5010). Next, it is determined whether or not there is winning information in the winning information storage area 223a (S5011).

  The winning information storage area 223a stores the on-off results of the on-off determination and the on-off determination results, and a maximum of nine determination results are stored.

  When there is no jackpot information in the winning information storage area 223a (S5011: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, when there is information of the big hit in the winning information storage area 223a (S5011: Yes), the time until the fluctuation that becomes the big hit is finished is calculated, and that time is taken as the extension effect time to the extension effect time storage area 223q. It sets (S5012).

  Thereafter, the re-change effect is set (S5013), the extension effect flag 223p is set to ON (S5014), and the effect mode is set to the effect mode C (S5015). Then, the process ends.

  The synchronization effect management process 2 described above is the synchronization effect management process executed in the second embodiment described above in that the extension effect setting process 2 is performed as a process related to the effect mode D newly added in this embodiment. The processing is different from the processing (S1314 in FIG. 77), and the other processing is the same.

  In the present embodiment, even if the effect mode D, that is, even if the time effect period is 8 minutes, as in the other effect modes, if the time effect approaches 5 minutes (after 4 minutes and 57 seconds have elapsed), FIG. As shown in (a), a sign display mode is displayed in which the effect pattern is displayed with a slight shaking for 3 seconds (up to 5 minutes). Therefore, it is possible to make the same effect as in the case of the other pachinko machine 10 for which the effect mode B is set, and to enhance the sense of unity of the effect when the time effect period is 5 minutes elapsed. In addition, since only the pachinko machine 10 for which the rendering mode C or the rendering mode D is selected performs the extended rendering after the plurality of pachinko machines 10 perform the re-variation rendering at the same timing, the rendering mode C or the rendering A player playing the pachinko machine 10 in which the mode D is selected can feel the sense that his / her pachinko machine 10 has been selected and can be immersed in a sense of superiority.

  In the control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment described above, in the control relating to synchronous rendering, by using the time information acquired from the RTC 292, it is possible to perform rendering with a sense of unity in a plurality of pachinko machines 10 However, for example, in the case of enjoying the synchronization effect with only two adjacent units, the predetermined operation is performed by simultaneously performing the predetermined operation on the frame button 22 without using the RTC 292. The time effect may be started from. By configuring in this way, it is possible to enjoy the time effect at any time you like and to control the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

  In addition, although the effect data (display mode) dedicated to time effect is used in this embodiment, the effect data for time effect is set from among the effect data (effect data in the normal state) also used outside the time effect period. You may use it. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the amount of effect data. When such a configuration is used, it is preferable to provide a means for limiting the effect data set as the effect data for time effect to not be displayed outside the time effect period (in the normal state). In addition, the synchronization methods of the effect modes described above may be combined respectively.

Regarding Control Processing of Display Control Device 114 in Fourth Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 147 and 148, among the controls executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the respective controls executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 according to the second embodiment described above are different. I will explain the point. In this embodiment, eight commands are produced in the processing when the command regarding the special continuation effect or the additional effect is received in the hold command process 2 (S2461 in FIG. 147) and the effect command process 2 (S2463 in FIG. 148). It differs in the point in which the process at the time of receiving the production | command command regarding special continuation presentation or an additional presentation is added. The same parts as the respective controls executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 according to the second embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 147, pending command processing 2 (S2461) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 147 is a flowchart of the hold command process 2 (S2461).

  When the pending command process 2 (S2461) is executed, the processes from S2801 to S2807 are executed as in the second embodiment described above. When it is determined in S2805 that eight received commands are not effects (S2805: No), it is determined whether the received commands are special continuation effects (S2851). If it is determined that the received command is a special continuation effect (S2851: Yes), the corresponding holding symbol is changed to a special continuation effect symbol and set in the display data table (S2852).

  On the other hand, when the received command is not the special continuation effect (S2851: No), it is determined whether the received command is the additional effect (S2853). If it is determined that the received command is not an additional effect (S2853: No), the setting of other hold display is executed (S2807), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when the received command is the additional effect (S2853: Yes), the corresponding held symbol is changed to the additional effect symbol and set in the display data table (S2854). Then, the setting of other hold display is executed (S2807), and this processing is ended. In addition, a change to an additional production pattern is changing to the "?" Symbol shown in FIG. 111 (b).

  The hold command processing 2 in the present embodiment is configured to process and set a reception command related to the number of holdings and a reception command related to an effect using a held symbol at different timings. That is, even if both the command related to the number of held and the command related to the effect using the held symbol are stored in the command buffer area, the command determination processing (S2302 in FIG. 86) is performed after processing the command related to the number of held first. After looping, perform processing of the command related to the effect using the hold symbol. By configuring in this way, when the holding symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, a normal holding symbol is displayed once, and the holding symbol displayed thereafter is the effect symbol It is possible to make sure that the display changes in Therefore, the player can visually grasp that the holding symbol has increased and the increased holding symbol has changed to the effect symbol.

  The above-described configuration can achieve further effects by being executed with eight effects performed in the present embodiment. That is, eight effects performed in the present embodiment are effects that can be executed when the number of held pieces reaches eight, and one effect aspect (character string) is displayed using eight held symbols. (FIG. 111 (a)). When performing such a holding symbol effect, if the process of displaying the eighth holding symbol and the process of displaying eight effects are simultaneously performed, the seven symbols are displayed on the third symbol display screen. There was a risk that the display would be suddenly displayed so as to switch to eight effects. When the change of the hold display is performed as described above, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize that the eighth hold symbol has occurred. On the other hand, even if both the command related to the number of held and the command related to the effect using the held symbol are stored in the command buffer area as in this embodiment, after processing the command related to the number of held first, By processing the command related to the effect using the holding symbol after looping the command determination processing (S2302 in FIG. 86), the processing of the command related to the number of holdings and the processing of the command related to the effect using the holding symbol are time lag Can be provided to prevent the problems described above.

  In addition, about the period which displays the 8th holding symbol, it is sufficient if the player can recognize the increase display of the holding symbol (20 milliseconds or more), and if necessary, the 8th holding symbol can be displayed. A process may be provided in which a temporal delay is provided (the timing of displaying the eight effects is delayed) after the eight effects are displayed after being displayed.

  In addition, it is preferable to include display data in which eight ordinary reserved symbols are displayed at the beginning of the display data regarding the eight rendering symbols set in the display data table in S2806 in FIG. In this way, when processing and displaying commands relating to eight effects, it becomes possible to reliably display eight normal reserved symbols.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 148, effect command processing 2 (S2463) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing effect command processing 2 (S2463). This effect command processing 2 is a point in which processing corresponding to the command of eight effects, special continuation effects, and additional effects is added to the effect command processing (S2413 in FIG. 90) executed in the second embodiment described above And the other parts are the same, so the description will be omitted.

  First, when the effect command process 2 (S2463) is executed, it is the same as the effect command process (S2413) executed in the second embodiment described above. The processes of S2901 to S2904 are executed. When it is determined in S2903 that the effect is not a pseudo-extended effect (S2903: No), it is determined whether the received command is eight effects, a special continuation effect, or an additional effect (S2951) . If the eight effects, the special continuation effect, or the additional effect are not included (S2951: No), the processes of S2907 to S2912 are executed as in the second embodiment described above, and the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined at S 2951 that the received command is any of eight effects, special continuation effects, or additional effects (S 2951: Yes), eight effects corresponding to the commands, special continuation effect Or set the display data table of the additional effect in the display data table buffer.

  In the present embodiment, the technology for variously setting the effect display related to the variation of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 has been described based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292, but the control of voice and lamp Only may be performed based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292. By doing this, the player can play a game intensively in order to feel some sense of discomfort, and the motivation for the game can be enhanced.

  Further, in addition to the effect display relating to the change of the third symbol, the effect display may be variously set based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292. For example, in the effects relating to the jackpot game, the start timing of the jackpot video and jackpot sound to be executed may be controlled by the time information acquired from the RTC 292. Specifically, a bonus game to be executed when the result of the determination performed based on the ball entering the winning opening (ball entrance) is the determination result of providing a predetermined benefit (big hit) The timing at which the bonus effect (big hit video, big hit sound (BGM), etc.) provided as a bonus game is started is predetermined timing (eg, 00 seconds per minute) based on the time information acquired from the clock means (RTC 292) Control to achieve the following timing). By configuring in this way, even if the adjacent pachinko machine 10 becomes a big hit with a slight time difference (for example, a time difference of about 30 seconds), the jackpot effect (video and audio) executed during the jackpot game is synchronized. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect with a sense of unity even during the jackpot game.

  Furthermore, by synchronizing the timing of an effect (informing whether or not to become a definite change state after the end of the big hit game) of reporting the gaming state after the big hit game performed during the big hit game, a more integrated feeling is achieved It becomes possible to offer.

  Further, when synchronizing the effects in the big hit game in this way based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292, even if the contents of the effects (video and sound) in the big hit game are made different between adjacent pachinko machines 10 Good. For example, by providing a female pattern and a male pattern as voices during the big hit game, effects of different contents are combined by the synchronization effects during the big hit game, and it is possible to provide a more integrated effect.

  In addition, in this embodiment, in order to perform an effect with a sense of unity by the adjacent pachinko machine 10, although the technique based on the time information acquired from RTC292 is used, you may employ | adopt techniques other than that. For example, a notification unit that informs the pachinko machine 10 of information based on the game in a discriminable manner (information indicating that a jackpot game is in progress, and information indicating that a judgment result indicating that the judgment result is a big hit is held in a distinguishable manner) A display unit) and a detection unit (light detection sensor) for detecting the notification mode of the notification unit, and the information notified to the notification unit by the pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the pachinko machine 10 adjacent to the pachinko machine 10 Even when the detection unit detects information based on the game of the adjacent pachinko machine 10 can be determined, and based on the result of the determination, it is possible to execute an effect in which the adjacent pachinko machines 10 are synchronized with each other. Good. With such a configuration, for example, it is possible to synchronize and execute an effect such as one of the jackpots in the adjacent pachinko machine 10.

Fifth Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 149 to 159, a pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, display control in which the configuration of the distribution unit 1164 is related to the fourth embodiment in which the configuration of the distribution unit 1164 is described, the third symbol display device 81 (main screen) and the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub screen) is performed. The other configuration is the same as that of each embodiment described above. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  The difference between the configuration of the distribution unit 1164 according to the fifth embodiment and the fourth embodiment is as follows. The configuration in which the balls entering the distribution unit 1164 are distributed in three directions, and the through gate 67 (1067) In that the distribution unit 1164 is provided.

  In addition, to describe in detail the difference from the third embodiment in the display control of the fifth embodiment, the pseudo variable display is displayed on the sub liquid crystal based on the determination result of the propriety determination result stored on hold. Differs in that display control is performed and that the display contents displayed by the main liquid crystal and the sub liquid crystal can be switched.

  FIG. 149 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 149, below the variable display device unit 80 provided on the front surface of the game board 13, a distribution unit 1164 in which a ball can enter is disposed. The balls having entered the distribution unit 1164 are configured to be distributed to a first winning opening 1964a, a left second winning opening 1964b, or a through gate 1067 described later.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 150, the configuration of distribution unit 1164 will be described. FIGS. 150 (a) and 150 (b) are diagrams showing the internal structure of the distribution unit 1164. FIG. The structure of the two distribution members 1900 and 1950 provided inside the distribution unit 1164 is the same as the distribution member 900 used in the fourth embodiment described above, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. Note that different reference numerals are given for the convenience of describing the present embodiment.

  First, the flow when a ball enters the sorting unit 1164 will be described using FIG. 150 (a). The ball entered into the distribution unit 1164 passes through the ball entry sensor 1164 and the ball is accommodated in the housing portion 1900c of the first distribution member 1900 provided at the upper portion in the distribution unit 1164 and the distribution member is distributed by its own weight The liquid flows downward while rotating 1900 clockwise, is guided by the guiding member 1900 z 2, and is accommodated in the accommodation portion 1950 c of the second distribution member 1950.

  The ball housed in the housing portion 1950c of the second distribution member 1950 flows down while rotating the second distribution member 1950 clockwise by its own weight, and enters the first winning opening 1964a. Next, the ball entered into the distribution unit 1164 is accommodated in the accommodation portion 1900a of the first distribution member, and is allowed to flow down while rotating the first distribution member 1900 counterclockwise, being guided by the induction member 1900z1, and the through gate 1067 pass. The ball having passed through gate 1067 passes through a hole (not shown) provided on the surface of gaming board 13 and flows down to the back surface of pachinko machine 10.

  Then, the ball entered into the distribution unit 1164 is accommodated in the housing portion 1900c of the first distribution member, and is allowed to flow down while rotating the first distribution member 1900 clockwise, and is guided to the guiding member 1900z2, and the second distribution It is accommodated in the accommodation portion 1950 a of the member 1950.

  The ball housed in the housing portion 1950a of the second distribution member 1950 flows down while rotating the second distribution member 1950 counterclockwise by its own weight, and enters the left second winning opening 1964b. Then, the ball that has entered the distribution unit 1164 next follows the same path as the flow passing through the above-mentioned through gate 1067 and passes through the through gate 1067.

  As described above, the sorting unit 1164 used in the present embodiment repeats the sorting in the order of the first winning opening 1964a → through gate 1067 → left second winning opening 1964 b → through gate 1067. Is configured as.

  Thus, by providing a plurality of winning openings and through gates in one distribution unit 1164, it becomes possible to make the installation space of various devices (winning openings, through gates, etc.) provided on the game board surface compact. Furthermore, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 10 that improves the interest of the game further by performing decoration and presentation using the vacant space on the game board surface.

  Furthermore, in the distribution unit 1164 in the present embodiment, balls are distributed in three directions by providing two distribution members having the same configuration as the distribution member 900 used in the distribution unit 1064 of the fourth embodiment described above. Therefore, according to the playability of the pachinko machine 10, it becomes possible to adopt the same distribution member in the case of making the distribution of balls in the distribution unit in 2 directions and the case of making the distribution in 3 directions in the distribution unit. It becomes possible.

  Although the distribution unit 1164 in this embodiment uses a configuration in which the ball distribution destination is changed according to the weight of the flowing ball, it is also possible to use a configuration in which the ball distribution destination is changed using an electrical drive source. Good.

  Further, in the distribution unit 1164 in the present embodiment, the ratio of being distributed to the first winning opening 1964a, the left second winning opening 1964b, and the through gate 1067. Although one-to-one-to-two is used, a configuration may be used in which all the components are uniformly distributed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a ball entry detection sensor 1164 for detecting a ball entering the sorting unit 1164 is provided. This is used for control to detect ball clogging in the sorting unit 1164, and the ball entering the sorting unit 1164 passes through the gate 1067, the first winning opening 1964a or the left second winning opening within a predetermined time. This control is performed by determining which one of 1964b has entered the ball. A detection sensor (not shown) is provided in each of through gate 1067, first winning opening 1964a and left second winning opening 1964b for detecting that a ball has entered (passed).

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the through gate 1067 is used to detect an action of illegally operating the distributing members 1900 and 1950 provided in the distributing unit 1164 and guiding the ball entering the distributing unit 1164 to a specific location. The order in which the first winning opening 1964a or the left second winning opening 1964b has entered (passed) is stored, and compared with the entering order mechanically distributed by the distributing unit 1164, is there no fraudulent activity? It is determined.

  In addition, when the detection sensor which detects the ball which entered the ball to the left second winning opening 1964b and the right second winning opening 640 collectively is provided, the ball can enter the right second winning opening 640 In the gaming state (during a short time, a definite change, etc.), it is controlled so as not to judge the above-mentioned fraudulent act. By doing this, it is possible to restrict the pivoting of the distributing members 1900 and 1950 and easily discover the action of causing the gaming ball to continuously enter the specific location (for example, the left second winning opening 1964b). it can.

  Moreover, in order to prevent the above-mentioned fraudulent behavior, it is good to comprise so that a ball can flow down only if the distribution members 1900 and 1950 rotate. Specifically, in the distribution unit 1164 shown in FIG. 150 (a), there is formed a location where the distance between the top of the wall surface constituting the accommodating portion of the distribution member and the inner wall of the distribution unit 1164 is less than one ball. The distribution unit 1164 may be configured to By configuring in this manner, the ball can not flow down the inside of the distribution unit 1164 unless the distribution member rotates, so the action of causing the ball to flow down to a specific location in a state in which the rotation of the distribution member is regulated. Can be prevented.

  Next, effect control displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 151 is a time chart for illustrating the flow of the special symbol variation effect performed using the third symbol display device 81 (main screen) and the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub screen) described later. As shown in FIG. 151, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment displays the fact that the game ball has won a prize at the entrance, and the main variation (variation based on the variation pattern command) displayed in variation linked with the variation of the special symbol. It is configured to be able to execute the prior pseudo-variation that is variably displayed based on the winning command shown.

  First, the variation period of the special symbol shown in FIG. 151 is a period in which the special symbol is variably displayed by the first symbol display device 37. The fluctuation period of the special symbol corresponding to each of the prize 1 to the prize 5 described later is shown as the fluctuation 1 to the fluctuation 5. The number of balls reserved for special symbol is the number holding the determination result of the special symbol, and the ball wins the first ball entry or the second ball entry during the change of the special symbol or the jackpot game Increase and decrease with the start of new special symbol fluctuations.

  The winning combination indicates whether or not the ball has won the first ball entry or the second ball entry. In FIG. 151, for convenience of explanation, the ball that has won the first place is shown as prize 1, following prize 2, prize 3, prize 4, and prize 5.

  In addition, while the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance is configured to make a hit or absence judgment of the big hit game by the ball entering the ball, it is configured to pay out the winning balls, but the hit or not judgment of the big hit game Is not performed when the number of entering balls exceeds the number of pending storages. On the other hand, the payout of the winning balls is executed for all entering balls. Here, a ball enters each ball entry port, and indicates what can receive a payout of a winning ball as a ball entry, and a ball enters each ball entry port and wins a thing that can receive a hit or not judgment of a big hit game And show the explanation below.

  On the lower side of the time chart in FIG. 151, the third symbol fluctuation 1 which is the fluctuation display of the third symbol dynamically displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (main screen) and the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub screen) To 3rd symbol variation 5 is shown.

  The third symbol variation is composed of the main variation corresponding to the variation of the special symbol and the prior pseudo variation corresponding to the reception timing of the winning command, and the third symbol display device 81 performs the main variation, the spherical liquid crystal device At 670, it is configured to be able to execute pre-simulation.

  The pre-pseudo-fluctuation determines the contents of the fluctuation of the third symbol based on the information contained in the winning command, and the period before the start of this fluctuation (the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display whose fluctuation has already been started, The third symbol is to be simulated in a pseudo manner using the period in which the variation time corresponding to the retention symbol previously stored on hold is combined.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 151, winning of a ball and fluctuation timing of the third symbol will be described. First, when winning 1 occurs while the number of balls reserved for special symbols is 0, the variation (variation 1) of the special symbol is started, and the main variation of the third symbol is started by the third symbol display device 81. (The third variation of the third symbol variation 1). Then, when a prize 2 occurs while the variation 1 is being performed, the number of balls reserved for the special symbol increases to one. Based on the occurrence of the winning 2, the prior pseudo-variation of the third symbol variation 2 is started in the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub screen). Thereafter, when winning 3 occurs, the number of special symbol holding balls increases to 2 and the prior pseudo-variation of the third symbol variation 3 is generated, but the ball liquid crystal device 670 (sub screen) continues the third symbol variation 2 The prior pseudo-variation is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, when the prior artificial fluctuation occurs in duplicate, the prior artificial fluctuation corresponding to the holding symbol selected by the player is displayed on the spherical liquid crystal device 670, and the player does not select the holding symbol. Then, it is configured to display, in the spherical liquid crystal device 670, the prior pseudo-variation corresponding to the reserved symbol for which this variation starts. In the drawing, the case where the player does not select the hold symbol will be described. Therefore, also at the timing when the winning 3 occurs, the prior pseudo variation of the third symbol variation 2 based on the winning 2 for which the main variation is started next is displayed.

  Note that the method of displaying the prior pseudo-variation on the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub screen) is not limited to the display method of the present embodiment, and, for example, even if a plurality of all the prior pseudo-variations can be displayed simultaneously It is also possible to display one selected by the player from among a plurality of pre-simulated changes displayed simultaneously. In addition, only when the player selects the pre-pseudo-varying display, the pre-pseudo-swing may be displayed on the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub screen), or when the player does not select the pre-pseudo-varying display. Alternatively, a pre-pseudo-variation display may be displayed that corresponds to the held symbol for which the jackpot expectation level is high (pre-reading effect).

  And, at the timing when the variation 1 of the special symbol ends and the variation 2 starts, the number of holding balls of the special symbol decreases by one, and the third symbol variation 2 at the third symbol display device 81 (main screen) Main fluctuation of the third symbol fluctuation 3 is started in the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub screen). At this timing, the third symbol variation 2 switches from the prior pseudo variation performed on the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub screen) to the main variation performed on the third symbol display device, but in the present embodiment, In order to eliminate the sense of incongruity in the switching of the display, an effect is produced in which the fluctuation display of the prior pseudo fluctuation fades out in accordance with the timing at which the previous pseudo fluctuation is completed (the timing at which the last main fluctuation stops). By doing this, it is possible to continue without discomfort the effect of the prior pseudo-variation performed by the spherical liquid crystal device 670 and the effect of the main fluctuation performed by the third symbol display device. Moreover, the sense of incongruity is also eliminated by making the background on which the third symbol variation is performed the same as the previous pseudo variation and the main variation. The same processing is performed thereafter.

  Below, with reference to FIG. 152 and FIG. 153, the display screen in which the prior pseudo | simulation fluctuation | variation of the 3rd symbol fluctuation and this fluctuation | variation are performed is demonstrated. FIG. 152 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the main variation is performed by the third symbol display device 81 which is the main screen and the pre-simulated variation is performed by the spherical liquid crystal device 670 which is the sub screen.

  The third symbol display device 81 (hereinafter referred to as the main screen) performs the variable display of the third symbol in the main display area Dm as in the second embodiment described above, and displays the retention symbol in the sub display area Ds. Etc., and the description of the same content is omitted.

  In the main screen in the present embodiment, a mark (black circle) for identifiably displaying the reserved symbol corresponding to the currently performed prior pseudo-variation is displayed on the reserved symbol displayed in the sub display area Ds. There is. In FIG. 152 (a), it is indicated that the preliminary pseudo-variation corresponding to the holding symbol "1" is being performed in the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (hereinafter referred to as a sub screen). By using such a configuration, the player can easily grasp which of the plurality of holding symbols has been subjected to the prior pseudo-variation corresponding to which holding symbol. In addition, the retention symbol "3" is displayed in a mode different from other retention symbols, and indicates that the jackpot expectation is high.

  Further, "screen switching push" is displayed on the right side of the sub display area Ds. This is a display for notifying the player that the display contents of the main screen and the sub screen can be switched. The configuration for switching the display of the main screen and the sub screen will be described later.

  FIG. 152 (b) is a schematic view showing a state in which a preliminary pseudo change is performed on the main screen and a main change is performed on the sub screen. 152 (b) is displayed on the image displayed on the main symbol and the sub symbol by operating the frame button 22 and executing the screen switching operation in the state where FIG. 152 (a) is displayed. Images are switched. Specifically, the image data displayed in the main display area Dm of the main screen and the image data displayed in the sub screen are switched, and as shown in the figure, the display of the sub display area Ds is shown in FIG. Same as). In this manner, by switching the contents displayed on the main screen and the sub screen by the operation of the player, the player can select an effect that he / she is interested in and can view the effect on the main screen It will be.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 105, the main screen has about six times the size of the sub screen, and the variable display displayed on the main screen is overwhelmingly more powerful Can be provided. In this pachinko machine having screens of different sizes, the use of the present configuration allows the player to be interested in a plurality of fluctuation displays (this fluctuation and the prior pseudo fluctuation) simultaneously executed. Since the display can be selected and the selected variable display can be displayed on the main screen, it is possible to provide the player with a desired presentation on a more powerful screen.

  FIG. 153 (a) is a schematic view showing a state in which a preliminary pseudo change is performed on the main screen and a main change is performed on the sub screen. FIG. 153 (a) is one in which the player changes the target of the prior pseudo change from the holding symbol "1" to the holding symbol "3" in the state where FIG. 152 (b) is displayed. Note that the holding symbol to be subjected to the prior artificial variation is configured to be selectable by the player operating the frame button 22, and a mark (black circle) is displayed on the holding symbol "3" selected by the player. Is attached.

  Then, on the main screen, the prior pseudo-variation corresponding to the held symbol "3" is displayed, and the mode "chance!" Indicating that the jackpot's expectation is high is displayed.

  FIG. 153 (b) is a schematic view showing a state in which the main change using the reserved symbol to be subjected to the prior pseudo change selected in FIG. 153 (a) is performed on the main screen. As shown in the figure, the main variation using the reserved symbol selected as the target of the prior pseudo variation starts, and when the pre pseudo variation ends, the main variation is displayed on the main screen. The display contents of the display screen are configured to be switched automatically. In addition, an aspect “chance!” Indicating that the expectation of the jackpot is high, which is displayed from during the preliminary pseudo change display, is continuously displayed also in the present change display. By this configuration, even if the pre-pseudo fluctuation is changed to the main fluctuation, it is possible to provide an effect with continuity, and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused. .

  In addition, in this figure, since a reservation symbol does not exist, the prior pseudo | simulation change display is not performed in a subscreen. As described above, when the prior pseudo change display is not performed, the sub screen may be used as an effect of the main change display displayed on the main screen.

  As described above, the pre-variation display and the main fluctuation display, which are executed by the main screen and the sub-screen, have been described using schematic views of each screen, but the following effects can be considered as effects to be displayed on each screen .

  First, even if the display time of the variable display is set short, that is, even if the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set short, it is sufficient to ask the player whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or not. In order to make it possible, in the pre-pseudo-fake effect, an effect that indicates the expectation of the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol (for example, a comment display effect that suggests a stop symbol of the third symbol, or a character's equipment is selected and decided Perform anticipation indication to become an effect to be displayed, and in this variation effect, perform a result display effect as an effect that displays the lottery result (an effect that only the third symbol stops or an effect that the character attacks the enemy) .

  In order to increase the efficiency of the game by performing such effects, even if the main fluctuation time is set short, the player can obtain the lottery result of the special symbol by performing the expectation degree suggestion effect by the prior pseudo fluctuation effect. You can wait while enjoying what is displayed.

  Second, when the display mode of the hold symbol displayed on the third display device 81 is selected, in order to allow the player to experience the effect desired by the player for a long time. In the display mode (for example, a plurality of characters are displayed) suggesting the content of the displayed prior pseudo-variation, the character displayed on the selected holding symbol appears by the player selecting a desired holding symbol. The effect to be displayed is displayed in advance by pseudo-variation.

  By performing such an effect, the player can enjoy the desired effect as the prior simulated change effect while performing the lottery game of the special symbol as usual. In addition, since the desired effect is provided using the prior pseudo change effect, not the actual change effect, it is possible to experience the desired effect for a long time.

  It should be noted that it is possible to achieve further effects by setting that the character appearing in the pre-pseudo virtual variation production will also appear in the main variation production using the holding symbol corresponding to the pre-pseudo virtual variation production. Become.

  As mentioned above, although the prior pseudo | simulation fluctuation | variation production of this embodiment was demonstrated, you may employ | adopt structures other than the structure mentioned above if it is a structure which produces the same effect.

  For example, in the present embodiment, the display of the sub display area Ds is displayed on the main screen without switching so that the player is not confused, but the display of the sub display area Ds may also be switched. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the processing load on generation of image data in the display control device 114.

  The prior pseudo-variation used in the present embodiment includes not only the variation of the third symbol but also the aspect displayed in the main display area Dm along with the variation of the third symbol. Story development, changes in background image, etc. are also included.

  Further, the operation of switching between the main screen and the sub screen may be configured to be effective only within a predetermined period. For example, it is preferable to be able to switch the screen only while the third symbol corresponding to this variation is performing high-speed variation. By doing this, switching of the screen is not performed in a period in which the processing relating to the game is concentrated (the period in which the processing relating to the stop display of the third symbol is performed), and the processing load on the control device can be reduced.

  In addition, in a state where the prior pseudo variation is being executed on the sub screen, the held symbol to be subjected to the prior pseudo variation may be configured to be selectable.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the preliminary pseudo variation effect corresponding to the reserved symbol of the special symbol is executed on the sub screen, but for example, the preliminary pseudo variation effect corresponding to the reserved symbol of the ordinary symbol may be performed. In particular, in pachinko machine 10 having a configuration in which the start winning combination of the special symbol and the starting winning combination of the normal symbol are regularly distributed as in the sorting unit 1164 described in the present embodiment, the holding symbol of the normal symbol is Since it is possible to maintain the predetermined number, it is possible to enjoy the prior pseudo fluctuation effect.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fifth Embodiment
Next, an electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment will be described using FIG. The present embodiment clearly shows that the spherical liquid crystal device 670 is connected to the display control device 114 and that the contents of the RAM 233 of the display control device 114 are changed in comparison with the third embodiment described above. It is different. The other points are the same as those of the third embodiment described above, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 154 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment.

  The present embodiment is different from the above-described third embodiment in that the sphere liquid crystal device 670 is clearly connected to the display control device 114. Further, in the present embodiment, a ball entry sensor 1164a shown in FIG. 150 is newly provided, but is handled as part of various switches 208.

  FIG. 155 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. The present embodiment is different from the above-described third embodiment in that a switching flag 233 o is provided in the RAM 233 of the display control device 114.

  The switching flag 233o is a flag used to determine whether to switch the display between the main screen (third symbol display device 81) and the sub screen (spherical liquid crystal device 670), and a command performed by the display control device 114 When it is determined in the determination process 2 that there is a switching command, it is set to ON (S2556 in FIG. 158), and similarly in the command determination process 2, for display to which an identification number corresponding to the prior pseudo change effect is given. If it is determined that there is a variation pattern command, it is set to off (S2554 in FIG. 158).

<Control Process Executed by the Audio Lamp Controller in the Fifth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 156 and 157, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. The fifth embodiment is different from the above-described fourth embodiment in that the pre-simulation change setting process is executed in the main process. Since the other points are the same, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, main processing 3 executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing main processing 3 in the fifth embodiment. This main process 3 executes the processes of S1301 to S1354 in the same manner as the main process 2 (see FIG. 133) in the fourth embodiment described above, and then performs the prior pseudo variation setting process (S1355) added in the present embodiment. Run. Then, as in the main process 2 described above, the processes of S1317 to S1321 are executed, and this process is repeated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 157, the prior pseudo variation setting process (S1355) will be described. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the prior artificial fluctuation setting process (S1355). The prior artificial fluctuation setting process (S1355) is a process of setting the prior artificial fluctuation to be displayed on the main screen and the sub screen based on the winning command and the operation of the player.

  When the prior pseudo variation setting process (S1355) is set, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol winning command has been received (S5101). If the special symbol winning command has not been received (S5101: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if a special symbol winning command has been received (S5101: Yes), based on the winning command, the pre-pseudo pseudo variation effect is selected (S5102).

  In S5102, it is analyzed whether the information included in the winning command is the jackpot, out-of-range super reach, or out-of-out, and a predetermined change pattern is selected from the change pattern selection table 222a based on the analysis result. In addition, the fluctuation pattern selection table 222 of the present embodiment also stores a plurality of fluctuation patterns of the prior pseudo fluctuation effect. Then, the selected fluctuation pattern is temporarily stored in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  Next, it is determined whether there is a selection of a holding symbol (S5103). This is to determine whether the player is selecting and operating the holding symbol to be made to perform the prior pseudo variation effect from among the plurality of holding symbols, and the selection can be configured by operating the frame button 22. doing.

  In S5103, when it is determined that the holding symbol is not selected (S5103: No), the identification information corresponding to the oldest holding symbol and the prior pseudo variation effect are set (S5107). The oldest pending symbol is the pending symbol corresponding to the oldest pending storage among the information stored pending, that is, the special symbol whose fluctuation is started after the currently moving special symbol is stopped It is a holding symbol corresponding to a symbol.

  In addition, identification information is given so that individual winning combination information can be identified, and information that enables various commands created based on the winning of a ball at a ball entry opening can be linked. And is attached to the header of each command. A command (held ball number command, winning command) created in the start winning process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 by this identification information, and a special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 60) Enables the MPU 211 of the voice lamp control device 113 to associate commands such as commands (variation pattern command, stop type command) generated at different transmission timings.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S5103 that the held symbol is selected (S5103: Yes), identification information corresponding to the selected held symbol and the prior pseudo variation effect are set.

  Next, it is determined whether a switching operation has been performed (S5105). This is to determine whether or not an operation to switch the display content between the main screen and the sub screen has been made, and if it is determined that there is no switching operation (S5105: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a switching operation (S5105: Yes), a switching command is set (S5106), and this processing ends.

  Next, command determination processing 2 (S 2352) executed by the MPU 221 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 2 (S2352). The command determination process 2 (S 2352) is a process executed in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 114, but the V interrupt process has the same content as that of the second embodiment described above. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  Further, the processing from S2404 to S2417 executed in the command determination processing is executed in the other command processing (S2553) in the command determination processing 2, and the description of the contents thereof will be omitted.

  When the command determination process 2 (S2352) is executed, the processes of S2401 to S2403 are performed as in the command determination process performed in the second embodiment described above. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command to which identification information corresponding to the prior pseudo variation presentation is given (S2551). If it is determined that there is no change pattern command to which identification information corresponding to the prior pseudo change effect is given (S2551: No), it is next determined whether there is a switching command (S2552). If there is no switching command (S2552: No), other command processing is executed (S2553), and this processing is looped.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S2551 that there is a display variation pattern command to which identification information corresponding to the prior pseudo variation presentation is added (S2552: Yes), the switching flag 233o is set to OFF (S2554) ) And the preliminary pseudo-variation effect is finished (S2555). Then, the process shifts to S2552.

  If it is determined in S2552 that there is a switching command (S2552: Yes), the switching flag 233o is set to ON, and the process proceeds to S2553.

  By setting the switching flag 233o by the command determination process 2 described above, it is possible to switch the display contents of the main screen and the sub screen in the drawing process described later. In addition, the game machine changes the fluctuation time of the special symbol depending on the number of symbols held at the start of the fluctuation in order to end the prior pseudo fluctuation effect using the identification information added to the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 Even if it is, it becomes possible to execute the prior pseudo-variation just before the start of this variation.

  Next, the drawing process 2 (S2356) executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing drawing processing 2 (S2356). The drawing process 2 (S2356) is a process performed to switch the display contents of the main screen and the sub screen.

  In the drawing process 2 (S2356), first, a first drawing list is generated (S3901). The first drawing list is a drawing list relating to the fluctuation display (this fluctuation display) of the third symbol performed corresponding to the fluctuation of the special symbol. Next, a second drawing list is generated (S3902). The second drawing list is a drawing list relating to the variable display of the third symbol (pre-pseudo pseudo-variable display) set based on the special symbol winning command.

  Then, it is determined whether the switching flag 233o is set to on (S3903). If the switching flag 233o is set to ON (S3903: Yes), the first drawing list and the drawing target buffer information are transmitted to the image controller with the output destination as the sub screen (S3904). Then, with the output destination as the main screen, the second drawing list and drawing target buffer information are transmitted to the image controller (S3905). That is, when the player operates the frame button 22 to switch the display contents of the main screen and the sub screen, the switching flag is set to ON, and the image based on the first drawing list generated in S3901 is the sub screen. And the image based on the second drawing list generated in S3902 is displayed on the main screen.

  Thereafter, the drawing target buffer flag is updated (S3906), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when the switching flag 233o is not set to ON (S3903: No), the first drawing list and drawing target buffer information are transmitted to the image controller with the output destination as the main screen (S3907). Then, with the output destination as the sub screen, the second drawing list and the drawing target buffer information are sent to the image controller (S3908), and the process moves to S3906.

  By using the above-described prior pseudo-variation, it is possible to solve the problems of the prior art described below.

  Heretofore, there has been an effect of changing the mode of the holding symbol based on the information included in the winning command. By using this conventional technology, it is possible to inform the player that there is a high expectation of the result of judgment of the result of judgment of success or failure being among the held symbols stored on hold. Until the fluctuation of the special symbol based on the retention memory with high expectation which is the jackpot starts, it was necessary to keep watching the fluctuation display of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of other special symbols. Also, in recent years, pachinko machines that can receive a large number of acceptance decisions by shortening the variation time of the special symbol have also appeared, but in such a pachinko machine the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol There is a problem that the fluctuation display of the becomes short, and it is lacking in the fun of the game.

  In order to perform the prior pseudo-variation before the main fluctuation corresponding to the prize command is started, the expectation degree which is the jackpot is raised in the present embodiment based on the information included in the prize command in order to solve the problem described above. After receiving a winning command corresponding to high pending storage, display a preliminary pseudo-variation created based on the information included in the winning command even from when the main variation corresponding to the winning command is started. And the player can view the variation display of the third symbol based on the retention memory with high expectation of the jackpot from the time when the main variation of the third symbol based on other suspension memory is performed It becomes possible to become interested in the variable display of the third symbol. Furthermore, even if the main fluctuation time of the third symbol is shortened by setting the fluctuation time of the special symbol short, the fluctuation time of the third symbol based on one winning is extended by providing the prior pseudo fluctuation. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, the present invention may be implemented to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to slot machines and pachinko machines, various types of game machines may be implemented, such as arelapi and ball ball, game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols and does not include a handle for ball launch. The thing is mentioned. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  In addition, all or a part of the configurations of the above-described embodiments may be combined and implemented.

  You may comprise combining each embodiment mentioned above and the one part or all part of the modification. Moreover, although comprised with several control apparatus, you may make it comprise not only it but one integrated control apparatus.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Projection Operation Unit 400 as an Example>
In the gaming machine provided with driving means for generating driving force and a displacement member displaced by the driving force generated by the driving means, the displacement member is formed rotatably between a retracted position and a rotational position. And a relative position formed between the base side displacing member and the base side displacing member and being displaceable between the reference position and the projecting position projecting outward from the base side displacing member from the reference position A displacement member, and a first operation of rotating the base side displacement member between the retracted position and the rotational position; and a relative position of the reference position and the overhang position with respect to the base side displacement member. A game machine A1 characterized in that it is possible to execute the second operation of displacing between.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a gaming machine that effects by rotating a displacement member centering on a rotatably supported proximal end side (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-92634 ( For example, paragraphs 0175 to 0189, see FIG. 83)). According to this gaming machine, by rotating the displacement member in one direction, the tip end side of the displacement member is disposed at a predetermined position that is the front surface of the liquid crystal display device, while the displacement member is in the opposite direction to the one direction. By rotating in the other direction, the displacement member is retracted out of the display area of the liquid crystal display (retracted position). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the outer shape of the displacement member is small, it is difficult for the player to sufficiently see the displacement member at a predetermined position on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device. On the other hand, when the outer shape of the displacement member is large, a large space is required outside the display area (retracted position). The gaming machine A1 is made to solve the above-described problems, and the player can fully view the displacement member at a predetermined position while suppressing the space required for the retracted position. It aims at providing a game machine.

  That is, according to the gaming machine A1, the displacement member is disposed on the base side displacement member rotatably formed between the retracted position and the rotation position, and the reference position and the reference position thereof while being disposed on the base side displacement member And a first operation for rotating the base side displacement member between the retracted position and the rotation position, and a relative displacement member formed displaceably between the overhanging positions projecting outward from the base side displacement member. Since the second operation of displacing the relative displacement member relative to the base side displacement member between the reference position and the overhanging position can be respectively performed, the base side displacement member in the retracted position is rotated by the first operation. When arranging to the position, the relative displacement member can be made to project outward from the base side displacement member by arranging the relative displacement member at the reference position to the overhang position by the second operation. Therefore, since the displacement member can be enlarged as a whole by that amount, the displacement member can be sufficiently viewed by the player at the rotational position, and the rendering effect can be sufficiently exhibited.

  On the other hand, when disposing the base-side displacing member at the rotational position to the retracted position by the first operation, the relative displacing member at the overhanging position is disposed at the reference position by the second operation. The outward protrusion from the side displacement member can be suppressed. Therefore, since the displacement member can be reduced in size as a whole, the space required to accommodate the displacement member can be suppressed at the retracted position. As a result, it is possible to secure a space for arranging other parts and devices.

  Note that the second operation may be performed at least until it is disposed at the retracted position (ie, until the first operation is completed). Thus, at least a portion of the first operation and at least a portion of the second operation may be performed in an overlapping manner.

  The gaming machine A1 includes a front member disposed forward of a plane of movement of the displacement member and having an opening formed therein, and the relative displacement when the base side displacement member 440 is disposed at a rotational position by a first operation. When at least a portion of the member is visible to the player through the opening of the front member, and the relative displacement member is disposed at the extended position by the second operation, the front member of the relative displacement member is A game machine A2 characterized in that the area visible to the player through the opening is enlarged.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the relative displacement member evacuated to the withdrawal position is first caused to appear at the opening of the front member by rotational movement (first operation), and the relative displacement In addition to making the player visually recognize only a part of the member, next, a linear motion (second operation) performs an effect of enlarging the region where the player can visually recognize the relative displacement member through the opening of the front member. Can.

  In the gaming machine A2, the relative displacement member is disposed slidably on the base side displacement member, and the second operation is performed by setting the relative displacement member to the reference position and the overhang relative to the base side displacement member. A game machine A3 characterized by sliding displacement between positions.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, the relative displacement member is slidably disposed on the base side displacement member, and the second operation is the relative displacement member relative to the base side displacement member Since the slide displacement is performed between the reference position and the extension position, for example, the relative displacement member is stretched from the reference position as compared with the case where the second operation is a mode in which the relative displacement member is rotated relative to the base displacement member. The space required for displacing to the exit position can be reduced, and a space for disposing other parts and devices can be secured accordingly. Moreover, since the aspect of displacement of the relative displacement member by the second operation can be made different from the aspect of displacement of the base side displacement member by the first operation, the rendering effect by performing the first operation and the second operation Can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine A3, the relative displacement members are disposed on the base side displacement members in a posture along the longitudinal direction of each other, and the direction of the slide displacement is the direction along the longitudinal direction of each other A game machine A4 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, the relative displacement members are disposed in a posture in which the longitudinal directions of the base side displacement members are aligned with each other. Since the longitudinal direction is set, it is possible to expand and contract the displacement member as a whole by the slide displacement in the longitudinal direction of the relative displacement member with respect to the base side displacement member. Therefore, in the rotational position, by enlarging the displacement member as a whole by extension, the player can be sufficiently visually recognized, and the rendering effect can be sufficiently exhibited. On the other hand, at the retracted position, by shortening the displacement member as a whole by shortening, the space required to accommodate the displacement member can be suppressed, and a space for arranging other parts and devices is secured. can do.

  Further, according to the gaming machine A4, the relative displacement member evacuated to the retracted position is first caused to appear from the side of the opening of the front member by rotational movement (first operation), and a part of the relative displacement member The player is made to visually recognize only the player, and then it is made to project toward the inside of the opening of the front member by the linear motion (second operation), thereby effecting the relative displacement member to enlarge the visible region of the player. be able to. Therefore, the visible area of the relative displacement member can be enlarged by the movement form (linear movement) different from the movement form (rotational movement) at the time of appearance, and the visual observation area is enlarged by the unexpectedness due to the change of the movement form It is possible to make the player feel the sense of speed by being performed and the sense of unity of the compound operation by being continuously performed while combining these. As a result, it is possible to obtain a rendering effect that can not be achieved in a configuration in which the relative displacement member protrudes and retracts from the opening of the front member simply by linear motion (a configuration in which the retracted position and the extended position are reciprocated).

  The gaming machine A4 includes transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the displacement member, and the transmission means is disposed at a position overlapping the displacement member disposed at the retracted position in a front view A game machine A5 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4, the transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacing member is provided, and the transmitting means is in front view with the displacing member disposed at the retracted position. Since they are disposed at the overlapping position, the dead space formed on the back side of the displacement member disposed at the retracted position can be effectively utilized as the disposition space of the transmission means.

  In the gaming machine A5, the drive means, the transmission means and a holding member for holding the displacement member are provided, the drive means and the displacement member are disposed on one side of the holding member, and the displacement member is in the longitudinal direction A game machine A6 arranged at the retracted position with the drive means positioned on an extension of the above.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, the driving means and the displacement member are disposed on one side of the holding member, so for example, driving on one side and the other side across the holding member As compared with the case where the means and the displacement member are disposed, it is possible to miniaturize the dimension in the direction connecting the one surface side and the other surface side of the holding member. Furthermore, since the displacement member is disposed at the retracted position in a posture in which the drive means is positioned on the extension of the longitudinal direction, the displacement member and the drive means can be linearly arranged. Therefore, the space required as a retracted position can be efficiently suppressed.

  In any one of the game machines A1 to A6, a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the displacement member, and a holding member for holding the transmission means, the transmission member driving the drive means A predetermined position between the one side position and the other side position is pivotally supported at a position eccentric to the rotation member rotated by receiving a force and the rotation center of the rotation member, and the one side position is rotated by the holding member And a link member pivotally supported so that the other side position is connected to the relative displacement member of the displacement member, and the rotation member is rotated between the first rotational position and the intermediate rotational position. As the base side displacement member is rotated via the relative displacement member of the displacement member in accordance with the displacement of the link member, the first operation is performed, and the rotation member is rotated between the intermediate rotation position and the second rotation position. When it is rotated between Gaming machine A7, wherein a relative displacement member of the displacement member in association with the displacement of the click member is displaced relative to the base-side displacement member, the second operation is performed.

  According to the gaming machine A7, the link member pivotally supports the predetermined position between the one side position and the other side position at a position eccentric to the rotation center of the rotation member and rotates the one side position to the holding member. Since the other side position is supported and connected to the relative displacement member of the displacement member, by rotating the rotation member by the driving force of the driving means, the rotation of the rotation member is transmitted to the relative displacement member of the displacement member via the link member. It can be transmitted. In this case, when the rotation member is rotated between the first rotation position and the intermediate rotation position, the base side displacement member can be rotated via the relative displacement member of the displacement member in accordance with the displacement of the link member. Can perform an action. On the other hand, when the rotation member is rotated between the intermediate rotation position and the second rotation position, the relative displacement member of the displacement member can be displaced relative to the base side displacement member in accordance with the displacement of the link member. Can do That is, according to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, two different operations of the first operation and the second operation can be performed by one driving means, so parts cost can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the product cost accordingly.

  Also, it is conceivable that a transmission means is provided with a gear at one side position of the link member and the gear provided on the outer periphery of the rotating member is meshed with the gear to displace the link member. The space required to arrange the members and the link members is increased. On the other hand, in the gaming machine A6, since the predetermined position between the one side position and the other side position of the link member is pivotally supported by the rotation member, the rotation member and the link member can be disposed in an overlapping state in front view. The space required for the disposition of the rotating member and the link member can be reduced by the overlapping.

  Furthermore, since the relative displacement member and the holding member are connected via the transmission member, the swing of the relative displacement member can be suppressed by using the rigidity of the holding member.

  In any one of game machines A1 to A7, at least a portion of the displacement member is disposed at a position overlapping in a front view with a displacement trajectory of the displacement member when the base side displacement member of the displacement member is rotated by the first operation. A game machine A8 comprising a decorative member.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, when the base side displacement member of the displacement member is rotated by the first operation, at least the displacement member and the decoration member in front view It can be made to cross in part, and the stage effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine A8, in the displacement member, one longitudinal side of the base displacement member is the rotation center in the first operation, and the relative displacement members are longitudinal directions of each other on the front side of the base displacement member. And the second operation slide-displaces the relative displacement member between the reference position and the overhanging position with respect to the base-side displacement member, and the decoration member The displacement locus on the rotation tip side of the displacement member when the base-side displacement member is rotated by the first operation is disposed at a position where at least a portion thereof overlaps in front view, and the base When the side displacement member is disposed at the rotational position, the overlap in a front view with the displacement member is not formed, and the relative displacement member is such that the rotation center side is on the front side rather than the rotation tip side Gaming machine A9, characterized in that it is location shape.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A8, the relative displacement member disposed on the front side of the base side displacement member has a shape in which the rotation center side is located on the front side rather than the rotation tip side, Since the rotation tip end side is in the back position on the back side, when the base side displacement member is rotated by the first operation, contact between the relative displacement member and the decoration member can be suppressed. In this case, since the displacement member has the longitudinal direction one side of the base side displacement member as the rotation center in the first operation, the rotating tip end which is the free end tends to swing back and forth during the first operation and contacts the decorative member Are likely to occur. Therefore, the configuration of the gaming machine A9 is particularly effective.

  On the other hand, when sliding the relative displacement member from the reference position to the overhanging position by the second operation, the relative displacement member disposed on the front side of the base side displacement member has the front side closer to the rotation center than the front end side By having the shape positioned on the side, the relative displacement member can be disposed more forward (closer to the player) to increase the force.

  In the gaming machine A9, the shape in which the rotation center side of the relative displacement member is located on the front side relative to the rotation tip side of the relative displacement member is an arbitrary shape from the rotation tip side to the rotation center side. It may be changed stepwise, or may be changed gradually in a straight line or a curved line.

  In any one of the gaming machines A6 to A9, the pin member provided on one of the base displacement member or the relative displacement member and the other of the base displacement member or the relative displacement member so as to be able to slide displace the pin member A slide groove for receiving and enabling slide displacement of the relative displacement member relative to the base side displacement member, wherein the position at which the other side position of the link member is connected to the relative displacement member is the relative position relative to the pin member A game machine A10 characterized in that the sliding direction tip end side of the displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A6 to A9, the position at which the other side position of the link member is connected to the relative displacement member is the sliding direction leading end side of the relative displacement member than the pin member Therefore, the location where the relative displacement member is supported by the holding member via the link member can be brought closer to the sliding direction distal end side of the relative displacement member. In other words, the portion where the relative displacement member is supported by the holding member via the link member can be separated from the portion where the base side displacement member is pivotally supported by the holding member. As a result, it is possible to easily suppress the relative displacement member from swinging in the front-rear direction.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Compound Operation Unit 500 as an Example>
A gaming machine comprising a driving means for generating a driving force, a driven member driven and displaced by the driving force generated by the driving means, and a holding member for holding the driven member displaceably. The driven member includes a driven member displaceably connected to the driven member, and displacement regulating means for regulating displacement of the driven member relative to the holding member, and the displacement regulating means causes displacement of the driven member relative to the holding member. By defining, when the driven member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, the driven member is relatively displaced with respect to the driven member.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the liquid crystal display from the overhanging position which becomes the front of the liquid crystal display device and the overhanging position by the driving force from the driving means There is known a gaming machine which produces effects by displacing a displacement member between a retracted position where it is retracted out of the display area of the device (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-200790 (eg, paragraph 0095, FIG. 11 to 15)). According to this gaming machine, by switching the output direction of the drive means or intermittently setting the output, a change is given to the displacement aspect of the displacement member. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the output of the drive means is changed, which causes a problem that the control becomes complicated, while the displacement member is displaced according to the change of the output of the drive means. Since only the speed is changed and the displacement direction remains constant, there is a problem that a sufficient change is not given to the aspect of the displacement. The game machine B1 is made to solve the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of providing a change in the displacement mode of the displacement member while keeping the output of the drive means constant. Do.

  That is, according to the gaming machine B1, when the driven member is displaced by being driven by the driving force of the driving means, the displacement regulating means regulates the displacement of the driven member relative to the holding member, thereby displacing the driven member. Accordingly, the driven member can be driven while being displaced relative to the driven member. That is, even when the driven member is displaced, for example, in a linear or circular arc-like constant trajectory, the driven member can be displaced on a trajectory different from that of the driven member. Further, since the change of the aspect of the displacement is formed by relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member, even if the driven member is displaced at a constant speed, it is different from the driven member. The track can displace the driven member. Therefore, a change can be given to the aspect of displacement of the driven member while keeping the output of the drive means constant.

  In the gaming machine B1, the displacement defining means is a first groove portion formed in a groove shape in one of the driven member or the holding member, and is guided along the first groove portion and the other of the driven member or the holding member And a first guided portion formed in the game machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the displacement defining means includes the first groove and the first guided portion, and the first guided portion is guided along the first groove, The displacement of the driven member relative to the holding member can be defined. Therefore, the relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be formed according to the outline (shape) of the first groove by driving the driven member by the driving force of the driving means and displacing the driven member. That is, by setting the contour (shape) of the first groove portion, the aspect of relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be set arbitrarily. As described above, since the displacement defining means is constituted by the groove-like portion (first groove portion) and the portion (first guided portion) guided to the portion, the structure is simplified and the product cost is reduced. In addition, it is possible to improve the reliability and durability as the movable part.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the driven member is at least rotatably connected to the driven member.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in the gaming machine B1 or B2, the driven member is at least rotatably connected to the driven member, so when the driven member is relatively displaced in accordance with the displacement of the driven member. The relative angle of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be changed, and the player can be made to recognize a change in a strong impression as a change in the aspect of the displacement.

  In the gaming machine B3, the driven member is connected to the driven member in a rotatable and slidable manner.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B3, the driven member is connected to the driven member in a rotatable and slide-displaceable state, so that the driven member is relatively moved with the displacement of the driven member. When displacing, not only the relative angle of the driven member with respect to the driven member can not only be changed by rotation, but also the relative position of both can be changed by slide displacement. It is possible to increase the variation of change that can be given.

  In the gaming machine B4, the displacement defining means is guided along a second groove portion formed in a groove shape in one of the driven member or the holding member and along the second groove portion, and the other of the driven member or the holding member And a second guided portion formed in the gaming machine B5.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B4, the displacement regulating means includes the second groove and the second guided portion, and the second guided portion is guided along the second groove, The displacement of the driven member relative to the holding member can be defined. Therefore, relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be formed according to the contour (shape) of the second groove by displacing the driven member by the driving force of the driving means. That is, by setting the contour (shape) of the second groove, the aspect of the relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be arbitrarily set. In particular, when the driven member is rotatably and slidably connected to the driven member, the guide structure by the combination of the first groove portion and the first guided portion, and the combination of the second groove portion and the second guided portion By providing both of the guide structure, it is possible not only to increase the variation of the change that can be given to the aspect of the displacement, but also to make such displacements two even when the displaceable directions of the driven member with respect to the driven member are multiple. Since guidance can be performed by the guide structure, it is possible to suppress the instability of displacement and to improve the reliability as the movable member.

  Also in the gaming machine B5, as in the case described above, the displacement regulating means is constituted by the grooved portion (second groove portion) and the portion guided to the portion (second guided portion). Can be simplified to reduce the product cost and to improve the reliability and durability of the movable member.

  In the gaming machine B5, the second groove portion is formed in the holding member, the second guided portion is formed in a driven member, and the driven member is capable of rotating the second guided portion and slide displacement. The driven member has a groove-shaped connecting groove portion which is inserted in a possible state, and the driven member can be rotatably and slidably displaced on the driven member by inserting the second guided portion into the connecting groove portion. A game machine B6 characterized by being connected.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5, the second groove is formed in the holding member, the second guided portion is formed in the driven member, and the second guided portion is the driven member. By being inserted into the connection groove, the driven member is connected to the driven member in a rotatable and slidably displaceable state, so that the driven member is held by being guided to the second groove and guided to the second groove. Both the role of defining the displacement with respect to the member and the role of connecting the driven member to the driven member so as to be capable of relative displacement can be used by being inserted into the connection groove. As a result, the number of parts can be reduced to reduce the product cost, and the structure can be simplified to improve the reliability and durability of the movable member.

  In the gaming machine B6, at least a portion of the holding member in which the second groove portion is formed is interposed between the driven member and the driven member, and the driven member is the second groove portion of the holding member. A game machine B7, comprising: an abutting portion that abuts on a peripheral edge of the disc, and the abutting portion is formed in a circular shape concentric with the second guided portion.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B6, the driven member includes an abutting portion that abuts on the periphery of the second groove portion of the holding member, and the abutting portion is the second guided portion The contact area between the contact portion and the holding portion (periphery of the second groove portion) is formed even if the driven member is rotated with respect to the holding member (second groove portion). Can be suppressed to prevent the support reaction force from changing. As a result, the driven member can be displaced in a stable state.

  In any one of the game machines B1 to B7, the holding member can displace the driven member by the driving force of the driving means, and can displace the driven member according to the displacement of the driven member. In this state, the driving means, the driven member and the driven member are formed so as to be able to be held.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the holding member is capable of displacing the driven member by the driving force of the driving means, and the displacement of the driven member Accordingly, the drive means, the driven member, and the driven member are formed so as to be able to be held in a state where the driven member can be displaced. Therefore, one device in which the drive means, the driven member, and the driven member are held by the holding member Can be united as As a result, it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost when assembling the unit itself and the manufacturing cost when assembling the unit into the gaming machine main body and assembling the gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine B8, the first groove portion is formed in the holding member, and the first guided portion is formed in a driven member.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B8, the first grooved portion is formed in the holding member and the first guided portion is formed in the driven member, so that the first grooved portion is formed. It is easy to secure space. That is, a space for forming the first groove is formed by utilizing the dead space of the holding member which can not be formed into a relatively large outer shape in order to hold and unitize the driving means, the driven member and the driven member. Can be secured. Thereby, the degree of freedom of the contour (shape) and the extension length of the first groove portion can be increased, and the variation of the change that can be given to the aspect of the displacement can be increased accordingly.

  In the gaming machine B9, the displacement defining means includes a second groove portion formed in a groove shape in the holding member, and a second guided portion which is guided along the second groove portion and formed in the driven member. The holding member includes a first opposing portion and a second opposing portion facing each other with the driven member interposed therebetween, and the first groove portion is formed in one of the first opposing portion or the second opposing portion. And the second groove portion is formed in the other of the first opposing portion or the second opposing portion.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B9, the first groove portion is formed in one of the first facing portion and the second facing portion of the holding member facing each other across the driven member. Since the second groove is formed in the second groove, the first groove and the second groove can be formed without considering the formation position of the other. That is, when forming both the first groove and the second groove in one of the first opposing portion and the second opposing portion, it is necessary to form the first groove and the second groove so as not to cross each other. , Freedom is limited. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B10, in both of the first groove and the second groove, the outline (shape) and the extension length can be set without considering the positional relationship with the other. The degree of freedom can be increased, and the variation variation that can be imparted to the aspect of displacement can be increased accordingly.

  In any one of the game machines B5 to B7, a game machine B11 characterized in that at least one of the first groove and the second groove has a radius at the beginning or end larger than a reference value.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the load is reduced at the initial stage of starting the driving by the driving means of the driven member in the stopped state, and the driving is smoothed. You can get started.

  In any one of the gaming machines B5 to B7, a shielding member that shields the driven member from being visible is provided, and at least one of the first groove and the second groove is outside the region of the shielding member. The game machine B12, wherein the radius in the corresponding area is set smaller than the reference value after the exposure of the driven member from the start to the exposure of the entire driven member out of the area of the shielding member.

  According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the movement of the driven member can be made faster in the range where the shielding member partially shields the driven member. The effect that the member suddenly appears or the effect that the driven member is quickly hidden by the shielding member can be performed.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Rotation Operation Unit 600 as an Example>
A holding member, a first rotating body and a second rotating body rotatably disposed on the holding member, and a drive means for applying a rotational driving force to the first rotating body and the second rotating body In the gaming machine, a gaming machine C1 characterized in that the second rotating body is formed in an annular shape and is concentrically fitted to the first rotating body.

  Here, there is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine which produces effects by rotating a plurality of rotating bodies (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-30847 (for example, refer to paragraph 0162, FIGS. 42 to 46)). According to this gaming machine, the plurality of rotating bodies disposed apart from each other in the left and right are respectively rotated in the same direction in synchronization with each other to give a uniform feeling to the effect. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, it is difficult to associate the rotations with each other and cause the player to recognize the rotations, since the plurality of rotation bodies are disposed separately to the left and right. There was a problem that the effect of the presentation could not be fully exhibited. The gaming machine C1 is made to solve the above-described problems, and makes it easy for the player to recognize the rotations of the plurality of rotating bodies in association with one another, and effects by rotating the plurality of rotating bodies. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which can fully exhibit the effects of the invention.

  That is, according to the gaming machine C1, since the second rotating body is formed in an annular shape and externally fitted concentrically with the first rotating body, the first rotating body and the second rotating body It can be rotated concentrically. As a result, the rotation of the first rotating body and the rotation of the second rotating body can be associated with each other to facilitate recognition by the player, and as a result, the effects of the effects of rotating the plurality of rotating bodies can be sufficiently exhibited. Can.

  In the gaming machine C1, a gaming machine C2 characterized in that the first rotating body is formed in a cylindrical shape.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1, the first rotating body is formed in a cylindrical shape, so that effect members and the like can be disposed on the inner peripheral side of the first rotating body. In this way, it is possible to perform an effect of rotating the first rotating body surrounding the periphery of the effect member and the second rotating body surrounding the periphery of the first rotating body around the effect member. As a result, an effect of rotating the plurality of rotating bodies can be more effectively performed.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the first rotating body includes a main body portion inserted into the holding member, and one side flange portion projecting outward in a flange shape on one side in the axial direction of the main body portion; The second rotating body is provided with the other side flange portion which protrudes outward on the other side in the axial direction opposite to the side flange portion and is opposed to the one side flange portion with the holding member interposed therebetween. A game machine C3 externally fitted on the main body of the first rotary body and disposed between the one side flange portion of the first rotary body and the holding member.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the first rotating body is formed on the main body portion to be inserted into the holding member and on one side and the other side in the axial direction of the main body portion The second rotating body is externally fitted to the main body of the first rotating body, and the one side flange portion and the holding member of the first rotating body are provided. And the holding structure of the first rotating body and the second rotating body by the holding member can be simplified.

  That is, according to the above configuration, since the main body of the first rotating body is inserted into the holding member, the first rotating body can be rotatably held by the holding member. Further, the other side flange portion of the first rotating body is abutted against the holding member, so that displacement of the first rotating body in one axial direction can be restricted, and the one side flange portion of the first rotating body performs the second rotation By being in contact with the body and the second rotating body being in contact with the holding member, the displacement of the first rotating body in the other axial direction can be restricted.

  Furthermore, since the second rotary body is externally fitted to the main body portion of the first rotary body, the second rotary body can be rotatably held by the holding member via the main body portion of the first rotary body. Further, the second rotating body is in contact with the one side flange portion of the first rotating body, and the other side flange portion of the first rotating body is in contact with the holding member, so that one axial direction of the second rotating body is obtained. The displacement of the second rotary body can be regulated, and the displacement of the second rotary body in the other axial direction can be regulated by the second rotary body being in contact with the holding member.

  The gaming machine C3 includes a first gear and a second gear which are disposed on the holding member and transmit the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first and second rotating bodies, respectively, and the first rotation. A gaming machine C4 characterized in that gears provided on the body and the second rotating body are engaged with the first gear and the second gear, respectively.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3, the first gear and the second gear which are disposed on the holding member and transmit the rotational driving force of the drive means to the first and second rotating bodies, respectively. A gear is provided, and a gear in which the first gear and the second gear are engaged is inscribed on the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, respectively. Thus, the structure for transmitting the rotational drive force of the drive means to the first and second rotating bodies can be simplified. In particular, when the main body of the first rotating body is formed in a cylindrical shape and the effect member or the like is disposed on the inner peripheral side of the main body, the first gear is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. The structure in which the second gear is meshed with the second gear is effective.

  In the gaming machine C4, the second gear is disposed on one side of the holding member and the first gear is disposed on the other side opposite to the one side of the holding member, and the first gear is disposed. Is engaged with a gear engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the other side flange portion of the first rotary body, and the second gear is engaged with a gear engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotary body Game machine C5 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C4, the second gear is disposed on one side of the holding member and the first gear is disposed on the other side opposite to the one side of the holding member. And the second gear is provided on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotary body while the first gear is engaged with the gear provided on the outer peripheral surface of the other side flange portion of the first rotary body. Since the first gear and the second gear are engaged with each other on one side of the holding member, for example, the first gear and the second gear are engaged as compared with the case where the first rotating body and the second rotating body are engaged respectively. The structure for transmitting the rotational drive force of the drive means to the first and second rotating bodies via the gear can be simplified.

  Further, the first gear and the other side flange portion of the first rotating body in which the first gear is engaged, the one side flange portion and the main body portion of the first rotating body and the second rotating body are disposed By being disposed on the other side opposite to the one side of the holding member, the first gear and the other side flange portion of the first rotating body are provided to the player who views the one side of the holding member from the front. It can be shielded by the holding member. That is, the structure which shields the 1st gearwheel and the other side flange part of the 1st rotating body invisibly can be simplified using a holding member.

  In any one of the game machines C4 and C5, a first transmission means for transmitting the rotational drive force of the drive means to the first gear, and a second transmission means for transmitting the rotational drive force of the drive means to the second gear And a game machine C6 characterized by comprising.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C4 or C5, the first transmission means and the second transmission means for transmitting the rotational drive force of the drive means to the first gear and the second gear are provided. The one rotation body and the second rotation body can be rotated by one drive means. In this case, the rotational drive force of the drive means can be transmitted to the first gear by the first transmission means, and to the second gear by the second transmission means by separate transmission paths. Therefore, for example, by setting the number of gears and the reduction ratio for each of the transmission paths, even when the two rotating bodies are rotated by one driving means, the two rotating bodies (first rotation The manner of rotation of the body and the second rotating body) can be different. As a result, an effect of rotating the plurality of rotating bodies can be more effectively performed.

  In any one of the gaming machines C4 to C6, the holding member includes a cylindrical portion which is formed in a cylindrical shape and protrudes to the one side, and the first holding member is provided on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion of the holding member. A game machine C7 characterized in that the second rotary body is rotatably disposed on the outer peripheral side of the cylindrical portion of the holding member, with the main body portion of the rotary body.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C4 to C6, the holding member includes a cylindrical portion formed in a cylindrical shape and protruding to one side, and the cylindrical shape of the holding member The main body of the first rotating body is rotatably disposed on the inner circumferential side of the portion, and the second rotating body is rotatably disposed on the outer circumferential side of the cylindrical portion of the holding member. It can be externally fitted to the main-body part of a 1st rotary body via a cylindrical part. That is, not only the first rotating body but also the second rotating body can be held by the holding member. Thus, the disposition positions of the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be defined on the basis of the holding member, respectively, and therefore, the gears engraved on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, The positional relationship between the first gear and the second gear disposed in the holding member can be defined with reference to the holding member. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the meshing of the gear and the first gear and the second gear engraved on the outer peripheral surface of each of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. As a result, uneven wear of the gear can be suppressed and drive resistance can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine C7, the first rotating body protrudes from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion and extends in the axial direction of the main body portion and is provided with a plurality of projecting portions spaced at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. A game machine C8 characterized by comprising.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C7, the main body of the first rotating body is protruded from the outer peripheral surface of the main body and extended in the axial direction of the main body and at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. Since the plurality of projecting portions spaced apart are provided, the contact area between the main body portion of the first rotating body and the cylindrical portion of the holding member is limited to the projecting portion, and the main body portion of the first rotating body is It can be smoothly rotated on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion of the holding member.

  In addition, it is preferable that the projecting portion is curved in an arc shape in which the shape of the cross section cut in a plane orthogonal to the axial direction of the main body portion is convex outward. Since the contact area with the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion of the holding member can be suppressed, and the main body portion of the first rotating body can be more smoothly rotated on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion of the holding member It is.

  In the gaming machine C8, the main body of the first rotary body is formed in a tubular shape, and the first rotary body is protruded from the inner peripheral surface of the main body and extends in the axial direction of the main body. A game machine C9 comprising: a plurality of inner protrusions disposed at positions in phase with the protrusions.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C8, the main body of the first rotating body is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the first rotating body protrudes from the inner circumferential surface of the main body and the axial direction of the main body And a plurality of inward projections which are disposed in the same phase as the projections (that is, on the back side of the area where the projections are formed). When molding with a resin mold, the shape of the main body of the first rotary body can be made uniform (symmetrical) on the outer peripheral surface side and the inner peripheral surface side, and the formability can be ensured. .

  In the gaming machine C9, the main body portion of the first rotary body is divided in the axial direction, and the divided portions are fastened and fixed by screws, and the screw is fastened at a position corresponding to the projecting portion Game machine C10 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C9, the first rotating body has the main body portion divided in the axial direction, and the divided portions are fastened and fixed by screws, and the screws are projecting portions The screw fastening portion is secured at the position corresponding to (1), that is, the projecting portion doubles as the screw fastening portion for fastening the screw, so that the strength of the screw fastening portion can be secured.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C10, it is disposed on one side of the holding member, and is formed at a position overlapping with the rotation locus of at least one of the first rotating body or the second rotating body in front view A game machine C11 comprising a light emitting means.

  According to the gaming machine C11, in any one of the gaming machines C1 to C10, the gaming machine is disposed at one side of the holding member at a position overlapping the rotation trajectory of at least one of the first rotating body or the second rotating body in front view Because the first and second rotating bodies are concentrically rotated, the light emitting means is played by the light emitting means on the rotation locus of at least one of the first and second rotating bodies. Can be made visible to That is, it is possible to perform an effect of rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body at a position overlapping the light emission by the light emitting means, and as a result, an effect of rotating the plurality of rotating bodies is more effectively performed. It can be carried out.

  In the gaming machine C11, at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body has a first portion in which the light emitting means is formed so as to be visible in an area overlapping a light emitting means in a front view. A game machine C12 characterized in that a second portion in which the light emitting means is formed so as not to be visible is alternately arranged in the circumferential direction.

  According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C11, at least one of the first rotating body or the second rotating body allows the light emitting means to be visible in a region where the rotation locus overlaps the light emitting means in front view Since the first portion to be formed and the second portion on which the light emitting means is formed to be invisible are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, the first and second rotating bodies are rotated when the first and second rotating bodies are rotated. By alternately passing the portion and the second portion in front of the light emitting means, the light emission of the light emitting means can be intermittently viewed by the player. That is, it is possible to perform an effect of associating the intermittent light emission of the light emitting means with the rotation while rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body respectively, and as a result, an effect of rotating the plurality of rotating bodies respectively Can be done more effectively.

<Feature D group> 8 hold production (excited time)
Based on establishment of acquisition conditions, acquisition means for acquiring information, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and information acquired by the acquisition means based on establishment of determination conditions On the basis of a predetermined decision, display means for displaying identification symbols corresponding to the one piece of information stored in the storage means before the determination condition is established. It is determined to be variable by means of symbol variable means for changing the display mode of the identification symbol, variable determination means for determining the identification symbol which can be varied by the symbol variable means, and the variable determination means Variable notification means for notifying the identification symbol, and the variable determination means is such that the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. In particular, based, the symbol varying means gaming machine is characterized in that what determines different the identification symbols and the normal time as the identification symbols which can be varied by D1.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed along with the game ball winning to the starting opening, and a fluctuation effect or a jackpot effect according to the lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal screen. And when winning in the starting opening, the game machine which remembers the right of the drawing to a fixed number and reports the number with a design is proposed (for example, JP, 2013-13528, A). However, in this type of pachinko machine, when it is determined and notified earlier that the lottery contents stored on hold are stored, the willingness to win the starting opening diminishes thereafter, and the game is stopped to wait for the lottery result. There is a problem that the game is played and the player gets bored. The game machine D1 is made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of reducing a problem that a player gets bored early in a game.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the information is acquired by the acquisition unit based on the establishment of the acquisition condition. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the storage means. Based on the information acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the judgment condition, the judgment of acceptance is executed by the judgment means. The identification symbol corresponding to the one information stored in the storage unit before the determination condition is established is displayed by the display unit. Based on a predetermined opportunity, the display mode of the identification symbol is varied by the symbol variable means. The identification symbol that can be varied by the symbol variable means is determined by the variable determination means. The identification symbol determined to be variable by the variable determination means is notified by the variable notification means. The variable determination means is different from the normal time as a identification symbol that can be varied by the symbol variable means based on the fact that the number of information stored in the storage means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. The symbol is determined by the variable determination means. Thereby, the player can be urged to play a game so that the information is stored up to a predetermined number or more. Therefore, the player's willingness to play the game can be increased, and the problem that the player gets bored with the game early can be reduced.

  The gaming machine D1 has operation means operable by the player and operation determination means for determining that the operation means is operated, and the predetermined opportunity is determined by the operation determination means by the operation determination means. A game machine D2 characterized in that it is determined that the operation has been made.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the operation determining means determines that the operating means operable by the player has been operated. When it is determined that the operation means has been operated by the operation determination means, a predetermined trigger is taken. This can increase the enjoyment of operating the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored early.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the variable determining means variably determines the plurality of identification symbols based on the fact that the number of pieces of information is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. A game machine D3 to be characterized.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, based on the fact that the number of pieces of information is a predetermined number or more, the plurality of identification symbols can be variably set by the variable determining means Since it is determined, there is an effect that it is possible to urge the player to play a game so as to store a predetermined number or more of information.

  In the gaming machine D3, when the variable determining means variably determines the plurality of identification symbols, a predetermined order is determined based on the fact that the operation determining means determines that the operation has been performed. A game machine D4 characterized in that the identification symbol of 1 is displayed by being changed by the symbol variable means.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3, when it is variably determined for the plurality of identification symbols by the variable determination means, it is determined that the operation is determined by the operation determination means. Since one identification symbol is variably displayed by the symbol variable means in a predetermined order based on the above, there is an effect that the notification can be made intelligibly to the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the symbol variable means is provided with a priori pass / fail judgment means for executing a judgment on the basis of the information stored in the storage means before the judgment condition is satisfied. The game machine D5 is characterized in that the information corresponding to the identification symbol to be varied is variably displayed in a notification mode based on the result of the success or failure judgment by the prior judgment device.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the following effects are exerted. That is, on the basis of the information stored in the storage unit before the determination condition is established, the on / off determination is performed by the prior yes or no determination unit. The information corresponding to the identification symbol to be varied is variably displayed by the symbol variable means in the notification mode based on the result of the determination of success or failure by the prior judgment device. As a result, the player can be notified of the result of the judgment of the success or failure prior to the notification of the result of the judgment of success. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play a game with an interest in the display mode changed by the symbol variable means.

  In the gaming machine D5, when a plurality of the identification symbols are variably determined by the variable determination means, any one of the information corresponding to the identification symbols which are variably determined. A gaming machine D6 characterized by being displayed by being changed by the symbol changing means in a notification mode based on the determination result determined by the priori success or failure determination means.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D5, when the plurality of identification symbols are variably decided by the variable deciding means, the information corresponding to the identification symbols variably decided Among them, since it is displayed by being changed by the symbol variable means in the notification mode based on the determination result determined by the preliminary yes or no determination means for any information, it is known before the determination result is displayed in the identification symbol It has the effect of being able to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine D6, when a plurality of the identification symbols are variably determined by the variable determination means, a plurality of the identification symbols are variably displayed to display one notification mode. A gaming machine D7 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D6, when the plurality of identification symbols are variably decided by the variable deciding means, the plurality of identification symbols are variably displayed. Since the notification mode of is displayed, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved by variously changing the notification mode.

<Feature D 'group> 8 hold production 2 (Waking time)
The acquiring means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of the acquiring condition, the memory means for storing the information acquired by the acquiring means, and the information stored in the memory means when the judgment condition is satisfied. A determination means for performing a determination based on the display means, a display means for displaying at least an identification symbol corresponding to the information before the execution of the determination by the determination means among the information stored in the storage means; Among the information stored in the storage means based on the trigger, the display means when the number of the information before the execution of the determination by the determination means is equal to or more than a predetermined number. A game machine D'1 comprising: symbol variable means for changing a display mode of at least the predetermined number of the identification symbols displayed on the display mode to a predetermined display mode.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed along with the game ball winning to the starting opening, and a fluctuation effect or a jackpot effect according to the lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal screen. And when winning in the starting opening, the game machine which remembers the right of the drawing to a fixed number and reports the number with a design is proposed (for example, JP, 2013-13528, A). However, in this type of pachinko machine, when it is determined and notified earlier that the lottery contents stored on hold are stored, the willingness to win the starting opening diminishes thereafter, and the game is stopped to wait for the lottery result. There is a problem that the game is played and the player gets bored. The gaming machine D'1 is made to solve the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing a problem that a player gets bored with a game early. .

  According to the gaming machine D ′ 1, the information is acquired by the acquisition unit based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored by the storage unit. When the determination condition is satisfied, the determination unit performs the determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition unit. The display means at least displays the identification symbol corresponding to the information before the execution of the determination by the determination means among the information stored in the storage means. Among the information stored in the storage means based on the predetermined opportunity, when the number of the information before the execution of the determination by the determination means is a predetermined number or more, the symbol changing means causes the display means to display The display mode of at least a predetermined number of identification symbols displayed is changed to a predetermined display mode.

  Thereby, the player can be urged to play a game so that the information is stored up to a predetermined number or more. Therefore, the player's willingness to play the game can be increased, and the problem that the player gets bored with the game early can be reduced.

  The gaming machine D'1 includes operation means operable by the player and operation determination means for determining that the operation means is operated, and the predetermined trigger is the operation performed by the operation determination means. A game machine D'2 characterized in that it is determined that the means has been operated.

  According to the gaming machine D'2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D'1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the operation determining means determines that the operating means operable by the player has been operated. Then, the case where it is determined by the operation determination means that the operation means has been operated is taken as a predetermined trigger. This can increase the enjoyment of operating the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored early.

  In the gaming machine D ′ 2, a variable in which an identification symbol whose display mode changes when the operation determination means determines that the operation means is operated is notified in an identifiable manner before the operation means is operated. A game machine D'3 characterized in that it comprises notification means.

  According to the gaming machine D'3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D'2, the identification symbol whose display mode changes when the variable notification means determines that the operation means has been operated is the variable notification means Since the notification is made to be identifiable before the operation means is operated, the player can operate the operation means while grasping which display pattern of the identification symbol is variable, and the operator can enjoy the operation of the operation means Can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored early.

  In the gaming machine D ′ 3, the variable notification means changes the display mode of the identification symbol into a variable notification mode to display when the operation determination means determines that the operation means has been operated. A gaming machine D ′ 4 characterized by informing that the identification symbol that is variable is identifiable before the operation means is operated.

  According to the gaming machine D'4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D'3, the variable notification means performs notification by changing the identification symbol itself to the variable notification mode, so the player can display which identification symbol Has the effect of being able to easily grasp whether it is variable.

  In game machine D'4, when a plurality of the identification symbols are changed to the variable notification mode by the variable notification means, it is determined in advance based on the determination that the operation determination means has operated the game. A game machine D'5 characterized in that the identification symbol of 1 is displayed by being changed by the symbol variable means in the order listed.

  According to the gaming machine D'5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D'4, it is determined that the operation determining means has been operated by the variable notifying means when the plurality of identification symbols are changed to the variable notification mode. Since one identification symbol is changed and displayed in a predetermined order based on the above, there is an effect that the notification can be made intelligibly to the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines D'1 to D'5, it has a prior determination means for performing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means before the determination by the determination means is performed. The gaming machine D 'is characterized in that the symbol variable means changes the display mode of the identification symbol to a predetermined display mode in a notification mode based on the determination result determined by the prior determination means. 6

  According to the gaming machine D'6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D'1 to D'5, the following effects are exerted. That is, before the determination based on the determination condition is performed, the determination is performed by the prior determination unit based on the information stored in the storage unit. Then, the display mode of the identification symbol is changed to a predetermined display mode in the notification mode based on the determination result by the prior determination means. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the determination result of the prior determination means before the determination means is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play a game with an interest in the display mode changed by the symbol variable means.

  In the gaming machine D′ 6, the predetermined order is an order in which the information corresponding to the identification symbol is stored in the storage unit, and the symbol variable unit is configured to display the display symbol of the identification symbol. A game machine D'7 characterized in that a display mode of an identification symbol corresponding to the second half of the order is changed to the notification mode.

  According to the gaming machine D'7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D'6, the following effects are exerted. That is, the order in which the display mode of the identification symbol is changed by the symbol variable means is the order stored in the storage means, and the display mode of the identification symbol corresponding to the second half of the order is changed in the notification mode. This can increase the enjoyment of operating the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored early.

  In any one of the gaming machines D'1 to D'7, the storage means is newly stored while the identification symbol changed to the predetermined display mode by the symbol variable means is displayed on the display means. A game machine D'8 comprising additional symbol variable means for changing the display mode of the identification symbol corresponding to the information to the predetermined display mode based on the predetermined trigger.

  According to the gaming machine D'8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D'1 to D'7, the following effects are exerted. That is, the display mode of the identification symbol corresponding to the information newly stored by the storage means while the identification symbol changed to the predetermined display mode by the symbol variable means is displayed on the display means, based on the predetermined trigger , By the additional symbol variable means to change to a predetermined display mode. Thereby, it is possible to urge the player to play the game continuously even after the information is stored up to the predetermined number or more. Therefore, the player's willingness to play the game can be increased, and the problem that the player gets bored with the game early can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines D'1 to D'8, in the case where all the information corresponding to the identification symbol changed to the predetermined display mode by the symbol variable device is determined by the determination device, Among the information stored in the storage means, the number of the information before the determination by the determination means is performed is equal to or greater than a predetermined second predetermined number, based on a predetermined trigger. A game machine D'9 comprising: second symbol variable means for changing a display mode of at least the second predetermined number of the identification symbols displayed on the display means to a predetermined second mode.

  According to the gaming machine D'9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D'1 to D'8, the following effects are exerted. That is, when all the information corresponding to the identification symbol changed to the predetermined display mode by the symbol variable unit is determined by the determination unit, among the information stored in the storage unit, the execution of the determination by the determination unit is At least a second predetermined number of identification symbols displayed on the display means by the second symbol variable means based on a predetermined trigger when the number of pieces of information before being performed is equal to or greater than a predetermined second predetermined number. The display mode of is changed to a predetermined second mode. As a result, after the player plays the game so that the information is stored to the predetermined number or more, the player can be urged to play the game such that the information is stored to the second predetermined number or more again. Therefore, the player's willingness to play the game can be increased, and the problem that the player gets bored with the game early can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines D'1 to D'9, the predetermined display mode is a combination of the display modes of a plurality of the identification symbols into one display mode. 10

  According to the gaming machine D'10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D'1 to D'9, the display modes of a plurality of identification symbols are combined to form one display mode, so the identification symbol There is an effect that it is possible to give the display aspect of the present invention a surprisingness and to increase the willingness of the player to play the game.

<Characteristics E group> Blank symbols are changed to push button notices and displayed On the basis of the establishment of the lottery conditions, lottery means for executing a lottery, and the lottery result by the lottery means among a plurality of different main symbols and the main symbols By displaying a plurality of symbol rows composed of sub-patterns different from the symbols side by side, the display means that can be displayed by the stopped and displayed combination of the main symbols of each pattern row and the lottery result specific to the display means In the gaming machine having a privilege giving means for giving the player an advantageous privilege on the basis of the combination of the main symbols indicating the symbol being displayed, the stoppage is made based on that a predetermined condition is established. Sub symbol design variable means for changing the display mode of the sub symbol of the displayed symbol row, and the sub symbol displayed variably displayed by the sub symbol variable means are displayed in a combined display mode The composite display means is displayed on the display means on the basis of the composition determination means for determining whether or not to be based on the lottery result by the lottery means, and the composition determination means determined to display in the composite display mode A game machine E1 characterized by having a combined display mode display means.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a pachinko machine that performs lottery on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting opening and displays on the liquid crystal screen the fluctuation effect and the jackpot effect according to the lottery result Are known. In this effect, effects of various patterns such as effects for giving the player a sense of expectation and effects for raising the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . In this type of pachinko machine, a gaming machine is proposed in which the gaming machine is provided with operation means (switches etc.) operable by the player and the player operates the operation means to change the effects of the game etc. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2010-075741). In such pachinko machines, for example, there is a machine that executes a lottery to change the game effect when the operating means is operated, in order to perform various effects when the player operates the operating means. . However, in this type of pachinko machine, the player's operation changes the effect of the game at a fixed timing, etc., and the player has a monotonous impression on the game, and the player gets bored early in the game There was a problem that The gaming machine E1 is made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a player from getting bored with a game early.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition. By displaying a plurality of different main symbols in the lottery result by the lottery means and a plurality of symbol rows composed of sub-symbols different from the main symbols between the symbols, the main symbols of each symbol row are stopped and displayed It is displayed by the display means in combination. Based on the display of the combination of the main symbols indicating the specific lottery result on the display means, the advantage giving means is provided with an advantage advantageous to the player. Based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the display mode of the sub symbol of the symbol row stopped and displayed is changed by the sub symbol variable means. Whether or not to display the sub symbol variably displayed by the sub symbol variable means in the combined display mode synthesized is determined by the combination determination means based on the lottery result by the lottery means. The composite display mode is displayed on the display means by the composite display mode display means based on the fact that the composite determination means determines to display the composite display mode. Thus, by displaying the composite display mode, it is possible to provide the player with an effect having a fresh taste. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

  In the gaming machine E1, when it is determined that the operation means operated by the player, the operation judging means for judging that the operation means was operated, and the operation judging means, the sub symbol variable means Operation variable display means for variably displaying the display mode to a specific display mode when the display mode of the sub symbol is variably displayed.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the operation determining means determines that the operating means operable by the player has been operated. If the display mode of the sub symbol is variably displayed by the sub symbol variable means when it is determined that the operation is determined by the operation determination means, the display mode is changed to a specific display mode by the operation variable display means. Is displayed. This can increase the pleasure of the player operating the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can participate in the game.

  In the gaming machine E2, the operation variable display means changes the display mode of the sub symbol to one of the specific display modes out of the plurality of specific display modes based on the lottery result by the lottery means. A game machine E3 characterized by being displayed.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the display mode of the sub symbol is variably changed to one specific display mode among a plurality of specific display modes. Since the display is made by the operation variable display means, the display mode of the sub symbol can be variously provided, and it is possible to provide the player with an effect having a fresh taste.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, after the symbol row is dynamically displayed for a predetermined period, symbol row stop means for stopping display in a predetermined order and two or more symbols by the symbol row stop means And a dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period of the symbol row when one or more symbol rows are dynamically displayed with the row stopped and the predetermined condition is satisfied. In this case, the dynamic display period determining means determines a specific dynamic display period different from the normal time. A game machine E4.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the following effects are exerted. That is, after the symbol row is dynamically displayed for a predetermined period, it is stopped and displayed by the symbol row stopping means in a predetermined order. When two or more symbol rows are stopped and displayed by the symbol row stopping means and one or more symbol rows are dynamically displayed, the dynamic display period of the symbol row is determined by the dynamic display period determining means Ru. If the predetermined condition is satisfied, the dynamic display period determining means determines a specific dynamic display period different from that of the normal time by the dynamic display period determining means.

  Thereby, it can be determined that the sub symbol is displayed variably according to the specific dynamic display period. Therefore, the player can play a game with interest in the dynamic display period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the problem that the player gets bored with the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the composition determining means is configured to easily determine the composition display mode when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific lottery result. A game machine E5 to be characterized.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines E1 to E4, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, the composite display mode is easily determined by the composition determining means, so It is possible to play the game in expectation of displaying the composite display mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, when the composite display mode is displayed, based on the lottery result by the lottery means based on the fact that the operation discriminating means has determined that the operation means has been operated. A game machine E6 characterized by comprising synthetic variable means for displaying the synthetic display mode variably displayed in a specific display mode.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, when the combined display mode is displayed, it is determined based on the fact that the operation determining means has been operated by the operation determining means. Since the combined display mode is variably displayed by the combined variable means in the specific display mode based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the player can intervene in the game, and the problem of getting bored early in the game is reduced It has the effect of being able to

  In the gaming machine E6, when it is determined to be displayed in the combined display mode by the combination determining means, the operation means operates the display mode variably displayed by the sub symbol variable means by the operation determining means. A game machine E7 characterized by having prohibiting means for prohibiting variable display even if it is judged that it has been done.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E6, when it is determined to display in the composite display mode by the composition determining means, the display mode variably displayed by the sub symbol variable means Even if it is determined that the operation means has been operated by the means, variable display is prohibited by the prohibition means, so the composite display mode is displayed by operating the operation means before the composite display mode is displayed. There is an effect that it can be determined whether or not the

<Feature E 'group> Display blank 2 instead of push button notice 2
A row of symbols provided with a determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and a plurality of different main symbols and a sub-pattern different from the main symbols as identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means is displayed Display means for dynamically displaying the symbol row on the display means; dynamic display period determination means for determining a period in which the symbol row is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means; A predetermined condition is established in a gaming machine having a first benefit granting means for granting a first benefit advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means. If the sub symbol is changed to a specific display mode by the sub symbol variable means for changing the display mode of the sub symbol during the dynamic display period and the sub symbol variable means is displayed, , Of said dynamic display period Gaming machine E'1, characterized in that the Ri period is one having a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a pachinko machine that performs lottery on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting opening and displays on the liquid crystal screen the fluctuation effect and the jackpot effect according to the lottery result Are known. In this effect, effects of various patterns such as effects for giving the player a sense of expectation and effects for raising the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . In this type of pachinko machine, a gaming machine is proposed in which the gaming machine is provided with operation means (switches etc.) operable by the player and the player operates the operation means to change the effects of the game etc. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2010-075741). In such a pachinko machine, for example, in order to execute various effects when the player operates the operation means, a lottery is performed to determine whether to change the game effect when the operation means is operated. is there. However, in this type of pachinko machine, the player's operation changes the effect of the game at a fixed timing, etc., and the player has a monotonous impression on the game, and the player gets bored early in the game There was a problem that The gaming machine E ′ 1 is made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a player from getting bored with a game early.

  According to the gaming machine E ′ 1, the determination unit executes the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition. As identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, a symbol row in which a plurality of different main symbols and a sub-pattern different from the main symbol are provided is displayed on the display means. Dynamic display means dynamically displays the symbol row on the display means. The dynamic display period determination means determines the period in which the symbol row is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. When identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means, the first benefit giving means provides the player with a first benefit which is advantageous to the player. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the display mode of the sub symbol is changed during the dynamic display period by the sub symbol variable means. When the sub symbol is displayed in the specific display mode, the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect by the remaining period of the dynamic display period. Thus, it is possible to provide a fresh-tasting effect using a sub-pattern. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

  In the gaming machine E ′ 1, the specific effect is a composite display mode in which a plurality of sub-symbols that become the specific display mode are combined after being changed to the specific display mode by the sub-symbol variable means. A game machine E'2 characterized in that it is an effect to be displayed.

  According to the gaming machine E'2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E'1, in order to display a composite display mode in which a plurality of sub-patterns that have become a specific display mode as a specific effect are displayed, the player tastes fresh. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a certain effect and to reduce a defect that the player gets bored with the game early.

  The gaming machine E'1 or E'2 has an operation means operable by the player and a predetermined condition determination means for determining establishment of the predetermined condition based on an operation of the operation means. A game machine E'3 to be characterized.

  According to the gaming machine E ′ 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E ′ 1 or E ′ 2, based on the operation of the operating means operable by the player, the predetermined condition judging means judges that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to increase the enjoyment that the player operates the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can participate in the game.

  In the gaming machine E'3, when the sub symbol is displayed in the specific display mode, the sub symbol variable means displays the specific display mode based on the operation of the operation means. A game machine E'4 characterized by displaying the sub symbol variably in the composite display mode.

  According to the gaming machine E ′ 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E ′ 3, the sub symbol is changed and displayed from the specific display mode to the composite display mode based on the operation of the operation means. In order to execute a specific effect, the player must positively operate the operation means, and the player can be urged to operate the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can participate in the game.

  In any one of the game machines E'1 to E'4, the display means displays a plurality of the symbol rows as identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the plurality of symbol rows are displayed for a predetermined period. After the dynamic display, the display control means has symbol row stop means for stopping display in a predetermined order based on the determination result by the determination means, and the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means In the case of the game machine E'5, the number of sub symbols stopped and displayed is made different based on the judgment result by the judgment means.

  According to the gaming machine E'5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E'1 to E'4, the following effects are exerted. That is, a plurality of symbol rows as identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means are displayed by the display means. After dynamically displaying a plurality of symbol rows for a predetermined period, the symbol row stopping means causes stop display in a predetermined order based on the determination result by the determining means. When the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means, the number of sub-symbols to be stopped and displayed is made different based on the determination result by the determining means. Thereby, the specific effect using the sub-pattern can be made an effect based on the determination result by the determination means, and a fresh-tasting effect using the sub-pattern can be provided. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

  In addition, when the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result, or when the determination result of the determination means is highly likely to be a specific determination result, the number of sub symbols stopped and displayed by the symbol row stop means is large It is good to do. By doing this, when the number of sub-patterns is large, the jackpot expectation level is high, and the player can be interested in a specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

  In any one of the game machines E'1 to E'5, the sub symbol variable means changes the sub symbol to the specific display mode when the determination result by the determination means is the specific determination result. A game machine E'6 characterized by being easily displayed.

  According to the gaming machine E'6, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines E'1 to E'5, the sub symbol variable means displays the sub symbol when the determination result by the determining means is a specific determination result. Since it is configured to be variably displayed in a specific display mode, it is possible to play a game expecting the specific display mode to be displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In any one of the game machines E'2 to E'6, the specific display mode is a display mode of the sub symbol changed into characters, and the combination effect mode is the specific mode. It is a character string which compounded a plurality of sub-patterns which became a display mode, and the above-mentioned specific production displays the above-mentioned synthetic production mode combining at least one copy of the character displayed as the above-mentioned specific display mode A game machine E'7 characterized in that.

  According to the gaming machine E'7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E'2 to E'6, the following effects are exerted. That is, the character string as a synthetic rendition mode is displayed by combining a plurality of displayed sub-symbols changed into characters as a specific display mode. A combined effect mode in which at least a part of the characters displayed as the specific display mode is combined is displayed as the specific effect. As a result, the player can predict a character string displayed as the composite display mode by looking at a plurality of characters displayed as the specific display mode. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an effect having a fresh taste, and to suppress an inconvenience that the player is bored with the game early.

  In addition, among the characters displayed as a specific display mode, it may be possible to partially notify that it is used for the character string displayed as a combined effect mode until the combined effect mode is displayed. By doing this, it is possible to provide a hint that predicts a character string to be displayed as a composite display mode, and it is possible to entertain the player.

  The effect storage means for storing a plurality of effects to be executed when the dynamic display is performed in any one of the game machines E'3 to E'7 and the effects stored in the effect storage means The first condition including the specific effect is selected when it is determined by the predetermined condition satisfaction judging means that the predetermined condition is met, and the predetermined condition is met by the predetermined condition satisfaction judging means A game machine E'8 comprising: an effect selection unit that selects a second effect that does not include the specific effect when it is not determined.

  According to the gaming machine E'8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E'3 to E'7, the following effects are exerted. That is, a plurality of effects to be executed when dynamic display is performed by the effect storage means are stored. The first effect or the second effect is selected by the effect selecting means based on the determination result of the predetermined condition satisfaction determining means. Thereby, different effects are selected based on the determination result of the predetermined condition satisfaction determining means while the dynamic display is performed. Therefore, only the effect can be changed while the dynamic display is performed based on the determination result of the predetermined condition satisfaction determining means, so that the amount of data regarding the dynamic display can be reduced.

<Feature F group> An extension effect is executed at the end of SPGT A display means capable of displaying an effect mode, and a clock means capable of counting even in a power-off state where the power supplied to the gaming machine is lower than a predetermined voltage value. And acquisition means for acquiring time information from the clock means, an elapsed time judgment means for judging the elapsed time based on the time information acquired from the acquisition means, and a predetermined elapsed time has elapsed by the elapsed time judgment means If it is determined that the display mode is switched to a specific effect mode and displayed until the predetermined period has elapsed, and if the predetermined period has elapsed, the predetermined condition is It is characterized by extending the period which displays the said specific production | presentation aspect, and the extension period setting means which sets the extension period to display when it is discriminate | determined to be established, and A gaming machine F1.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an RTC (real time clock) is provided in the gaming machine, and based on time data clocked by the RTC, the same effect is executed at the same timing among a plurality of gaming machines. There is known a gaming machine configured to change the display mode or the display mode (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-31695). In such a pachinko machine, the display mode is changed when the RTC reaches a preset time. However, in this type of pachinko machine, there is a problem that when the period in which the display mode is changed is over, the player's willingness to play decreases and the player gets bored with the game. The gaming machine F1 is made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a problem that a player gets bored with a game early.

  According to the gaming machine F1, the effect mode is displayed by the display means. Even when the power supplied to the gaming machine is less than a predetermined voltage value, the clocking means measures time. Time information is acquired by the acquisition unit from the clock unit. The elapsed time is determined by the elapsed time determination means based on the time information acquired from the acquisition means. When it is determined by the elapsed time determining means that the predetermined elapsed time has elapsed, the effect mode displayed on the display means is switched to the specific effect mode and displayed by the switching display means until the predetermined period elapses. When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the predetermined period has elapsed, the extension period setting unit sets an extension period in which the period in which the specific effect mode is displayed is extended and displayed. As a result, since the case where the specific effect mode is displayed is extended and the case where the period is not extended vary depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

  In the gaming machine F1, based on establishment of acquisition conditions, acquisition means for acquiring information, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and information based on establishment of lottery conditions. A lottery is executed based on the information acquired by the acquiring unit before the lottery condition is established, and the lottery unit for executing the lottery, the display unit on which identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery unit is displayed The predetermined condition is configured to be easily established when the information determined as the specific lottery result by the prior lottery means is stored Feature game machine F2.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the information is acquired by the acquisition unit based on the establishment of the acquisition condition. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the storage means. A lottery is executed on the information by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition. Identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means is displayed by the display means. The lottery is executed by the prior lottery means based on the information acquired by the acquiring means before the lottery condition is established. When the information determined as the specific lottery result by the advance lottery means is stored, the predetermined condition is easily established. Thereby, it can be expected that it is a specific lottery result by extending the period when the specific effect mode is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to play the game in anticipation that the period in which the specific effect mode is displayed is extended.

  The gaming machine F2 has a dynamic display period determination means for determining a period for dynamically displaying the identification information, and the elapsed time is determined before the period determined by the dynamic display period determination means has elapsed. A game machine F3 characterized by displaying the identification information as a temporary stop when the time has passed.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2, the following effects are exerted. That is, a period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed is determined by the dynamic display period determination means. If the elapsed time has elapsed before the period determined by the dynamic display period determination means has elapsed, the identification information is displayed as a temporary stop. Thereby, the dynamic display can be temporarily stopped in accordance with the end timing of the period in which the specific effect mode is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it easy for the player to distinguish the end timing.

  In the gaming machine F3, the gaming machine F4 displays the identification information in a specific dynamic display mode in a predetermined period until the elapsed time passes.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F3, the identification information is displayed in a specific dynamic display mode in a predetermined period until the elapsed time elapses, and therefore, it is specified that the elapsed time passes There is an effect that it can be determined in the dynamic display mode of

<Feature F 'group> 2 to execute the extension effect at the end of SPGT 2
The display means capable of displaying the effect mode, the predetermined period setting means capable of setting the predetermined period, the predetermined period judgment means for judging whether the predetermined period is set by the predetermined period setting means, and the predetermined period judgment means And the switching display means for switching and displaying the effect mode displayed on the display means to a specific effect mode when the time period is determined to be a predetermined time period, and the predetermined time period elapses, and the predetermined condition is satisfied. And an extended period setting unit configured to extend the period for displaying the specific effect mode and set the extended period for display.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine configured to execute the same effect or change the display mode at the same timing among a plurality of gaming machines has been known ( For example, JP-A-2013-31695). In such a pachinko machine, for example, an RTC (Real Time Clock) is mounted, and the display mode is changed when the time information acquired from the RTC reaches a preset time. However, in this type of pachinko machine, there is a problem that when the period in which the display mode is changed is over, the player's willingness to play decreases and the player gets bored with the game. The gaming machine F′1 is made to solve the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a problem that a player gets bored early in a game.

  According to the gaming machine F'1, the effect mode is displayed on the display means. The predetermined period determining means determines whether the predetermined period has been set by the predetermined period setting means. When it is determined that it is the predetermined period, the effect mode displayed on the display means by the switching display means is switched to a specific effect mode and displayed. When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the predetermined period has elapsed, the extension period setting unit extends and displays the period in which the specific effect mode is displayed. As a result, since the period in which the specific effect mode is displayed changes with the establishment of the predetermined condition, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

  In the gaming machine F'1, an elapsed time determination to determine an elapsed time based on time counting means capable of counting time, an acquisition means for acquiring time information from the time measurement means, and time information acquired from the acquisition means And the predetermined period setting unit sets the predetermined period based on the time information acquired from the clocking unit, and the predetermined period judging unit is the time information acquired from the clocking unit. A game machine F'2 that determines whether it is the predetermined period based on.

  According to the gaming machine F'2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F'1, the following effects are exerted. That is, time information is acquired from the timekeeping means by the acquisition means, and the elapsed time determination means determines the elapsed time based on the time information. The predetermined period is set by the predetermined period setting unit based on the time information acquired from the clocking unit, and the predetermined period is discriminated by the predetermined period judging unit based on the time information acquired from the clocking unit. As a result, a specific effect mode is displayed based on time information, so that it is possible to display an effect mode having a sense of unity with a plurality of pachinko machines. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

  In the gaming machine F ′ 2, based on establishment of acquisition conditions, information acquisition means for acquiring information, storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means, and based on establishment of determination conditions, The predetermined condition includes a determination unit that performs a determination on information, and a pre-determination unit that performs a determination based on the information acquired by the information acquisition unit before the determination condition is established. A gaming machine F′3 characterized by being easily established when the information determined as the specific determination result by the prior determination means is stored.

  According to the gaming machine F'3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine F'2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the information acquired by the information acquisition unit is stored in the storage unit based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the determination unit performs the determination on the information based on the establishment of the determination condition. Before the determination condition is satisfied by the prior determination unit, the determination is performed based on the information acquired by the information acquisition unit. When the information determined to be the specific determination result by the prior determination means is stored, the predetermined condition is easily established. Thereby, it can be expected that it is a specific determination result by extending the period when a specific presentation mode is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to play the game in anticipation that the period in which the specific effect mode is displayed is extended.

  The game machine F'2 or F'3 has an information input means capable of inputting specific information, and the predetermined period setting means includes the specific information inputted by the information input means, and the clocking means Based on the acquired time information, the period in which the specific effect mode is performed is set to at least a first predetermined period which is the predetermined period and a second predetermined period which is different from the predetermined period. The gaming machine F'4 to be.

  According to the gaming machine F'4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F'2 or F'3, the following effects are exerted. That is, specific information is input by the information input means. The predetermined period setting unit sets a period during which a specific effect mode is performed, based on the specific information input by the information input unit and the time information acquired from the clock unit. Thus, it is possible to set a period in which a specific effect mode is performed based on two pieces of information that can be input and time information. Therefore, since the period which performs a specific presentation aspect can be set to multiple patterns by combining two information, it is effective in the ability to provide an unexpected presentation. Moreover, even if it does not change the information which can be input, it is effective in the ability to change the period which performs a specific presentation aspect by changing time information.

  In the gaming machine F'4, the predetermined period setting means sets a period longer than the first predetermined period as the second predetermined period.

  According to the gaming machine F'5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F'4, the second predetermined period set by the predetermined period setting means is set as a period longer than the first predetermined period. When the effect mode continues for longer than the first predetermined period, the player can be made to imagine whether the extended period based on the establishment of the predetermined condition or the period set as the second predetermined period. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a defect that the player gets bored with the game early.

  One of the gaming machines F'3 to F'5 has dynamic display period determination means for determining a period for dynamically displaying the identification information, and the period determined by the dynamic display period determination means has elapsed A gaming machine F'6 having a temporary stop display means for displaying the identification information temporarily and displaying the identification information when the elapsed time has elapsed before performing the game.

  According to the gaming machine F'6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F'3 to F'5, the following effects are exerted. That is, a period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed is determined by the dynamic display period determination means. If the elapsed time has elapsed before the period determined by the dynamic display period determination means has elapsed, the identification information is displayed as a temporary stop. Thereby, the dynamic display can be temporarily stopped in accordance with the end timing of the period in which the specific effect mode is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it easy for the player to distinguish the end timing.

  In the gaming machine F'6, when the temporary stop display means displays the temporary stop and the extended period is set by the extended period setting means, a specific effect is produced after the predetermined period has elapsed. A game machine F'7 having a special effect display means for displaying a display mode on the display means.

  According to the gaming machine F'7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F'6, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the temporary stop display means is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the extension period is set by the extension period setting means, the specific effect display mode is displayed by the specific effect display means after the predetermined period has elapsed. Display on. As a result, the player for which the extension period has been set is displayed with the specific effect display mode from the state in which the temporary stop display is displayed, so that the player who has been temporarily stopped with the surrounding player is displayed with the surrounding player. Since a different specific effect display mode is displayed, a sense of superiority can be felt. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine F'7 is characterized by including indication effect display means for causing the display means to display indication effect suggesting that the extension period is set during the predetermined period. F'8.

  According to the gaming machine F'8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F'7, the suggestion effect indicating that the extension period is set by the suggestion effect display means is displayed on the display means during the predetermined period Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play the game, and to suppress the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

  In any of the gaming machines F'2 to F'8, the clocking means is configured to be capable of clocking even in a state where power is not supplied to the gaming machine. Machine F'9.

  According to the gaming machine F'9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F'2 to F'8, it is possible for the clocking means to clock even in the state where power is not supplied to the gaming machine. The timing can be constantly measured regardless of the power-on state of the gaming machine, and there is an effect that it is possible to accurately execute the specific effect mode based on the time information.

  In any one of the game machines F'2 to F'9, the clock means includes a correction means capable of correcting the current time.

  According to the gaming machine F'10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F'2 to F'9, the clocking means can correct the current time by the correcting means, so based on the time information Thus, there is an effect that a specific presentation mode can be accurately performed.

  A gaming machine according to any one of game machines F'4 to F'10, wherein said information input means has an input enabled period in which information can be input.

  According to the gaming machine F'11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F'4 to F'10, a period in which information can be input is set by the information input means. By setting it outside the possible period, the period in which the specific effect mode is displayed is not changed during sales, and there is an effect that the specific effect mode can be executed at a desired timing.

  In the gaming machine F'11, the acquisition means acquires the day of the week information as the time information, and the predetermined period setting means changes the time of day when the specific effect mode is displayed because the day of the week information is different. A game machine F'12 characterized in that it is set.

  According to the gaming machine F'12, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F'11, the day information is acquired by the acquiring means, and a specific effect mode is displayed by the setting means for a predetermined period by the acquired day information being different. Since the period to be performed is set to be different, there is an effect that it is possible to change the period of performing the specific rendering mode by changing the day information without changing the inputtable information.

  In any one of the gaming machines F'4 to F'12, the predetermined period setting means is capable of setting a plurality of periods for displaying the specific effect mode in time series. Machine F'13.

  According to the gaming machine F'13, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F'4 to F'12, the predetermined period setting means sets a plurality of time periods in which specific presentation modes are displayed in time series. Therefore, there is an effect that the work of setting the period in which the specific effect mode is performed can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine F'13, the acquisition means acquires time information as the time information, and the predetermined period setting means can set the period for displaying the specific effect mode from a plurality of different periods. Even if the period for displaying the specific effect mode is made different by the predetermined period setting means, the timing for executing the display of the specific effect mode is unified based on the time information. A game machine F'14 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine F'14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F'13, the following effects are exerted. That is, the acquisition means acquires time information. The predetermined period setting means enables setting the period for displaying the specific effect mode from a plurality of different periods, and unifies the timing for executing the display of the specific effect mode based on the time information even if different periods are set. Do. Thereby, even if the period for displaying the specific effect mode is different, the timing at which the display of the specific effect mode is performed can be unified, so that the player can execute the display of the specific effect mode It is not possible to grasp the length of the period in which the specific effect mode is displayed by the timing. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to play the game while being interested in whether or not the period in which the specific effect mode is displayed is over the predetermined period, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored with the game early effective.

  Display timing for setting the timing for executing the display of the effect mode displayed on the display means at predetermined intervals within the predetermined period set by the predetermined period setting means in the gaming machines F'1 to F'14 Setting means, effect mode executing means for executing the effect mode based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and execution of the effect mode by the effect mode executing means are waited until the timing set by the display timing setting means A game machine F'15 characterized by having an effect aspect standby means for effecting.

  According to the gaming machine F'15, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F'1 to F'14, the following effects are exerted. That is, within the predetermined period set by the predetermined period setting means, the display timing setting means sets the timing for executing the display of the effect mode displayed on the display means at a predetermined interval. The execution of the selection mode performed by the effect mode execution means based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition is made to stand by until the timing set by the effect mode standby means. As a result, the effect mode to be executed within a predetermined period is also executed at a predetermined timing. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect having a sense of unity among a plurality of gaming machines, and it is possible to suppress a defect that a player gets bored with a game early.

  A display execution time in which the time to execute the display of the effect mode displayed on the display means is set at predetermined time intervals based on the time information acquired by the acquisition means in the gaming machines F'2 to F'14. A production mode in which execution of the production mode by the production mode execution means and the production mode execution means for executing the production mode based on the establishment of the predetermined condition and the production mode is kept waiting until the time set by the display execution time setting means A game machine F'16 characterized by comprising a standby means.

  According to the gaming machine F'16, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F'2 to F'14, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the time information acquired by the acquisition means, the display execution time setting means sets the time for executing the display of the effect mode displayed on the display means at predetermined time intervals. The execution of the selection mode performed by the effect mode execution means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition is made to stand by until it is set by the effect mode standby means. As a result, the effect mode to be executed within a predetermined period is also executed at a predetermined time. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect having a sense of unity among a plurality of gaming machines, and it is possible to suppress a defect that a player gets bored with a game early.

  One of the game machines F'1 to F'16 has an operation means capable of performing a predetermined input operation, and the predetermined period setting means performs the predetermined period based on the predetermined input operation by the operation means. A game machine F'17 characterized by being set.

  According to the gaming machine F'17, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F'1 to F'16, the predetermined period by the predetermined period setting means is set based on the predetermined operation by the operation means. There is an effect that the predetermined period can be easily set to the desired period.

  In any one of the gaming machines F'1 to F'17, effect information output means for outputting effect information including at least specific effect mode information based on the specific effect mode displayed on the display means, and output of the effect information Effect information input means capable of inputting information corresponding to the effect information output by means; and specific effect mode setting means for setting the specific effect mode based on the information inputted by the effect information input means; A game machine F ′ 18 characterized by having:

  According to the gaming machine F'18, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F'1 to F'18, the following effects are exerted. That is, the effect information including at least the specific effect mode information based on the specific effect mode displayed on the display means by the effect information output means is output. Information corresponding to the effect information is input by the effect information input means. The specific effect mode setting means sets a specific effect mode based on the information input by the effect information input means. As a result, since it is possible to set a specific effect mode to be displayed on another pachinko machine, it is possible to freely synchronize the effect mode. Thus, the player's willingness to play the game can be increased, and the problem that the player gets bored with the game machine early can be reduced.

  It should be noted that the effect information output by the gaming machine F '18 may include information of a time during which a specific effect is displayed. By doing this, there is an effect that it is possible to synchronize the time when the specific effect mode is displayed, regardless of the timing at which the setting of the specific effect mode by the specific effect mode setting means is performed.

  In the game machine F'18, the effect information output means is configured to display the effect information on the display means in a mode that can be acquired by an external device.

  According to the gaming machine F'19, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F'18, the presentation information is output in a mode (for example, a two-dimensional information code) that can be acquired by the external device (for example, a portable terminal) In order to display, there is an effect that setting work of the specific production feature by the specific production feature setting means can be facilitated.

<Feature G group> Symbol size displayed with fish-eye liquid crystal First display means having a display area configured by arranging a plurality of first pixels configured in a first display size, and its first display means A second display unit having a display area arranged in the vicinity of the display area and arranged by arranging a plurality of second pixels having a second display size smaller than the first display size; A display control means capable of moving and displaying the same symbol data from the display means to the second display means or from the second display means to the first display means Machine G1.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine has been proposed which provides a novel rendering mode by arranging a plurality of display devices and providing different display modes to the player (for example, JP 2005-270417 A)). However, in this type of pachinko machine, there has been a problem that the load on display control increases and the control load increases. The gaming machine G1 is made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing control load.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the first display means is configured by the display area configured by arranging a plurality of first pixels configured in the first display size. The second display means is constituted by a display area which is disposed in the vicinity of the display area of the first display means and arranged by arranging a plurality of second pixels of a second display size smaller than the first display size. ing. The same symbol data is moved and displayed by the display control means from the first display means to the second display means or from the second display means to the first display means. Thus, by displaying the same display data on different display means, it is possible to display symbols in different display sizes. Therefore, even when it is desired to change the display size of the symbol to be displayed, it is possible to reduce the load of the control process of changing the enlargement ratio of the display data and the like. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine G1, a gaming machine G2 characterized in that the first display size and the second display size are each configured at a predetermined enlargement factor.

  According to the gaming machine G2, since the first display size and the second display size are each configured at a predetermined enlargement factor in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the size of the displayed symbol is a predetermined enlargement. There is an effect that it can be displayed differently by the rate.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, symbol data displayed in common to the first display means and the second display means is image information to be scrolled and displayed.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the symbol data displayed in common to the first display means and the second display means is image information to be scrolled and displayed. It is possible to scroll the symbols across the first display means and the second display means, and it is possible to provide the player with an effect having a fresh taste.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, a storage unit storing the symbol data to be displayed by the display control unit, and the symbol data acquired from the storage unit, the acquired symbol data is displayed as the display control unit Display data setting means for setting an enlargement factor to be displayed on the display means, the display control means moving from the first display means to the second display means or the second display means to the first display means A game machine G4 characterized by moving and displaying symbol data of the same magnification set by the display data setting means, in the case of displaying the characters.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the following effects can be obtained. That is, symbol data to be displayed by the display control means is stored by the storage means. The display data setting means sets the enlargement factor for acquiring the symbol data from the storage means and displaying the acquired symbol data on the display control means. When the display control means is moved from the first display means to the second display means or from the second display means to the first display means and displayed, the symbol data of the same magnification set by the display data setting means is displayed It is moved and displayed by the control means. Thereby, even if the enlargement ratio is not changed and set, the display sizes of the symbols can be displayed differently by the first display means and the second display means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the load due to the process of changing the display size of the symbol and displaying it.

  A game machine G5 according to any one of game machines G1 to G4, characterized in that the first display means has a display area larger than that of the second display means.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the first display means has a display area larger than the second display means, so that different impressions are displayed to the player There is an effect that can be performed.

  One of the gaming machines G1 to G5 has lottery means for executing a lottery based on establishment of the lottery conditions, and the display control means dynamically uses the symbol to indicate identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means. A game machine G6 characterized by being displayed.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, the lottery is executed by the lottery means. In the display control means, identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means is dynamically displayed by the display control means with a symbol. As a result, the lottery result can be determined by the symbol, and the player can be interested in the dynamic display of the symbol.

  In the gaming machine G6, the symbol indicating the identification information is set by scrolling the data set at a predetermined magnification on the second display means and enlarging the data, and then the symbol is set on the first display means at the magnification. A game machine G7 characterized by being scroll-displayed with data set at a predetermined enlargement ratio on the first display means after being moved and displayed with the above information.

  According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G6, the symbol indicating the identification information is the first display after the data set at the predetermined magnification is scrolled and enlarged by the second display means. Since the symbol representing the identification information is scrolled by the display control means with the data set at the predetermined enlargement factor on the first display means after being moved and displayed to the means with the information set at the enlargement factor. When moving and displaying from the display means to the first display means, when changing the enlargement factor and displaying, there is an effect that processing for changing the enlargement factor can be reduced.

<Feature G 'group> Symbol size 2 displayed with fisheye liquid crystal
A first display means having a display area configured by arranging a plurality of first pixels configured in a first display size, and the display area of the first display means being disposed in proximity to the first display means; A second display means having a display area formed by arranging a plurality of second pixels arranged in a second display size smaller than the second display size, and the first display means to the second display means or the second display means And a display control unit capable of moving and displaying the same symbol data on the first display unit.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine has been proposed which provides a novel rendering mode by arranging a plurality of display devices and providing different display modes to the player (for example, JP 2005-270417 A)). However, in this type of pachinko machine, there has been a problem that the load on display control increases and the control load increases. The gaming machine G′1 is made to solve the problems exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing control burden.

  According to the gaming machine G ′ 1, the first display means is configured by the display area configured by arranging a plurality of first pixels configured in the first display size. The second display means is constituted by a display area which is disposed in the vicinity of the display area of the first display means and arranged by arranging a plurality of second pixels of a second display size smaller than the first display size. ing. The same symbol data is moved and displayed by the display control means from the first display means to the second display means or from the second display means to the first display means. Thus, by displaying the same display data on different display means, it is possible to display symbols in different display sizes. Therefore, even when it is desired to change the display size of the symbol to be displayed, it is possible to reduce the load of the control process of changing the enlargement ratio of the display data and the like. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine G ′ 1, a gaming machine G ′ 2 characterized in that the first display size and the second display size are each configured at a predetermined enlargement factor.

  According to the gaming machine G'2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G'1, the first display size and the second display size are each configured at a predetermined enlargement factor, so the size of the displayed symbols There is an effect that can be displayed differently at a predetermined magnification.

  In the gaming machine G'1 or G'2, symbol data displayed in common to the first display means and the second display means is image information to be scrolled and displayed. '3.

  According to the gaming machine G'3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G'1 or G'2, the symbol data displayed in common to the first display means and the second display means is an image scroll-displayed Since the information is information, it is possible to scroll the symbols across the first display means and the second display means, and it is possible to provide the player with an effect having a fresh taste.

  In any one of the gaming machines G'1 to G'3, a storage unit storing the symbol data to be displayed by the display control unit, and the symbol data acquired from the storage unit, and the acquired symbol data is stored. A display data setting unit configured to set an enlargement factor to be displayed on the display control unit; the display control unit is configured to select the first display unit from the first display unit or the first display unit from the second display unit; A game machine G ′ 4 characterized by moving and displaying symbol data of the same magnification set by the display data setting means when the means is moved and displayed.

  According to the gaming machine G'4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines G'1 to G'3, the following effects are exerted. That is, symbol data to be displayed by the display control means is stored by the storage means. The display data setting means sets the enlargement factor for acquiring the symbol data from the storage means and displaying the acquired symbol data on the display control means. When the display control means is moved from the first display means to the second display means or from the second display means to the first display means and displayed, the symbol data of the same magnification set by the display data setting means is displayed It is moved and displayed by the control means. Thereby, even if the enlargement ratio is not changed and set, the display sizes of the symbols can be displayed differently by the first display means and the second display means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the load due to the process of changing the display size of the symbol and displaying it.

  A game machine G'5 according to any one of the game machines G'1 to G'4, wherein the first display means has a display area larger than that of the second display means.

  According to the gaming machine G'5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G'1 to G'4, the first display means has a display area larger than the second display means. This has the effect of being able to perform display effects of different impressions on the person.

  One of the gaming machines G'1 to G'5 has lottery means for executing a lottery based on establishment of the lottery conditions, and the display control means is configured to identify the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means. A game machine G'6 characterized by dynamically displaying a symbol.

  According to the gaming machine G'6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G'1 to G'5, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, the lottery is executed by the lottery means. In the display control means, identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means is dynamically displayed by the display control means with a symbol. As a result, the lottery result can be determined by the symbol, and the player can be interested in the dynamic display of the symbol.

  In the gaming machine G'6, the symbol indicating the identification information is scroll-displayed and enlarged data set at a predetermined magnification on the second display means, and then the data is displayed on the first display means at the magnification rate A game machine G'7 characterized in that after being moved and displayed with the set information, it is scrolled with the data set at a predetermined magnification on the first display means.

  According to the gaming machine G'7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G'6, the symbol indicating the identification information is scrolled and enlarged the data set at the predetermined magnification on the second display means. After the first display means is moved and displayed with the information set at the enlargement factor, the display control means scrolls and displays a symbol indicating identification information with data set at the predetermined enlargement factor on the first display means Therefore, in the case of moving from the second display means to the first display means and displaying it by changing the enlargement factor, the process of changing the enlargement factor can be reduced and processed.

In the <Feature H group> sub screen, the first display means having the first display area of the pseudo-variation specified in advance, the second display means having the second display area different from the first display area, and the acquisition condition Based on the establishment, it is determined that an acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a display control means for causing the first display means or the second display means to display an effect based on the information, and that a predetermined condition is satisfied. A condition determination unit, the display control unit, when it is determined by the condition determination unit that a predetermined condition is satisfied, an effect based on the information is set to the first display area or the first display area A game machine H1 moving from one of the two display areas to the other display area for display.

  Here, there is a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device and displaying various effect images on the display device (for example, JP-A-2013-13528) . However, although the above-described gaming machine can display various effect images, it provides a surprising game using the effect images because the effect image is displayed only at one place. There was a problem that the player could get bored without being able to do it. The gaming machine H1 is made to solve the above-described problems, and by providing a surprising game using the effect image, it is possible to alleviate the boredom of the player. Intended to be provided.

  According to the gaming machine H1, the display control means causes the first display means having the first display area or the second display means having the second display area to display an effect based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Be done. Then, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the condition determination means, the effect displayed in one of the first display area and the second display area is moved to the other display area. Since it can be displayed, it is possible to provide a surprising game, and it is possible to alleviate the boredom of the player.

  In the gaming machine H1, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and determination means for performing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means when a determination condition is established, and Dynamic display control means for causing the first display means to perform dynamic display for a predetermined period of time as the effect based on the judgment result by the judgment means, and the storage means before the judgment by the judgment means is performed An advance dynamic display for causing the second display means to perform an advance dynamic display as the pre-judgment means performing pre-judgment based on the stored information and the effect based on the pre-judgment result by the pre-judgment means A game machine H2 characterized by comprising control means.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed along with the winning of the gaming ball to the winning opening, and a variable display according to the lottery result is performed, and the right of the lottery is reserved and stored, There is a gaming machine which performs an effect (so-called, pre-reading effect) for changing the display mode during the variable display based on the content of the lottery of the hold storage (for example, JP-A-2012-16499). However, in the gaming machine described above, one display means executes the variable display according to the lottery result and the display of the pre-read effect described above, and performs the pre-read effect corresponding to the specific hold storage Since the effect mainly based on the specific hold storage is forcibly performed, there is a problem that the player is not interested in the variable display for the other hold storage. The gaming machine H1 is made to solve the above-described problems, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine which can prevent the player's interest from being lowered while performing an effect based on the holding memory. To aim.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the determination condition is satisfied, the determination means executes the determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and causes the first display means to perform dynamic display as an effect based on the determination result. Prior determination is performed based on the information stored in the storage unit before the determination by the determination unit is performed by the prior determination unit, and dynamic display is performed in advance on the second display unit as an effect based on the preliminary determination result Let me do it. Thus, by displaying the dynamic display on the first display means and the advance dynamic display on the second display means, each motion can be expected while expecting the lottery contents stored on hold by the advance dynamic display. Can watch the result of dynamic display. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the dynamic display from being lowered.

  In the gaming machine H2, the storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of information up to a predetermined number, and is an information selection means for selecting arbitrary information from the plurality of pieces of information stored in the storage means. A game machine H3, characterized in that the advance dynamic display control means performs advance dynamic display corresponding to the information selected by the information selection means.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the storage means stores a plurality of information with a predetermined number as the upper limit, and arbitrary information is selected by the information selection means from the plurality of stored information. The pre-dynamic display control means causes the pre-dynamic display to be performed on the information selected by the information selection means. As a result, the advance dynamic display based on the information desired by the player is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to relieve the player's boredom.

  In the gaming machine H3, the second display unit is configured to be able to display a plurality of advance dynamic displays corresponding to a plurality of information stored in the storage unit, and the information selection unit is configured to A game machine H4 characterized by selecting any prior dynamic display from a plurality of prior dynamic displays displayed on the second display means.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H3, the plurality of advance dynamic displays corresponding to the plurality of information stored in the storage unit are displayed on the second display unit, and the plurality displayed In the present invention, it is possible to make it easy for the player to select a desired pre-dynamic display in order to select an arbitrary pre-dynamic display from the pre-dynamic display by

  The gaming machine H3 or H4 has a holding symbol display control means for displaying a holding symbol corresponding to the information before at least the judgment by the judgment means is performed among the information stored in the memory means. The information selection means selects an arbitrary retention symbol from the plurality of retention symbols displayed by the retention symbol display control means, and the prior dynamic display control means selects the information retention means by the information selection means. A game machine H5 characterized in that it performs advance dynamic display corresponding to the held symbol.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H3 or H4, the following effects are exerted. That is, the holding symbol display control means displays a holding symbol corresponding to the information before the execution of the determination by the determination means at least among the information stored in the storage means. An arbitrary selection symbol is selected from the plurality of holding symbols displayed by the information selection unit, and the pre-dynamic display control unit performs the pre-dynamic display corresponding to the selected selection symbol. Thereby, any advance dynamic display can be selected while looking at the displayed holding symbol. Accordingly, there is an effect that the player can easily select a desired advance dynamic display.

  A gaming machine H6 characterized by having identification means for identifiably displaying the holding symbol selected by the holding symbol selection means in the gaming machine H5.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H5, the holding symbol selected by the holding symbol selection means is identifiably displayed by the identification means, so the hold corresponding to the displayed prior dynamic display There is an effect that it is possible to easily grasp which symbol is.

  The gaming machine H5 or H6 is characterized in that it has a reserve symbol display mode variable means for changing the display mode of the reserve symbol to a predetermined display mode that suggests the display content of the prior dynamic display corresponding to the reserve symbol. A game machine H7.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H5 or H6, the predetermined display indicating the display contents of the prior dynamic display corresponding to the holding symbol by the holding symbol display manner changing means. In order to change the mode, there is an effect that the player can easily select the desired advance dynamic display.

  One of the gaming machines H1 to H7 has information specifying means for specifying the information used for the determination by the determination means and the information used for the determination by the preliminary determination means, and the advance The dynamic display control means establishes a determination condition in which the determination by the determination means is performed based on the one piece of information on the preliminary dynamic display displayed based on the one piece of information specified by the information specification means. In this case, the gaming machine H8 is characterized in that the prior variation display is stopped.

  According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H1 to H7, the following effects are exerted. That is, the information specifying means identifies the information used for the determination by the determination means and the information used for the determination by the prior determination means. The prior dynamic display displayed based on the one information specified by the information specifying means is stopped when the judgment condition is satisfied in which the judgment by the judgment means is performed based on the one information by the preliminary dynamic display control means Let Thus, the advance dynamic display based on the one piece of information can be stopped at the timing when the dynamic display based on the one piece of information is started. Therefore, it is possible to display so that the pre-dynamic display arbitrarily selected by the player can be switched to the dynamic display without a sense of discomfort. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the dynamic display or the advance dynamic display from being lowered.

  A gaming machine H9 characterized in that any one of the gaming machines H1 to H8 is provided with switching means for switching the display contents displayed on the first display means and the display contents displayed on the second display means. .

  According to the gaming machine H9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H8, in order to switch the display content displayed on the first display means by the switching means and the display content displayed on the second display means The present invention is effective in that the player can display desired display contents on the desired display means, and it is possible to reduce a defect that the player falls into the game early.

  In the gaming machine H9, when the advance dynamic display corresponding to the one information selected by the information selection means is displayed by the first display means by the switching means, the switching means may When the dynamic display corresponding to the above information is started, the game display is switched to display the dynamic display on the first display means.

  According to the gaming machine H10, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H9, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the advance dynamic display corresponding to one piece of information is displayed by the first display means by the switching means, the switching means performs the dynamic display corresponding to the one information by the first display means Switch to display. Thereby, when the advance dynamic display corresponding to the information arbitrarily selected by the player is displayed on the first display means, the dynamic display corresponding to the information is continuously displayed on the first display means Therefore, the display can be made such that the prior dynamic display is switched to the dynamic display without a sense of discomfort. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the dynamic display or the advance dynamic display from being lowered.

  In any one of the gaming machines H8 to H10, the advance dynamic display includes a determination result mode display based on at least the determination result of the advance determination means, and corresponds to the one information specified by the information specifying means. A game machine H11 characterized in that the determination result aspect display displayed in advance dynamic display is continuously displayed also in the dynamic display corresponding to the one information.

  According to the gaming machine H11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H8 to H10, the following effects are exerted. That is, a determination result aspect display based on at least the determination result of the prior determination means is displayed as the prior dynamic display, and the determination result aspect displayed in the prior dynamic display corresponding to the one information identified by the information identification means The display is continuously displayed also on the dynamic display corresponding to one piece of information. As a result, since the determination result mode display is displayed across the preliminary dynamic display and the dynamic display, it is possible to perform an effect of continuing the preliminary dynamic display and the dynamic display without a sense of discomfort. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the dynamic display or the advance dynamic display from being lowered.

<Characteristics I group> Synchronous effect Based on the predetermined information input by the display means capable of displaying the effect mode, the information input means capable of inputting the predetermined information, and the information input means, the specific effect mode is selected. An effect period setting means for setting a period that can be displayed on the display means, and a specific effect for executing the specific effect aspect based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied within the period set by the effect period setting means A game machine I1 characterized by having an aspect execution means.

  Here, there is a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, which simultaneously executes synchronous rendering at predetermined time intervals (for example, JP-A-2007-252534). However, since the above-mentioned gaming machine performs control to execute synchronous rendering with time, the timing to perform synchronous rendering becomes monotonous, and there is a problem that the player is bored. The gaming machine I1 is made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which can alleviate the boredom of the player.

  According to the gaming machine I1, the effect is displayed on the display means. Based on the predetermined information input by the information input means, the effect period setting means sets a period in which the specific effect mode can be displayed on the display means. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect mode execution means based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied within that period. Thereby, based on the input predetermined information, the period which can display a specific presentation aspect can be set. Therefore, it is possible to change the setting of the period in which the specific effect mode can be displayed, and to alleviate the boredom of the player. In addition, by inputting the same information as predetermined information to the gaming machines arranged in parallel, it is possible to experience dynamic display at a desired timing, and it is possible to alleviate the boredom of the player. .

  The gaming machine I1 includes clocking means capable of clocking and time information acquiring means for acquiring time information from the clocking means, and the effect period setting means is acquired by the time information acquiring means. A game machine I2 characterized by setting a period in which a specific effect mode can be displayed on the display means based on time information and information input to the information input means.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the time information obtained by the timekeeping means is obtained by the time information obtaining means, and based on the time information and the information inputted to the information input means, a period in which a specific effect can be displayed on the display means is set. . Thereby, based on two information of time information and the information input by the information input means, the period which can display a specific production | presentation aspect can be set. Therefore, it becomes possible to set various periods by combining information, and it is possible to alleviate the boredom of the player.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, after the specific effect mode execution timing setting means for setting the timing for executing the specific effect mode within the period set by the effect period setting means, and after the predetermined condition is satisfied A specific effect mode execution standby means for making the execution of the specific effect mode wait for a period until the timing to execute the specific effect mode set by the execution timing setting means. A game machine I3.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1 or the gaming machine I2, the following effects are exerted. That is, within the period set by the effect period setting means, the specific effect mode execution timing setting means sets the timing for executing the specific effect mode. After the predetermined condition is established, the specific effect mode execution standby means waits for a specific effect mode to be performed during a period from when the specific effect mode set by the execution timing setting means is executed. This has the effect of being able to unify the execution timing of a specific effect aspect.

  In any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, among the effect mode storage means for storing a plurality of effect modes, and the plurality of effect modes stored in the effect mode storage means, a specification for setting the specific effect mode A game machine I4 characterized by having an effect mode setting means.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the following effects are exerted. A plurality of effect modes are stored in the effect mode storage means, and a specific effect mode is set by the specific effect mode setting means from among the effect modes. As a result, in order to set a specific effect mode that can be displayed within the period set by the effect period setting means from among a plurality of effect modes, it is not necessary to prepare data for a specific effect mode. Thus, the amount of data can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine I4, a gaming machine I5 characterized in that the specific effect mode setting means sets the specific effect mode based on time information acquired from the clock means.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I4, the specific effect mode is easily changed because the specific effect mode is set based on the time information acquired by the specific effect mode setting means from the clock means. It has the effect of being able to

  The gaming machine I4 includes operation means operable by the player and operation determination means for determining that the operation means has performed a predetermined operation, and the specific effect mode setting means includes the operation determination A game machine I6 characterized in that the specific effect mode is set based on a predetermined operation determined by means.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I4, the predetermined operation is performed by the operating means operable by the player, and the specific effect mode is set based on the predetermined operation determined by the operation determining means Therefore, the effect mode desired by the player can be set to a specific effect mode.

  In any one of the gaming machines I4 to I6, a special effect which restricts the effect mode set as the specific effect mode by the specific effect mode setting means, except for the period set by the effect period setting means A game machine I7 characterized by having mode execution restriction means.

  According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines I4 to I6, the effect mode set as the specific effect mode by the specific effect mode setting means by the specific effect mode execution restricting means Since it is limited so as not to be executed except for the period set in, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a special feeling of the effect while eliminating the need for preparing data for a specific effect mode.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I7, effect information output means for outputting effect information including at least specific effect mode information based on the specific effect mode displayed on the display means, and output by the effect information output means Having an effect information input means capable of inputting information corresponding to the effect information, and a specific effect mode setting means for setting the specific effect mode based on the information inputted by the effect information input means Feature game machine I8.

  According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I1 to I7, the following effects are exerted. That is, the effect information including at least the specific effect mode information based on the specific effect mode displayed on the display means by the effect information output means is output. Information corresponding to the effect information is input by the effect information input means. The specific effect mode setting means sets a specific effect mode based on the information input by the effect information input means. As a result, since it is possible to set a specific effect mode to be displayed on another pachinko machine, it is possible to freely synchronize the effect mode. Thus, the player's willingness to play the game can be increased, and the problem that the player gets bored with the game machine early can be reduced.

  It should be noted that the effect information output by the gaming machine I 8 may include information on the time during which a specific effect is displayed. By doing this, there is an effect that it is possible to synchronize the time when the specific effect mode is displayed, regardless of the timing at which the setting of the specific effect mode by the specific effect mode setting means is performed.

  In the game machine I8, the effect information output means is configured to display the effect information on the display means in a mode that can be obtained by an external device.

  According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I8, the effect information output means displays the effect information in an aspect (for example, a two-dimensional information code) that can be acquired by an external device (for example, a portable terminal). There is an effect that the setting operation of the specific effect mode by the specific effect mode setting means can be facilitated.

  Game machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C12, D1 to D7, D'1 to D'10, E1 to E7, E'1 to E'8, F1 to F4, F'1 to F'19, In any one of G1 to G7, G'1 to G'7, H1 to H11, and I1 to I9, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided. The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  Game machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C12, D1 to D7, D'1 to D'10, E1 to E7, E'1 to E'8, F1 to F4, F'1 to F'19, In any one of G1 to G7, G'1 to G'7, H1 to H11, and I1 to I9, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, and a gaming machine K2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

Game machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C12, D1 to D7, D'1 to D'10, E1 to E7, E'1 to E'8, F1 to F4, F'1 to F'19, A gaming machine K3 characterized in that in any one of G1 to G7, G'1 to G'7, H1 to H11, and I1 to I9, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. . Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko machines have been known which perform lottery in accordance with winning of a game ball to a starting opening, and display on a liquid crystal screen variation effects and jackpot effects according to the lottery results. In such an effect, an effect for causing the player to have a sense of expectation by performing an effect or the like for variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols, an effect for enhancing the player's willingness to participate in the game, etc. Various patterns of effects are executed to improve the interest of the game.
In such a pachinko machine, for example, after a symbol row is scroll-displayed for a predetermined period and then stopped and displayed, an effect that causes the player to expect whether a specific symbol in the symbol row is stopped and displayed. It is proposed that what is executed (for example, patent document 1: Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2010-075741).
In this type of pachinko machine, there is a problem that the player has a monotonous impression on the game and the player gets bored early in the game.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a player from getting bored with a game at an early stage.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 performs a determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and a plurality of different main symbols and the main as identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means. Display means for displaying a symbol row provided with a sub-pattern different from a symbol, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the symbol row on the display means, and moving the symbol row by the dynamic display means Dynamic display period determining means for determining a period to be displayed in a static manner, and a first benefit giving a first benefit advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means Means for changing the display mode of the sub symbol during the dynamic display period when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the sub symbol variable means The display pattern specific to the secondary symbol When it is displayed is variable, the remaining period of the dynamic display period is one having a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect.
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, the specific effect is the specific display mode after being changed to the specific display mode by the sub symbol variable means. It is an effect of displaying a combined display mode in which a plurality of sub symbols are combined.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the predetermined condition is determined based on the operation means operable by the player and the operation of the operation means. And determining means.
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 4, in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 3, the sub symbol variable means operates the operation means when the sub symbol is displayed in the specific display mode. Based on the display, the sub symbol displayed in the specific display mode is variably displayed in the composite display mode.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 4, wherein the display means displays a plurality of the symbol rows as identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means. Yes, there are symbol row stop means for displaying the plurality of symbol rows dynamically for a predetermined period, and then displaying the symbols in a predetermined order based on the determination result by the determination means, and the specific effect When the specific effect is being executed by the execution means, the number of sub-symbols to be stopped and displayed is made different based on the determination result by the determination means.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the determination means executes the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition. As identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, a symbol row in which a plurality of different main symbols and a sub-pattern different from the main symbol are provided is displayed on the display means. Dynamic display means dynamically displays the symbol row on the display means. The dynamic display period determination means determines the period in which the symbol row is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. When identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means, the first benefit giving means provides the player with a first benefit which is advantageous to the player. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the display mode of the sub symbol is changed during the dynamic display period by the sub symbol variable means. When the sub symbol is displayed in the specific display mode, the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect by the remaining period of the dynamic display period.
Thus, it is possible to provide a fresh-tasting effect using a sub-pattern. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, a combined display mode is displayed in which a plurality of sub-patterns which have become a specific display mode as a specific effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an effect having a fresh taste, and it is possible to reduce the inconvenience that the player gets bored with the game early.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the predetermined condition judging means performs the predetermined condition based on the operation of the operating means operable by the player. Since the determination is made, it is possible to increase the enjoyment that the player operates the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can participate in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, the sub symbol is changed from the specific display mode to the composite display mode based on the operation of the operating means. In order to variably display, in order to execute a specific effect, the player must positively operate the operation means, and the player can be urged to operate the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can participate in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 4, the following effect is exerted. That is, a plurality of symbol rows as identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means are displayed by the display means. After dynamically displaying a plurality of symbol rows for a predetermined period, the symbol row stopping means causes stop display in a predetermined order based on the determination result by the determining means. When the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means, the number of sub-symbols to be stopped and displayed is made different based on the determination result by the determining means.
Thereby, the specific effect using the sub-pattern can be made an effect based on the determination result by the determination means, and a fresh-tasting effect using the sub-pattern can be provided. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
22 frame button (operation means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
114 display control device S3 14 determination means
S1004 jackpot control processing S1819 Figure pattern variable hand stage

Claims (2)

Determining means for performing the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition;
Display means for identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination unit is displayed,
And dynamic display means capable of said identification information Ru is dynamically displayed on the display means,
If the determination result by the determining means is displayed by said identification information to indicate that it is the specific determination result had a privilege granting means capable of imparting favorable Privilege the player In gaming machines,
The identification information is configured by a plurality of symbol rows, and is displayed by a combination of specific symbols, so as to indicate that the determination result by the determination means is the specific determination result,
Of the plurality of symbol rows, in the symbol rows other than one symbol row, it is possible to display a sub-symbol different from the symbol.
The dynamic display means can display other than the one symbol row in a reach display mode that can be a combination for indicating the specific determination result,
The gaming machine is
Operation means operable by the player;
The reach display mode in which the sub symbol is displayed in addition to the one symbol row by the dynamic display means is displayed, and symbols which are combinations other than the combination of the particular symbol are stopped and displayed in the one symbol row And a symbol variable unit capable of variably displaying the display pattern of the sub symbol stopped and displayed.
The variable sub-pattern is displayed in such a manner that the symbol stopped and displayed in the one symbol row can not be visually recognized,
Based on the operation means being operated, it is possible to variably display the symbols of the symbol row of the one symbol line that is no longer visible as a symbol to be a combination of the specific symbols so as to be visibly displayed. A gaming machine characterized by being The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the display means is constituted by a liquid crystal display.

Images